Versus – Trusted Reviews

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs MacBook Air M3: Which should you buy?

Hannah Davies — Tue, 04 Jun 2024 11:43:22 +0000

Microsoft recently unveiled the Surface Pro 11, the latest update to its flagship line of 2-in-1s with a renewed focus on AI.

Prices for the 13-inch Surface Pro 11 start at £1049, while Apple’s MacBook Air M3 starts at £1099 for the 13-inch model or £1299 for the 15-inch version. This means you could pick up the MacBook for just £50 more, a factor that might leave you torn between the two devices.

We’ve pitted the Surface Pro 11 and the MacBook Air M3 head-to-head to help you decide which one is right for you.

The MacBook Air M3 is powered by Apple’s M3 chip

The MacBook Air M3 is powered by the Apple M3, a chip that made its debut alongside the MacBook Pro and iMac in late 2023.

The M3 consists of an 8-core CPU, an up to 10-core GPU, a 16-core Neural Engine and support for up to 24GB of unified memory. According to Apple, the MacBook Air M3 is up to 60% faster than the MacBook Air M1 and up to 13x faster than the fastest Intel-based MacBook Air. These are improvements that should be reflected in demanding tasks like video editing and software development as well as more casual everyday use.

The GPU also supports hardware-accelerated mesh shading and ray tracking for more accurate lighting and shadows when gaming.

Microsoft Surface Pro 11

The Microsoft Surface Pro 11 is designed with AI in mind

The Microsoft Surface Pro 11 is also designed to offer powerful performance. Microsoft has placed a particular emphasis on AI this time around.

The Snapdragon X Elite and Plus processors offer up to 90% faster performance compared to the Surface 9 Pro, while the NPU enables up to 45 trillion operations per second. The chipset powers Microsoft’s AI companion, Copilot, to assist you throughout your day.

Microsoft highlights a range of useful Copilot+ features, including live captions and translations for videos, better-looking and sounding video calls, Recall to help locate specific documents and web pages, and Cocreator to generate digital art from text and image prompts.

The MacBook Air M3 includes a keyboard

The MacBook Air M3 is a laptop, meaning it comes with a keyboard attached as part of its design.

The Surface Pro 11, on the other hand, is a 2-in-1. This essentially means the device can be used as a tablet or paired with a keyboard case to function like a laptop. While this design offers greater versatility and is great for portability, it also requires you to pick up a keyboard separately whereas the MacBook Air M3 comes ready for you to type out of the box.

Apple MacBook Air M3

The Microsoft Surface Pro 11 includes stylus support

Being a 2-in-1, the Microsoft Surface Pro 11 also features a touchscreen. When paired with the Slim Pen (sold separately), you can use the device to take notes, sketch ideas, and create digital art intuitively with a stylus.

The MacBook Air M3 does not offer touch support. If you want to sketch on an Apple product, you’re better off opting for an iPad. Apple’s tablet line can also be paired with accessories like keyboards and the Apple Pencil, so you can configure your setup as you would the Surface Pro 11.

The MacBook Air M3 has a longer battery life

When it comes to battery life, both devices offer marked improvements over their respective predecessors. However, the MacBook Air M3 comes out on top when it comes to video playback, offering up to 18 hours of movie streaming in the Apple TV app.

The Surface Pro 11, meanwhile, can deliver up to 14 hours of video playback. That’s four hours fewer than the MacBook Air M3.

You might like…

The post Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs MacBook Air M3: Which should you buy? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Cloud storage vs external hard drives: Which is better?

Hannah Davies — Mon, 03 Jun 2024 15:46:05 +0000

From important documents and device backups to years of photos and memories, a huge portion of our lives are stored on computers these days. The question is, how should you store them?

Two of the most popular places to back up data are on external hard drives and in the cloud. However, both methods have their benefits and drawbacks. Keep reading to discover how they compare.

Is it better to store data on a cloud or hard drive?

Both options are designed for backing up devices and storing files you cannot fit on your devices.

An external hard drive is one of the most common ways to store files, photos, and other data. These are small storage devices that connect to your devices via a wired connection, such as USB or Thunderbolt.

Opting to store your data on an external hard drive means you aren’t reliant on a strong internet connection to access your files. You also won’t need to rely on a company to handle your data properly – something that is especially crucial in the rare instance of a breach or cyber attack.

One downside to using an external hard drive is that these are physical devices. This means you’ll need to carry the hard drive around if you want to access your data out and about. It also means that if your hard drive is dropped, damaged, or corrupted, you risk losing all of the data it holds.

Seagate Backup Plus

Cloud storage is another method that has gained increased prominence in the last decade or so. Cloud services allow you to securely store your data online using remote servers. This means that you can effectively sign into your account and access your data anywhere and on any device.

This is especially useful for backing up and restoring devices as backups can be scheduled to run automatically while you go about your day. Likewise, transferring data from an old smartphone to a new one is as easy as hitting download.

Popular examples of cloud storage services include Dropbox, iCloud, Google Drive, and Microsoft OneDrive. Some services are free, prompting you to only spend money if you need a larger amount of storage, while others require a monthly or yearly subscription fee to get started.

Cons to storing your data on the cloud are that you need to trust that your cloud service provider is storing and protecting your data from attacks adequately. You also need to make sure you pick a secure password to sign in and have a decent internet connection to move your data.

iCloud

Do you need to back up your data?

Of course, you can store your data solely on your devices – provided you have the space – but there’s a definite element of risk to it. It isn’t easy to predict if your laptop or tablet will break or become compromised, and all it takes is someone snatching your phone in a cafe or bar to lose all the notes, photos, and messages stored on it.

It’s best to back up your data regularly in one way or another to protect your data if something does happen to your device.

You might like…

The post Cloud storage vs external hard drives: Which is better? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

ROG Ally X vs Steam Deck OLED: What’s the difference?

Lewis Painter — Mon, 03 Jun 2024 14:53:44 +0000

Asus has finally revealed its new premium gaming handheld, the ROG Ally X, but how does it compare to Valve’s popular Steam Deck OLED?

While the two portable gaming machines look similar on the surface, there are key differences between the two, from screen tech to processing power and pricing, that could sway your buying decision one way or the other.

While we’ve not yet gone hands-on with the ROG Ally X, we’ve spent plenty of time with the Steam Deck OLED. With that said, here’s how the two compare on paper.

The Steam Deck OLED has better screen tech

The Steam Deck OLED has a trick up its sleeve in the form of, yes, you guessed it, an OLED display.

Steam Deck OLED

More specifically, the Stream Deck OLED sports a 7.4-inch touchscreen OLED screen with a 1200 x 800 resolution. While the latter is dwarfed by the ROG Ally X’s Full HD resolution, the OLED tech should deliver a superior visual experience with deep blacks and vibrant colours that’ll look incredible.

That said, the ROG Ally X’s 7-inch LCD screen shouldn’t be written off entirely, even if it can’t achieve such deep blacks as the competing OLED panel. As noted, it has a higher Full HD (1920 x 1080) resolution, and it also has a faster refresh rate at 120Hz compared to the Steam Deck OLED’s 90Hz refresh rate which allows for more frames per second in games.

The ROG Ally X has a larger battery

When it comes to battery life, the ROG Ally X should have the upper hand with a much larger battery than the Steam Deck OLED, measuring at 80Wh compared to the 50Wh of its competitor.

The ROG Ally X’s AMD Ryzen Z1 Extreme chipset – that we’ll get to in a sec – is also much more energy efficient, produced using a 4nm process, compared to the 7nm process of the Steam Deck OLED’s custom AMD processor.

The two combined should result in much better day-to-day battery life than the Steam Deck OLED, but we can’t say for sure until we’ve benchmarked the new handheld games console.

ROG Ally X

The ROG Ally X has a more capable processor

As we just mentioned, the ROG Ally X sports the same AMD Ryzen Z1 Extreme chipset as the regular ROG Ally – hence why this is a variant of the original ROG Ally and not the ROG Ally 2.

That said, even without a new chipset for the ROG Ally X, Asus’ handheld remains the more capable of the two when compared to the Steam Deck OLED.

The custom AMD chipset used within Valve’s handheld is built on a rather dated 7nm process, with four cores and eight threads that clock in at a maximum of 3.5GHz. The ROG Ally X’s Z1 Extreme, on the other hand, is built on a more efficient 4nm process, and with a boosted eight cores with 16 threads, it clocks in at an impressive 5.1GHz.

While we’ve not specifically benchmarked the ROG Ally X just yet, we can look at just how well the ROG Ally and its identical Z1 Extreme chipset compares to the Steam Deck OLED to get some idea of the performance on offer.

The ROG Ally X has more RAM

One of the key upgrades of the ROG Ally X compared to the regular ROG Ally is an abundance of RAM, with the Ally X sporting an upgraded 24GB of LPDDRX5 7400 memory that should further improve the performance of the top-end gaming handheld.

That’s also a big jump compared to the Steam Deck OLED’s RAM offering, coming with just 16GB of slightly slower LPDDR5 RAM. It’ll be interesting to see how the difference in RAM will translate to the gaming experience once we go hands-on in the near future.

Steam Deck OLED

The Steam Deck OLED is cheaper

With a faster processor, more RAM and other upgrades compared to the Steam Deck OLED, it shouldn’t be too surprising to learn that the ROG Ally X is the more expensive of the two gaming handhelds – and by a fair bit too.

That’s because the Steam Deck OLED starts at a rather tempting £479 if you want 512GB of storage, jumping to £569 if you want 1TB of storage to play with. The ROG Ally X, on the other hand, comes in at a cool £799 with 1TB of storage as standard.

The Steam Deck OLED is available to buy now, while the ROG Ally X is expected to be released in the coming weeks.

You might like…

The post ROG Ally X vs Steam Deck OLED: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

ROG Ally X vs MSI Claw: Which handheld should you go for?

Jessica Gorringe — Mon, 03 Jun 2024 14:21:37 +0000

Asus has just launched its newest handheld gaming PC, the ROG Ally X, as a premium upgrade to the (still readily available) ROG Ally. But how does it compare to another one of the big hitters in the market, the MSI Claw?

Although we haven’t tried the Ally X portable gaming machine for ourselves just yet, we’ve compared its specs to the MSI Claw which was announced at CES 2024. We have spent some time with the MSI Claw, however, even if we have yet to conclusively rate MSI’s handheld PC.

That said, here’s how the two gaming handhelds compare on paper.

Both have similar designs

Both share a similar design, especially now the ROG Ally X has an all-black finish much like the MSI Claw. Naturally as handheld devices, both promise to prioritise comfort for longer periods of gaming, with the Ally X featuring “more substantial handgrips with a carefully contoured curvature” and the MSI Claw “designed to fit the natural contours of your grip.”

The two handhelds are even near-identical in their weight, with the newer ROG Ally X weight 678g and the MSI Claw weight 675g.

Both also include RGB lighting and a fingerprint sensor for added security.

ROG Ally X

The MSI Claw runs on Intel’s latest laptop processor

Impressively the MSI Claw runs on the Intel Core Ultra 7 processor and is actually the first gaming handheld to be powered by this. In our early verdict, our reviewer did note that as the MSI Claw uses integrated Intel Arc graphics, you shouldn’t expect “a high-end gaming performance.” Even so, he also noted that it was able to run Assassin’s Creed Mirage “perfectly well” with “no obvious slowdowns or frame rate drops”.

In comparison, the ROG Ally X runs on the gaming chip AMD Ryzen Z1 Extreme and uses AMD Radeon Graphics.

AMD Ryzen Z1 Extreme is fitted with Asus’ ROG Intelligent Cooling which keeps the device cool regardless of how you’re holding it. Similarly, the MSI Claw also features its “revolutionary” intraflow thermal design which redirects parts of the airflow to keep all components.

As we are yet to conclusively review either of the handheld devices we can’t verify if one is faster or more capable than the other.

MSI Claw – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The ROG Ally X has a Corning Gorilla Glass DXC coating

The ROG Ally X has a Corning Gorilla Glass Victus display with a DXC coating. Not only does the Gorilla Glass increase hardness by over 40% to improve scratch resistance, but the coating helps reduce surface reflections to make it easier for users to see what’s on screen even in bright or outdoor lighting.

Aside from that, both displays are actually fairly similar with a 7-inch Full HD panel, 500-nit peak brightness and a 120Hz refresh rate too.

The MSI has access to the Google Play Store

Both the MSI Claw and ROG Ally X run on Windows 11 operating systems which means you’ll have access to most PC stores and apps including Steam, Game Pass and Epic Games Store. The MSI Claw even has access to the Google Play Store which gives you access to all the games available on Android smartphones.

The two also have different interfaces, with the ROG Ally X using the newly optimised Armoury Crate SE interface and the MSI Claw using MSI Centre M. The ROG Ally X includes a customisable game library, offers easy navigation, BIOS and driver updates while the MSI’s interface was designed specifically for handheld devices and offers quick settings, macro-keys settings and a control mode.

The ROG Ally X has a better battery life

The MSI Claw promises to be a huge improvement with its battery life, offering 53Wh which MSI claims is “best-in-class battery life” with power that supposedly lasts “50% longer compared to market average”.

The ROG Ally X however does better and boasts a massive 80Wh battery which is not only 27Wh more than the MSI Claw but even double that of its predecessor ROG Ally. As we haven’t tested either the ROG Ally X or the MSI Claw’s battery capacity ourselves, we’ll have to wait to see if these claims hold up.

What we do know is the ROG Ally’s 40Wh battery struggled to play triple-A console games for more than 90 minutes, so the ROG Ally X should in theory last for around three hours.

You might like…

The post ROG Ally X vs MSI Claw: Which handheld should you go for? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Asus ROG Ally vs ROG Ally X: Battle of the handhelds

Lewis Painter — Mon, 03 Jun 2024 09:06:46 +0000

Asus has announced a new model of its handheld gaming PC, the ROG Ally X. But how does it compare to the regular ROG Ally?

Rather than acting as a direct sequel to the original ROG Ally, the new X model is instead a more expensive option, with Asus planning to sell both versions simultaneously.

But what kind of upgrades are you getting by opting for the ROG Ally X? With Asus officially lifting the lid on the £799 ROG Ally X at Computex 2024, here are five key differences between the Ally X and the regular Ally.

Improved battery life

The key selling point of the Asus ROG Ally X is undoubtedly the extended battery life. Asus says that it was one of the most requested upgrades, and so has slapped in a larger battery pack so gamers can play on the go for longer.

In fact, the ROG Ally X boasts a whopping 80Wh battery, double that of the regular ROG Ally. Given that the current ROG Ally struggles to play AAA games with max settings for more than 90 minutes, we’re hoping that the Ally X will be able to hit the 3-hour mark – but we’ll have to wait until we’ve reviewed it to say for sure.

Of course, fitting in a larger battery pack will make the ROG Ally X a heavier portable than its predecessor, but it’s not as big an increase as some might expect at only 678g, 70g more than the regular Ally.

Boosted RAM and longer M.2 slot

Asus has confirmed that it won’t be upgrading the main chip for the Asus ROG Ally X, so it will still be powered by the AMD Z1 Extreme found inside the original ROG Ally. However, Asus said the portable should still get a performance boost, but in the form of more RAM and improved cooling.

More specifically, the ROG Ally X sports 24GB of LPDDRX5 7500 memory, up from 16GB on the regular Ally X. The cooling system’s fans are 50% thinner and boast a 10% boost to airflow, with two small wind tunnels to direct air around the system and a third exhaust vent to jet out that hot air.

Asus says this also has a notable effect on touchscreen temperatures, which are reduced by around 6 degrees Celcius.

Asus has also said it has also the M.2 SSD slot to M.2 2280, making it easier for you to find an SSD to upgrade the 1TB of base storage if you wish to do so. This is great to hear, as you’re currently restricted to very short drives, which restricts your options and inflates the price.

Asus ROG Ally – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

New placement for SD card reader

Many existing Asus ROG Ally owners have reported issues with the SD card reader, with the port seeing unusually slow read speeds or even sometimes failing to recognise any inserted card. It has been suggested the close proximity to the portable’s vents could potentially be the cause of this.

With the ROG Ally X, Asus has moved the placement of the SD Card reader away from the vents, which should hopefully rectify the issue.

New all-black design

The most striking difference to the design of the Asus ROG Ally X is the new black colour option, helping it to be visibly distinctive compared to the original. We welcome the new black colour, as it’s generally better at hiding scuff marks and the like.

ROG Ally X

It also has a number of smaller design changes in a bid to make the portable gaming machine more comfortable to use. This includes a slightly deeper curve to the handles, added slant on the triggers, stiffer springs in the analogue stick, redesigned D-pad and a reduced M-Key footprint on the rear to avoid accidental presses.

These are small changes, admittedly, but they should all add up to a device that feels nicer to hold.

Asus has also said its new portable will be more repairable this time around, with interchangeable joystick modules and retuned triggers, joystick and D-pad. We’re yet to see the entire design of the Asus ROG Ally X, so there may well be additional changes, but we expect it to mostly keep in line with the original.

You might like…

The post Asus ROG Ally vs ROG Ally X: Battle of the handhelds appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Microsoft Surface Laptop 7 vs Surface Laptop 5: Should you upgrade?

Jessica Gorringe — Fri, 31 May 2024 15:37:05 +0000

Microsoft has recently announced its newest laptop, the Surface Laptop 7, alongside the Surface Pro 11 two-in-one.

One of the first laptops in the new Copilot Plus category, how does the Surface Laptop 7 compare to its predecessor, the Surface Laptop 5?

Although we’re yet to review the Surface Laptop 7, we have reviewed the Surface Laptop 5 and awarded the laptop a satisfactory three-star rating. With this in mind, we’ve compared the specs of both laptops so you can gauge whether you should upgrade or not.

Keep reading to learn more about the new Surface Laptop 7 and how it compares to the Surface Laptop 5. For those wondering about the Surface Laptop 6, this was a business-only model and not available for mass consumer purchase.

The Surface Laptop 7 is a Copilot Plus PC

As mentioned above, the Surface Laptop 7 is one of the first Copilot Plus computers, which was announced alongside the Surface Pro 11. Microsoft has explained that Copilot Plus PCs have been designed with AI in mind and offer access to “the most advanced” AI models, including Chat GPT-4o.

Other AI features include Recall which helps you to find anything you’ve seen or done on your PC “in a way that feels like having a photographic memory” and Cocreater which allows users to generate their own AI images straight onto their devices.

Not only does Copilot Plus have AI at its core but Microsoft also promises that Copilot Plus PCs are “the fastest, most intelligent Windows PCs ever built”. As we are yet to review the Surface Laptop 7 yet, we can’t verify these claims, however we’d be keen to try this ourselves.

The Surface Laptop 7 runs on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X series

While the Surface Laptop 5 ran on a choice between two of the 12th Gen Intel Core processors (i5-1235U or i7-1255U), the new Surface Laptop 7 runs on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X series instead.

Similarly to the Laptop 5, the Surface Laptop 7 can run on a choice between two processors: Snapdragon X Plus or Snapdragon X Elite. The latter is the more powerful of the two, with Microsoft claiming it will run a massive 86% faster than the Surface Laptop 5. Considering our reviewer found the Laptop 5 was “still comfortable fast to hop between web pages without slowdown” we’d be intrigued to see how fast the Laptop 7 really is.

Qualcomm also promises that the X Elite processor is its most powerful with “best-in-class CPU with high performance and remarkable power efficiency”. Although the X Plus isn’t as powerful and is only available in the 13.8-inch base model of the Laptop 7, both processors are built for AI and support the new AI-driven Microsoft Copilot Plus.

The Surface Laptop 7 offers up to 22-hours battery life

Impressively, Microsoft claims the 15-inch Surface Laptop 7 has up to 22-hours of video playback with the 13.8-inch not too far behind at 20-hours. We’d be keen to test this ourselves but considering we found the Laptop 5 “lasted just shy of 13 hours during battery test”, the Laptop 7 should be a considerable upgrade.

Both have a touchscreen HDR display

Both Surface Laptops are fitted with Microsoft’s PixelSense Flow technology which allows more than one object (fingers or compatible Surface Pens) can be used at once to interact with the display, negating the need for a keyboard or mouse.

Both laptops are also available in two sizes. They both share a 15-inch model which exclusively runs its equivalent more premium processor (so for the Laptop 5 that’s the Intel Core i7 and for the Laptop 7 that’s Snapdragon X Elite), but the Laptop 5 is available in a slightly smaller 13.5-inch model whereas the Laptop 7 is available in a 13.8-inch model.

The Surface Laptop 5 is cheaper

As the older of the two Surface offerings, the Laptop 5 is naturally cheaper with a current starting price of £799/ for the 13.5-inch model running on the 12th Gen Intel Core i5-1235U processor.

The Laptop 7 is pricier, starting at £1049/ for the 13.8-inch model running on Snapdragon X Plus.

You might like…

The post Microsoft Surface Laptop 7 vs Surface Laptop 5: Should you upgrade? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Chromebook vs Chromebook Plus: What to look out for

Jessica Gorringe — Fri, 31 May 2024 14:05:16 +0000

The latest upgrade to the Chromebook has recently been announced by Google: Chromebook Plus.

The new Chromebook Plus line of machines are packed with AI features, faster processors and is more gaming optimisations. The Chromebook has also been promised new features too, including Google integrations “to help make it easier to get things done”.

How does Chromebook Plus compare to the more traditional Chromebooks? Keep reading to learn more about what Chromebook Plus means and how it measures up against Chromebook.

Chromebook Plus has new Google AI features

One of the biggest features of Chromebook Plus is its new Google AI features that are built straight into the device. These features include Help Me Write which offers you writing suggestions and can generate text from scratch and Magic Editor. Magic Editor, which can also be found on the Pixel 8 and Pixel 8 Pro, allows you to reposition, resize and even entirely remove objects from your images.

Even so, Google has promised that Chromebook will have some AI features rolled out in the coming year, including hands-free control with face and gesture tracking. This should allow users to do numerous tasks, such as compose and send emails, use apps or browse the web without needing to use the keyboard, helping to make the Chromebook more accessible.

Chromebook Plus – Image Credit (Google)

Chromebook Plus models have faster processors and double the memory

All models with Chromebook Plus branding promise “double the performance” of standard basic Chromebooks, thanks to either the Intel Core or AMD Ryzen processors.

In addition, all Chromebook Plus models starts with 8GB RAM (up from a minimum of 4GB), meaning that the latter should be able to run programs faster. However, as we haven’t tried this yet, we aren’t able to verify this ourselves.

Chromebook Plus laptops all have a 1080p camera

The webcam on the Chromebook Plus promises to be a substantial upgrade to other Chromebooks. While Chromebooks will have a 720p webcam, all Chromebook Plus machines boasts a 1080p camera at a minimum. Not only that but the webcam is fitted with AI-powered tools to help enhance picture clarity, noise cancelling and blur the background.

Chromebook Plus has Gemini built-in

Sticking with the AI theme, Chromebook Plus computers will have Google’s Gemini assistant right on the home screen. Gemini is Google’s largest AI model that is able to understand prompts and help with various tasks. For example, Gemini is able to assist with writing, summarise tasks and even generate images.

Google is also offering all new Chromebook Plus users free access to the Google One AI Premium plan for 12-months. This plan includes access to Gemini Advanced, Gemini in Google Workspace and 2TB of storage.

Chromebook is cheaper

Currently the cheapest available Chromebook is the HP Chromebook 14-inch which starts at just £249. The cheapest available Chromebook Plus is the Asus Chromebook Plus which starts at £399. You will save money by picking a model without the Plus branding.

You might like…

The post Chromebook vs Chromebook Plus: What to look out for appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Sonos Roam 2 vs Sonos Move 2: Which speaker should you buy?

Hannah Davies — Thu, 30 May 2024 14:28:14 +0000

Sonos recently unveiled its portable Roam 2 speaker, but how does it compare to the Sonos Move 2?

The Roam 2 is the successor to Sonos’ original Roam speaker, a portable speaker that remains one of our best Bluetooth speakers three years after its launch. We’ve already compared the Roam 2 to the OG Sonos Roam, but how does the newest Roam stand up to Sonos’ larger Move 2 portable speaker?

Keep reading to find out…

The Sonos Roam 2 is more lightweight

While both the Sonos Roam 2 and the Sonos Move 2 are portable speakers, the Roam 2 weighs significantly less than the Move 2, making it even more convenient for taking on the go. The Roam 2 weighs 0.43kg, while the Move 2 weighs 3kg.

The speaker is also smaller, measuring just 168 x 62 x 60mm to the Move 2’s 241 x 160 x 127mm. This makes the Roam 2 more compact for squeezing into your bag and taking out and about, whereas the Move 2 is built more to carry between your home and garden.

The Sonos Move 2 produces a more powerful sound

If you’re searching for the best sound, the Sonos Move 2 is for you. Sonos calls the Move 2 its “most powerful portable speaker” with its stereo sound and additional tweeter. We found that the Move 2 was able to fill large outdoor spaces with its sound, offering a wider soundscape than a mono speaker and nice, boomy bass.

That isn’t to say the Sonos Roam 2 won’t sound great in its own right. However, you’ll have to wait for our full review of the speaker to hear our verdict on its audio performance.

Sonos Roam 2

The Sonos Roam 2 is more waterproof

The Sonos Roam 2 has the advantage when it comes to waterproofing with an IP rating of IP67. This means the speaker is dust-tight and protected against the effects of temporary immersion in water. More specifically, this applies to depths of 1 metre for up to 30 minutes.

The Sonos Move 2, meanwhile, has an IP rating of IP56. This means that the speaker is dust-protected and protected against powerful water jets, but should not be immersed in water.

The Roam 2’s increased ruggedness makes the speaker the safer choice for listening at the beach or poolside this summer.

The Sonos Move 2 has a longer battery life

If battery life is a priority, the Sonos Move 2 will impress with its 24 hours of playback. This means you could potentially go days or even weeks between charges depending on how long your typical listening session lasts.

The Sonos Roam 2, on the other hand, has a battery life of 10 hours. This should be more than enough to get you through a day or evening with friends, but you might find you need to recharge the speaker before your next gathering.

Sonos Move 2

The Sonos Roam 2 is cheaper

One major benefit to the Sonos Roam 2 is its price.

The portable speaker launched at $179/£179. That’s significantly lower than the $449/£449 RRP on the Sonos Move 2, or even the reduced $336/£329 price of the speaker on sale, meaning you could save between $270/£270 and $157/£150 by opting for the smaller Roam 2.

You might like…

The post Sonos Roam 2 vs Sonos Move 2: Which speaker should you buy? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs iPad Pro M4: What’s the difference?

Lewis Painter — Thu, 30 May 2024 11:55:41 +0000

Microsoft has revealed its AI-powered Surface Pro 11, hot on the heels of Apple’s release of the new iPad Pro M4 range. The question is, what’s the difference between the two?

Obvious differences aside – like the Microsoft Surface Pro 11 running Windows 11 and the iPad Pro M4 running Apple’s iPadOS – there are a few key differences between the two tablets, not only in terms of hardware but also software capabilities and even pricing that could sway your vote one way or the other.

With that said, here’s how the Microsoft Surface Pro 11 and iPad Pro M4 compare on paper for now, with an in-depth insight coming once we’ve fully reviewed both tablets in the next few weeks.

The Microsoft Surface Pro 11 has CoPilot+ AI capabilities

One area where the Microsoft Surface Pro 11 differentiates itself from the iPad Pro M4 is with the use of AI – for now, anyway.

The headline feature is that the Surface Pro 11 comes with an upgraded form of Microsoft CoPilot dubbed CoPilot+, powered by either the Snapdragon X Plus or Snapdragon X Elite depending on the variant you opt for. Regardless of chipset specifics, both put a heavy focus on AI and on-device AI in particular, with the Surface Pro 11 able to handle up to 45 trillion operations per second.

Microsoft Recall

That means that the Surface Pro 11 can do some pretty cool things. That includes Recall, allowing you to “describe how you remember something” that you did or saw at some point on your device to find it instantly.

There’s also Cocreator, an app that allows you to draw simple sketches using a Microsoft Paint-esque UI and then use on-device GenAI to turn them into an artistic masterpiece, as well as support for features like AI image fill in Photoshop, auto-generated captions in video calls and more.

However, the Apple M4 chipset within the iPad Pro is more than capable of handling on-device AI, and with Apple’s WWDC 2024 just around the corner, we could soon see Apple’s on-device AI offering revealed to the world.

The iPad Pro M4 is available in more sizes

Despite the Pro 11 branding, both the Surface Pro 11 and iPad Pro M4 come with a 13-inch screen. It’s larger than most tablets, but it maximises screen space for those who want to use the tablet as a primary work machine. However, Apple goes a step further by also offering a more compact 11-inch iPad Pro for those who need a more portable tablet.

Apple iPad Pro 11 and iPad Pro 13

It’s not just that the iPad Pro M4 is available in two sizes either; it also offers OLED, or more specifically, its proprietary double-stacked Tandem OLED tech, for all the usual benefits of OLED – deep blacks, vivid colours – while managing to be brighter than much of the OLED-enabled competition, with a maximum brightness of 1600nits.

The Microsoft Surface Pro 11 also has an OLED screen, but that’s only if you pay a premium, with the OLED variants starting at £1,549, £500 more than the LCD variant – and at 900nits, the OLED screen isn’t quite as bright either. The iPad Pro, on the other hand, comes with its unique OLED technology as standard on both the 11- and 13-inch models.

The iPad Pro M4 is thinner and lighter

Nobody’s about to say that the Microsoft Surface Pro 11 is a particularly thick and heavy tablet – at 9.3mm and 895g, it’s a pretty portable bit of kit, especially when you consider the level of power on offer.

However, it seems Microsoft has lost this battle because Apple’s latest iPad Pro M4 range is not only the thinnest iPad Pro to date, it’s actually Apple’s thinnest product ever. The 11-inch iPad Pro measures in at a slimline 5.3mm, while the 13-inch variant takes that even further at just 5.1mm.

iPad Pro 13

It’s a similar trend when it comes to overall heft, weighing in at just 444g and 579g respectively.

Comparing the like-for-like 13-inch iPad Air and Surface Pro 11, Apple’s tablet is 316g lighter than Microsoft’s tablet, and it’s a whole 4.2mm thinner too.

That doesn’t include accessories for either tablet, with the accompanying keyboard cases adding extra bulk to the overall setups, but it’s still impressive just how much thinner and lighter Apple’s Pro tablets are.

The Microsoft Surface Pro 11 could last longer

Apple has always aimed to deliver 10 hours of battery life with its iPad collection, and that’s true whether you pick up the budget-friendly iPad 10 or the top-end 13-inch iPad Pro M4.

More specifically, that’s 10 hours of surfing the web on Wi-Fi or watching video, with more power-intensive tasks harming overall battery longevity.

Microsoft Surface Pro 11

Still, most iPad owners will attest that, with sporadic use, the tablet will last for days on a single charge.

However, the Microsoft Surface Pro 11 and the extremely power-efficient Snapdragon X Plus and X Elite chipsets deliver impressive power efficiency, so much so that Microsoft claims that the hybrid tablet can last up to 14 hours when watching video – a whole four hours longer than the iPad Pro.

That said, it offers the same 10-hour estimate when it comes to web browsing, so as with the iPad, battery life will very much depend on what you’re doing on the Surface Pro 11.

The iPad Pro M4 is cheaper – kind of

When it comes to pricing, things get a little complicated – especially when you take Microsoft’s various SKUs into consideration.

That said, the iPad Pro M4 is cheaper than the Microsoft Surface Pro if you want to opt for the smaller 11-inch iPad Pro, which starts at £999, while the 13-inch iPad Pro starts at £1,299.

Now, the Surface Pro with a 13-inch LCD display and the Snapdragon X Plus starts at £1,049, cheaper than the competing iPad Pro by a decent margin. However, if you want a comparable setup with an OLED screen and top-end Snapdragon X Elite chipset, that starts at £1,549, £250 more than the 13-inch iPad Pro.

The iPad Pro M4 is available to buy now, while you can pre-order the Surface Pro 11 from Microsoft now ahead of release in mid-June.

You might like…

The post Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs iPad Pro M4: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Surface Laptop 7 vs MacBook Air M3: Windows or MacOS?

Jessica Gorringe — Thu, 30 May 2024 08:57:20 +0000

Microsoft recently announced its newest Copilot Plus PC series which includes the Surface Laptop 7.

While we haven’t reviewed the Surface Laptop 7 yet, we have reviewed Apple’s latest MacBook Air M3 and gave the laptop a near perfect 4.5-star rating. With that in mind, how do the specs of the Surface Laptop 7 compare to the MacBook Air M3?

The Surface Laptop 7 is available as a 13.8-inch or 15-inch model and the MacBook Air M3 is also available in two sizes, either 13-inch or 15-inch.

We’ve put the specs of the new Microsoft Surface Laptop 7 against Apple’s MacBook Air M3 and noted the differences between the two flagship laptops below.

The MacBook Air runs on Apple’s own M-series chip

Macs have run on Apple’s own M-series chip since 2020, with the latest version for computers being the M3. Apple states that the MacBook Air M3 leverages the AI performance of the Neural Engine to deliver macOS features that “enhance productivity and creativity”, including camera features and real-time speech to text.

Overall, we concluded that the MacBook Air M3 is a capable processor: “For most people who might partake in photo editing, light video editing and general daily tasks there’s more than enough grunt here.”

In comparison, the Surface Laptop 7 runs on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X series. Designed as a rival to the M-series, there are two editions of the Snapdragon X series that can be found in the Surface Laptop 7: X Plus and the more premium X Elite. The former is only available in the 13.8-inch model.

Qualcomm promises that the Snapdragon X Elite processor is its most powerful of the two and offers “best-in-class CPU with high performance and remarkable power efficiency”. Both the X Plus and X Elite are built for AI, offer “cutting edge responsiveness”, and support the new AI-driven Microsoft Copilot Plus.

As we have yet to try the Surface Laptop 7, we can’t verify whether these claims add up, however the specs themselves sound promising.

The Surface Laptop 7 is a Copilot Plus computer

The Surface Laptop 7 is one of the first Copilot Plus computers, alongside the Surface Pro 11. Microsoft has hailed Copilot Plus PCs as “the fastest, most intelligent Windows PCs ever built” and have been designed with AI in mind. Copilot Plus’ AI features include Recall which helps you find anything you’ve seen on your computer, and Cocreater which allows users to generate AI images straight onto their devices.

All Copilot Plus PCs will also be equipped with an AI assistant that Microsoft promises will give access to the latest AI models, including GPT-4o.

The Surface Laptop 7 has a touchscreen display

Unlike the MacBook Air, the Surface Laptop 7 has a touchscreen display that’s fitted with Microsoft’s PixelSense Flow technology which means more than one object (whether that be your fingers or a compatible stylus) can be used at once to interact with the display.

It’s not just the touchscreen that differentiates the two laptops. The Surface Laptop 7 has an LCD HDR display whereas the MacBook Air has a Liquid Retina display. While we praised the MacBook Air’s screen as “bright enough for all situations and is clearly a high-quality LCD” its lack of an OLED option means there’s no HDR playback.

Finally, the MacBook Air lags behind with a smaller refresh rate of 60Hz compared to the promised Surface Laptop 7’s dynamic refresh rate of up to 120Hz.

The Surface Laptop 7 is slightly cheaper

The Surface Laptop 7 has a cheaper starting cost of £1,049 for the 13-inch model with 16GB RAM and 256GB storage.The MacBook Air M3 has a slightly more expensive starting RRP of £1,099 for the 13-inch model with 8GB RAM and 256GB storage.

You might like…

The post Surface Laptop 7 vs MacBook Air M3: Windows or MacOS? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Panasonic Lumix S9 vs Fujifilm X100VI: How these cameras compare

Hannah Davies — Wed, 29 May 2024 16:33:55 +0000

Panasonic recently unveiled the Lumix S9, but how does the lightweight mirrorless camera compare to Fujifilm’s compact X100VI?

Both cameras are small and lightweight with 5-axis image stabilisation and capable autofocus systems.

Both also make it easy to share stills and videos out of camera with very little (if any) editing required. This is thanks to the film simulation modes on the X100VI and the Real Time LUT function on the Lumix S9, both of which include a variety of presets and the ability to create custom profiles.

That doesn’t mean there aren’t differences worth noting before you settle on one camera or the other. Keep reading to learn more about how the Panasonic Lumix S9 compares to the Fujifilm X100VI.

The Panasonic Lumix S9 has a full-frame sensor

One of the biggest differences between the Panasonic Lumix S9 and the Fujifilm X100VI is the size of the image sensor.

The Lumix S9 is fitted with a 24.2-megapixel full-frame CMOS sensor, while the X100VI features the 40.2-megapixel X-Trans CMOS 5 HR APS-C sensor. While the X100VI takes advantage of more megapixels for high-resolution stills, the Lumix S9 features a larger full-frame sensor for no crop factor and better low-light performance.

The Fujifilm X100VI includes a hybrid viewfinder

One of the most unique features found on the Fujifilm X100VI is the hybrid viewfinder.

The camera allows you to switch between an EVF and an OVF at the push of a button, displaying the image the sensor sees or outside of the frame depending on what you need at that moment.

The Panasonic Lumix S9, meanwhile, skips the viewfinder altogether. Instead, Panasonic has opted to stick with a screen for framing shots.

The Panasonic Lumix S9 supports multiple lenses

A true compact camera, the Fujifilm X100VI features a fixed lens design. This means you’re limited to the 23mm f/2 lens (35mm equivalent) that comes attached to the camera.

The Panasonic Lumix S9, meanwhile, features an interchangeable lens mount that is compatible with a couple of Panasonic lenses, including a 26mm f/8 pancake lens and an 18-40mm f/4.5-6.3 compact zoom lens.

Fujifilm X100VI

The Fujifilm X100VI has more subject detection modes

Subject detection is available on both cameras, however the Fujifilm X100VI offers more modes. This includes faces, animals, birds, automobiles, motorcycles and bikes, airplanes, and trains.

The Panasonic Lumix S9 features automatic detection for humans, animals, cars, and motorcycles.

The Panasonic Lumix S9 comes in more colours

Finally, the Panasonic Lumix S9 comes in a wider variety of eye-catching colours, including Jet Black, Crimson Red, Dark Olive, and Night Blue.

The Fujifilm X100VI sticks with more classic-looking Black and Silver designs.

You might like…

The post Panasonic Lumix S9 vs Fujifilm X100VI: How these cameras compare appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

LDAC vs Snapdragon Sound: How do they compare?

Kob Monney — Wed, 29 May 2024 15:29:31 +0000

It’s an issue that’s plagued Bluetooth streaming and music lovers from the beginning. How do you get enough bandwidth to be able to listen to a high quality file over Bluetooth?

Bluetooth is great for many things, it’s a wireless transmission technology that unites and links a range of devices together. It’s unlikely that there’s not a device in your home or in your pocket that doesn’t use Bluetooth.

But when it comes to audio it has struggled in presenting audio at a high enough quality. So, various audio brands and tech companies have been devising solutions to extract as performance as they can with a Bluetooth connection. That’s led to the creation of LDAC and Snapdragon Sound.

LDAC was created by Sony, while Snapdragon Sound is a solution devised by Qualcomm. They both aim to do the same thing, which is improve audio quality over a Bluetooth connection. Here are the ways they do it, and the ways they compare with one another.

Both aim for 24bit streaming

Both companies would claim their technologies enable lossless streaming, or at the very least, you can listen to Hi-Res Audio.

It rather depends on what you consider to be lossless/High-Res audio quality. LDAC satisifes the requirement of the Japan Audio Society’s High-Res Audio Wireless with a transfer rate of 990kbps. You could, in theory, listen to a file at 24-bit/96kHz.

credit: Sony

The same is true for Snapdragon Sound, and both utilise scaling bitrates. LDAC can hit as low as 330kpbs if you’re on a particularly busy connection. Snapdragon Sound uses the aptX Adaptive codec, which can fall to as low as 279kbps and hit as high as 860kbps.

That would suggest that at their highest level of performance, LDAC ekes out a better performance; but both at their lowest level aren’t streaming in lossless but transmitting at lossy quality (compressed files with data lost during streaming).

Both are Android based

Are you an iPhone or iOS user? You’re out of luck as far as these two audio technologies are only implemented on Android.

Sony’s LDAC is embedded within the Android platform, so technically all an audio manufacturer would need to do is buy the licence and flick the LDAC switch on (at least that’s how we imagine the process looks like) and they can support the streaming tech.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Snapdragon Sound is supported by Android, but as far as we can tell, it’s not embedded into the platform and requires testing and certification to have the Snapdragon Sound badge.

And in order to listen at highest possible quality (aptX Lossless), you’d need a source and device that supports the codec. But as Snapdragon Sound isn’t built into the Android ecosystem in the manner LDAC is, you’d still need specific smartphones as not every Android phone supports aptX Lossless.

There is some brand crossover

Perhaps we need to look a little closer, but as far as we can tell, brands offer a choice of either LDAC or Snapdragon Sound. There aren’t too many brands that conveniently support both, though ironically Sony Mobile does.

On the LDAC side you have the likes of:

1More, Anker, Audeze, Audio-Technica, Astell&Kern, ASUS, Cayin, Edifier, FiiO, Fujitsu, Google, Hidizs, HiFiMan, HTC, Huawei, InterAction, iFi, iRiver, JVC Kenwood, LG, miniDSP, Oppo, Panasonic, Pioneer, Realme, Shanling, Shure (original Aonic 50), Sharp, TEAC, Technics, Vivo, Xiaomi, and of course Sony.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

That list includes a variety of devices including smartphones, DACs, soundbars, headphones, wireless speakers, and portable music players.

On the Snapdragon Sound side there is:

Bowers & Wilkins, Shure, Denon, FiiO, Asus, Yamaha, Final, Master & Dynamic, Cleer Audio, Sony Mobile, Edifier, Motorola, Cambridge Audio, Asus, Vivo, Sennheiser, Bose, iFi, SoundPeats, Nubia, Nothing, Sharp, Xiaomi, Audio-Technica, Nura, LG, Noble Audio, and EarFun.

There are more brands besides the ones we’ve mentioned, but perhaps the most interesting takeaway is that is neither is restricted to being available on premium products. There are headphones for less than £100 that support either LDAC and Snapdragon Sound.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

LDAC is on smartphones and portable music players

If there’s an area we haven’t seen Snapdragon Sound make as much of a stride into, it’s the portable music player market. Snapdragon appears to preocuppied with covering the smartphone base, while LDAC covers both, notably FiiO, Astell&Kern, iRiver, and Hidizs portable players.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Considering these players have Android’s global SRC turned off, a feature that actually restricts the quality of audio on the platform, there’s more potential on a portable music player to hear music in the way it was intended (over a Bluetooth connection).

Snapdragon Sound offers more benefits than just audio

LDAC is primarily for transmission of audio over Bluetooth, but Snapdragon Sound is made up of a number of technologies brought together.

credit: Qualcomm

Benefits of Snapdragon Sound include ultra-low latency for audio, video, and gaming so audio/video remains in sync. Qualcomm also states that pairing between devices is improved and voice quality is clearer (presumably this is for calls rather than dialogue).

Other benefits include longer battery life by using less power, while with the adaptive performance (like LDAC) it can ensure the best possible performance in areas where there is a weak signal or interference.

You might like…

The post LDAC vs Snapdragon Sound: How do they compare? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs Surface Pro 9: What’s the difference between the Windows two-in-ones?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 29 May 2024 11:41:33 +0000

Microsoft recently announced its newest range of computers, including the two-in-one Surface Pro 11. Although we haven’t reviewed the Surface Pro 11 yet, we spent some time with the device after the initial announcement last week.

How does the new Surface Pro 11 compare to its predecessor, the Surface Pro 9? We’ve compared the technical specifications of both and highlighted the key differences between the two-in-one devices below.

Before we get started, it is worth discussing the naming conventions. While a Surface Pro 10 does exist, it is purely sold and marketed as a business device and isn’t easily available for consumers. That’s why we’re comparing the latest Surface Pro against the ninth generation.

Both are two-in-one devices

We’ll start with a clear similarity between the two. Both the Surface Pro 11 and Surface Pro 9 are two-in-one devices, which means they are both tablets that can function as a laptop with the addition of a compatible keyboard.

The Surface Pro 11 is a Copilot Plus PC

Copilot Plus was launched alongside the Surface Pro 11 and the Surface Laptop 7 at Microsoft’s recent event. Designed for AI, Microsoft promises that Copilot Plus PCs are “the fastest, most intelligent Windows PCs ever built” and are fitted with powerful new chips capable of “an incredible 40 plus TOPS” plus access to the most advanced AI models.

Microsoft hailed Copilot Plus PCs as the beginning of a “new chapter with AI innovation on the device” and marks “the most significant change to the Windows platform in decades.”

Copilot Plus features include Cocreator which allows users to generate and refine AI images on their device and Live Captions which can translate audio from over forty languages into English. Every Copilot Plus PC is also equipped with a powerful AI agent that Microsoft promises will offer users access to the latest AI models in the coming weeks too, including GPT-4o from its partners at OpenAI.

The Surface Pro 11 runs on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon processors

The Surface Pro 11 is one of the first Microsoft PCs that run on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X series of chips, which are designed to rival the Apple M-Series processors.

The Surface Pro 11 is available with either the Snapdragon X Plus or the more premium Snapdragon X Elite. Microsoft says that the X Elite offers “90% faster performance than the Surface Pro 9”. As we haven’t tested the Surface Pro 11 yet we aren’t able to verify these claims ourselves.

Otherwise, the Surface Pro 9 is available with a choice between three chips: the 12th Gen Intel Core i5-1235U, i7-1255U or Microsoft SQ 3. In our review of the device, our reviewer found it was “capable of hefty productivity tasking” however the performance was consistently below key rivals, including its Surface Laptop 5 sibling which runs on the same processor.

The Surface Pro 11 has an OLED or LCD HDR screen

Depending on the model you opt for, the Surface Pro 11 will either have an LCD or an OLED display. The OLED HDR display is reserved for the more premium model, running on Snapdragon X Elite and boasts a contrast ratio of 1M:1 so should be able to produce an overall better picture quality than the LCD.

Although we haven’t tested the OLED model yet, we did get an early glimpse and our first impression was that it’s a clear “improvement over the LCD panel” which can be found on the Surface Pro 11 that runs on the Snapdragon X Plus.

The Surface Pro 9 instead has an HDR display which although isn’t as technically impressive as an OLED or even an LCD, our reviewer found was “a great all-rounder, top-notch for productivity and has big colour chops for taking in videos and images”.

Both the Surface Pro 11 series and Surface Pro 9 are optimised with PixelSense Flow which is Microsoft’s technology for multi-touchscreen computers.

Surface Pro 11

The Surface Pro 9 is cheaper

Naturally as the older of the two, the Surface Pro 9 has a cheaper starting price of £799/$749/€849 (for the model running on Intel Core i5-1235U). The Surface Pro 11 is a pricier device, starting at £1049/$999/€1199 (running on Snapdragon X Plus).

As both are two-in-one devices, they are both compatible with a keyboard and pen but neither accessory is included in the box and has to be purchased separately.

Microsoft also launched its new Surface Pro Flex Keyboard which has a more rigid body than previous Surface Pro keyboard options and can be attached wirelessly. This has an RRP of £339/$349.99/€409.99, so is another expense to consider when investing.

You might like…

The post Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs Surface Pro 9: What’s the difference between the Windows two-in-ones? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs Surface Laptop 7: Tablet or laptop?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 29 May 2024 10:05:30 +0000

Microsoft has recently launched two new Copilot Plus PCs, the Microsoft Surface Pro 11 and the Surface Laptop 7.

The Surface Pro 11 is available as a 13-inch two-in-one device whereas the Surface Laptop 7 is slightly bigger and available in two sizes: 13.8-inches and 15-inches.

Although we’ve only had a short time with the two devices at the launch event at Microsoft’s Seattle campus, we have compared the specs of the two and highlighted the key differences between them here. We’ll update this piece with more details once we’ve thoroughly reviewed the devices.

Keep reading to learn more about Microsoft’s newly announced Surface Pro 11 and Surface Laptop 7.

The Surface Pro 11 is a two-in-one

The most obvious difference between the Surface Pro 11 and the Surface Laptop 7 is that the former is a two-in-one model whereas the latter is a standard laptop. Essentially, a two-in-one is a device that functions as both a tablet and a laptop when paired with an optional keyboard.

The Surface Pro 11 is compatible with various keyboards, including the Surface Pro Flex (a new version with Bluetooth that can be used independently of the tablet) and the Surface Pro Signature. There’s also support for the Surface Slim Pens for drawing on the touchscreen.

It’s worth remembering that these accessories are all sold separately, whereas the Surface Laptop 7 comes equipped with everything you need to use it as a laptop.

Different versions run on different Snapdragon chips

While the Surface Pro 11 and the 13.8-inch Surface Laptop 7 have the option to run on either Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X Plus or Snapdragon X Elite processors, the 15-inch Surface Laptop 7 is only available with the Snapdragon X Elite.

The Snapdragon X Elite is Qualcomm’s most powerful processor “ever created for Windows” and offers the “best-in-class CPU with high performance and remarkable power efficiency” although we have yet to fully benchmark any of the devices ourselves.

Built for AI, Qualcomm also promises the processor offers “cutting edge responsiveness” and the ability to “navigate demanding multi-tasking workloads across productivity.”

Having said that, the Surface Pro 11 and 13.8-inch Surface Laptop 7 are also available to run on the Snapdragon X Plus processor. You can learn more about the differences between the two processors in our dedicated versus but in summary, the Snapdragon X Elite has more processing power and is better suited for heavy workloads and gamers.

The Surface Laptop 7 should have a longer battery life

Depending on the size, the Surface Laptop 7 offers a longer-lasting battery life than the Surface Pro 11. While the 13.8-inch model has up to 20 hours of video playback and up to 13 hours of web usage, the 15-inch device boasts a massive 22 hours of video playback and up to 15 hours of web usage.

Microsoft Surface Laptop 7 Copilot Plus

In comparison, the Surface Pro 11 offers up to 14 hours of video playback and up to 11 hours of web usage. Of course, we’ll need to run our usual array of battery tests to find out the results for ourselves.

The Surface Pro 11 is available with more screen choices

The OLED HDR screen is available with the Surface Pro 11 which runs on the Snapdragon X Elite processor, otherwise the screen is an LCD HDR display. The OLED screen has a contrast ratio of 1M:1 whereas the LCD screen has a lower contrast ratio of 1200:1, which should mean the OLED will produce deeper blacks and an overall better picture quality.

Both Surface Laptop 7s instead have support HDR which promises to deliver richer blacks, crisper whites and vibrant colours.

The Surface Pro has an OLED display

Regardless of the size or processor, all Surface Pro 11 and Surface Laptop 7 are optimised with PixelSense Flow, Microsoft’s technology for multi-touchscreen computers.

Both have the same starting RRP

The Surface Pro 11 and 13.8-inch Surface Laptop 7 have a starting RRP of £1049/$999, with the 15-inch Laptop 7 starting at £1349/$1299. All devices are available for pre-order now and are set to be available in the middle of June 2024.

As mentioned above, the Surface Pro 11 is shipped with just the tablet and doesn’t include any extra accessories, such as a keyboard or pen but judging by our experience with other Surface devices, you’ll

You might like…

The post Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs Surface Laptop 7: Tablet or laptop? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Amazon Echo vs Amazon Echo Dot: Which Alexa smart speaker should you go for?

Jessica Gorringe — Tue, 28 May 2024 13:59:40 +0000

Although the Amazon Echo (4th Generation) and the Amazon Echo Dot (5th Generation) may look similar, there are some key differences between the two Alexa-powered smart speakers.

We’ve reviewed both the Amazon Echo (4th Gen) and the Amazon Echo Dot (5th Gen) and compared the specs here, so you can determine which device is better suited for your household.

Keep reading to learn more about the two smart speakers and how they differ in regards to price, design, features and sound quality.

Design

In terms of appearance there isn’t much to separate the Amazon Echo and Amazon Echo Dot as they look almost identical. Sporting the spherical design that was introduced with the Echo Dot, our reviewer concluded that this style “looks as good today as it did when the product was launched”.

Both Echo devices have the same button layout too (including Volume, Action and Mute) which are raised with individual shapes so they’re easier to select. The status ring light for both can be found at the bottom of the speaker, which we think is a welcome change as it still gets your attention for notifications but the light itself is much less intrusive than older speakers.

The difference between the two comes with connectivity. While the Amazon Echo has two ports, a power input and a 3.5mm audio output, the latter is missing from the newer Echo Dot. However, we don’t think this is an issue, as we found the 3.5mm audio output to be an unnecessary feature.

Features

Naturally as Amazon devices, both the Echo and Echo Dot are equipped with the voice assistant Alexa which can respond to most queries and requests with ease.

Both Echo devices also include the Zigbee Hub which makes controlling your smart home devices easier, by allowing you to add smart home devices including smart plugs and thermostats to your Echo device without having to use additional hubs or bridges.

Amazon introduced its new Low Power mode with the Echo (4th Gen) which reduces how much energy the speaker uses while idle. Although useful, the caveat of this is that if Spotify is linked to your Echo then the Low Power feature won’t work, however this has been improved with the Echo Dot which no longer has this restriction.

Also new with the Echo Dot is the new control feature which allows users to control the Echo with a simple tap. This is useful for controlling the device when a voice command isn’t convenient.

Both the Echo and Echo Dot also have a built-in temperature sensor which you can use to trigger Alexa Routines. For example, if the sensor detects a room is too hot, it can automatically turn on a smart fan to cool it down.

The Echo Dot, however, goes further and has Ultrasound Motion Detection built-in which can also be used in Routines. This means Alexa can turn on a light when motion is detected or turn off the heating when no motion is detected.

Sound quality

Amazon managed to squeeze in two 0.8-inch tweeters and a 3-inch woofer into the Echo and although there’s not enough space to allow for proper stereo separation, our reviewer concluded you still “get a clearer sense of the stereo effect.” The dual tweeters also allow for more detail, with clarity and subtlety pulled out from the music.

Our reviewer concluded with the Echo that it’s “better when at mid-volume levels” as the sound “gets muddier” at maximum volume.

The Echo Dot however has a larger 1.73-inch front-firing speaker which delivers more bass than its predecessor. Our reviewer concluded that although the range “isn’t as good as with the standard Echo speaker” for the price it delivers “a surprisingly good audio experience.”

Pricing and availability

The older Echo (4th Generation) has an RRP of £109.99/$99.99 which is considerably more expensive than the Echo Dot’s RRP of £54.99/$49.99. However we have seen deals and bundle offers available for both devices, so it is possible to snap up a bargain. You can see the latest prices below.

You might like…

The post Amazon Echo vs Amazon Echo Dot: Which Alexa smart speaker should you go for? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Sony Xperia 1 VI vs Google Pixel 8 Pro: What’s the difference?

Lewis Painter — Tue, 28 May 2024 12:03:22 +0000

Sony has revealed the top-end Xperia 1 VI, but how does it compare to one of the most popular smartphones around, the Google Pixel 8 Pro?

It’s easy to assume that, being the more expensive of the two, the Xperia 1 VI has the upper hand in the tech department – but that’s not always the case. In fact, the Pixel 8 Pro has tempting features like AI-infused photography and an exceptionally long OS promise that might sway your decision towards Team Google.

That said, here are five key differences between the Sony Xperia 1 VI and Google Pixel 8 Pro.

The Sony Xperia 1 VI has a more compact screen

Smartphones are pretty big in 2024, with most smartphones – including the Pixel 8 Pro – sporting a 6.7-inch screen. It’s a great size for watching movies, scrolling through TikTok and most other mobile-themed activities, hence why it’s such a popular size. However, the downside is that 6.7-inch smartphones can be a handful to hold.

That’s where alternatives like the Sony Xperia 1 VI come in with a slightly smaller 6.5-inch screen – though there are big changes from Team S with this release. Rather than using a screen with a tall-and-narrow 21:9 aspect ratio as with other Xperia releases, the 1 VI offers a 19.5:9 aspect ratio that makes it a little shorter and squatter, and thus, easier to hold.

The catch? The 4K resolution that was once the standout feature of Sony’s flagship smartphone range is nowhere to be seen, instead sporting an FHD+ screen that’s slightly lower-res than the Pixel alternative.

Elsewhere, the two screens are fairly evenly matched; they’re both OLED screens with 120Hz LTPO support and protected by Corning’s high-end Gorilla Glass Victus 2.

The Google Pixel 8 Pro has AI-powered camera tech

The Sony Xperia 1 VI is all about the camera setup, sporting a trio of rear lenses including the same 52MP Exmor-T main sensor as last year’s Xperia 1 V, along with a 12MP 123-degree ultrawide camera and an upgraded 12MP telephoto lens with an impressive zoom range of 3.5x to 7.1x.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Paired with DSLR-level manual controls and pro-level shooting modes, the Xperia 1 VI looks like a treat for anyone with any experience with DSLRs, and Sony DSLRs in particular.

That sounds like a capable camera setup for those who really understand mobile photography, but for the rest of us, Google’s AI-infused camera setup takes the challenge out of taking high-quality snaps.

The AI-focused Tensor G3 chipset powers shooting modes like Super Res Zoom and Night Shot, further improved by editing tools like the GenAI-powered Magic Editor and Best Take – features that are rarely seen in non-Pixel smartphones.

It also helps that the Pixel 8 Pro’s camera offering is on par with what the Xperia 1 VI offers, comprising of a main 50MP camera, a 48MP 5x telephoto lens and a 48MP 126-degree ultrawide.

The Sony Xperia 1 VI features a headphone jack

One way that the Sony Xperia 1 VI differentiates itself, not only from the Pixel 8 Pro but most of the flagship competition, is by continuing to include a 3.5mm headphone jack for wired headphone support.

It’s a feature rarely seen at the flagship level these days with the ever-rising popularity of Bluetooth headphones, with those with normal wired cans having to use dongles to listen to their favourite tunes.

It’s not just any 3.5mm headphone jack either; the Xperia 1 VI sports a new premium circuit to offer truly high-end performance, complete with support for Hi-Res Audio.

You can use headphones with the Pixel 8 Pro if you have a 3.5mm to USB-C dongle, but it’s undoubtedly simpler with the Xperia 1 VI.

The Google Pixel 8 Pro has a much longer software promise

Google is the company that develops the Android operating system, so it shouldn’t come as much surprise that the company offers exceptional long-term software support for its flagship Pixel range.

The old promise of four OS upgrades and five years of security patches was impressive enough compared to the flagship competition, but Google boosted that to a whopping seven OS upgrades with the launch of the Pixel 8 range, taking the Pixel 8 Pro all the way to Android 21.

Sony’s long-term software support for the Xperia 1 VI is lacking, especially compared to the Pixel 8 Pro, offering just three OS upgrades and four years of security updates that’ll take it through to Android 17.

The Google Pixel 8 Pro is cheaper

Despite the various benefits that the Google Pixel 8 Pro offers compared to the Sony Xperia 1 VI, it’s actually the cheaper of the two flagship smartphones with a starting price of £999.

The Sony Xperia 1 VI, on the other hand, comes in at a cool £1,299 – a whole £300 more.

The Google Pixel 8 Pro is available to buy now, while the Xperia 1 VI is set to be released in the UK on 6 June, with US release TBC.

You might like…

The post Sony Xperia 1 VI vs Google Pixel 8 Pro: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Poco F6 Pro vs Google Pixel 8a: How do the mid-rangers compare?

Lewis Painter — Tue, 28 May 2024 10:03:53 +0000

Xiaomi has just revealed its mid-range superstar, the Poco F6 Pro, but how does it compare to the popular Google Pixel 8a?

It’s easy to assume that, like much of the mid-range competition, the Google Pixel 8a will outshine the Poco F6 Pro with its AI-infused Tensor G3 chipset, advanced camera and editing features and clean approach to Android 14, but that’s not the case here.

In fact, Xiaomi has come out fighting with the Poco F6 Pro, sporting a specsheet you’d usually associate with a premium if not flagship-level, smartphone, including a 6.67-inch WQHD+ screen, Snapdragon 8-series power and rapid 125W HyperCharge capabilities.

With that said, here’s how the Poco F6 Pro and Google Pixel 8a compare on paper.

The Poco F6 Pro has a larger, higher-res screen

When it comes to display tech, it seems like the Poco F6 Pro has the upper hand.

It’s not only larger than the Pixel 8a’s 6.1-inch screen at 6.67 inches, but it’s packed with premium tech like a pixel-packed WQHD+ (3200 x 1440) resolution, a smooth 120Hz refresh rate and support for 12-bit colour. It’s also pretty bright with a peak brightness of 4000nits, and with a 2160Hz touch sample rate, it should feel pretty responsive when gaming too.

The Pixel 8a’s screen is an improvement on that of its predecessor, offering upgrades in the form of a 120Hz refresh rate and the Actua screen tech from the Pixel 8 that delivers 2000nits peak brightness, but it’s not exactly a premium screen.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The bezels are incredibly thick compared to the Poco F6 Pro, it caps out at an FHD+ resolution and its smaller size means it’s not quite as good for playing games or watching movies as the F6 Pro could be.

The Poco F6 Pro also comes with flagship-level features like 3840Hz PWM dimming that help it stand out not only compared to the Pixel 8a but much of the mid-range competition.

The Google Pixel 8a has an AI-infused operating system

One of the biggest draws of the Pixel 8a compared to much of the mid-range competition is its use of artificial intelligence, borrowing functionality from the flagship-level Pixel 8 range in the process.

That means that the Pixel 8a is capable of boosting camera performance with AI modes like Super Res Zoom and Night Sight, as well as providing advanced editing tools like Best Take that’ll try its best to make sure everyone’s smiling in a group photo, and it brings the generative-powered Magic Editor to more people too.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

It’s not just in the camera department either; the Android 14 OS as a whole is packed with AI-powered features, from the real-time transcription of voice notes in the Recorder app to Assistant-powered call screening and much more.

The Poco F6 Pro, on the other hand, only has limited AI capabilities at launch, limited to elements like the Ultra Night mode algorithm. It’s nowhere near as pervasive as Google’s implementation.

Both are fairly evenly matched in the performance department

When it comes to processing power, the Poco F6 Pro and Google Pixel 8a should be fairly evenly matched – and that’s saying something, considering the Pixel 8a shares the same Tensor G3 chipset as the flagship Pixel 8 and Pixel 8 Pro.

The Poco F6 Pro, on the other hand, sports the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2, the chipset of choice for many flagships in 2023. While not quite as performant as the newer Snapdragon 8 Gen 3, the Tensor G3 isn’t as performance-focused as the Snapdragon competition.

In fact, our benchmarks suggest that the Tensor G3 within the Pixel 8a performs on a similar level to the Dimensity 8300-Ultra-enabled Poco X6 Pro, suggesting that the Poco F6 Pro could be the better performer of the two.

The Poco F6 Pro also features more RAM, at 12- and 16GB, and offers storage options up to 1TB, while the Pixel 8a comes with just 8GB RAM and up to 256GB storage. This could further give the Poco F6 Pro a performance advantage.

The Poco F6 Pro has 120W HyperCharge capabilities

Another area where the Poco F6 Pro pulls away from the Google Pixel 8a is in the charging department; despite the fact that the F6 Pro has a larger 5000mAh battery compared to the Pixel’s 4492mAh cell, the Poco F6 Pro can achieve much faster charge times.

That’s because it offers support for Xiaomi’s 120W HyperCharge tech, with a 120W charger in the box to take advantage of the speeds from day one. It’s claimed that the charging tech can deliver a full 100% charge in just 19 minutes, but we’ll have to double-check those claims once we fully review the phone.

The Pixel 8a, on the other hand, has relatively slow 18W charging that, in our review, we found would take just shy of two hours to regain a full charge. That’s 6x slower than the Poco, in theory at least.

Both cost the same price

You might assume that, given the impressive hardware from the Poco F6 Pro, it’s more expensive than the Pixel 8a, but that’s not actually the case. Instead, both the Poco F6 Pro and Pixel 8a start at the same £499, though you can currently pick up the F6 Pro for just £449 as part of Xiaomi’s Early Bird sale until 30 May.

You might like…

The post Poco F6 Pro vs Google Pixel 8a: How do the mid-rangers compare? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Poco F6 Pro vs Poco X6 Pro: Comparing the mid-rangers

Jessica Gorringe — Thu, 23 May 2024 12:15:00 +0000

Poco has just announced two new flagship smartphones, the F6 and the F6 Pro and according to the brand, the latter “closes the gap on high-end performance phones”.

How does the Poco F6 Pro compare to the Poco X6 Pro which launched back in January 2024? While we haven’t reviewed the Poco F6 Pro, we have reviewed the Poco X6 Pro and gave the smartphone a near-perfect 4.5-star rating.

We’ve compared the specs of the two mid-range handsets and highlighted the key differences between them below.

The F6 Pro boasts the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2

The two handsets run on different chipsets, with the Poco X6 Pro running on MediaTek’s Dimensity 8300-Ultra and the F6 Pro running on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Gen 2.

Of the two processors, the Dimensity 8300-Ultra is newer having launched in November 2023 while the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 launched back in November 2022, but the latter is actually the more capable of the two. In fact, it was the chipset of choice for top-end smartphones throughout 2023 until the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 came along.

That said, we found that the inclusion of the Dimensity 8300-Ultra made using the X6 Pro “a delight to use on a day-to-day basis” and “even during heavy multitasking.” Our graphics benchmark results also showed that when comparing the X6 Pro to similarly priced competition, it was easily at the top of the stack.

While we are yet to test the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 processor specifically with the F6 Pro, we found when reviewing similar 2023 flagship smartphones that used the chipset, such as the OnePlus 11 performance was fast with “no sign of stutter or lag” even with heavy use.

The X6 Pro has a larger 64MP main camera

Both the F6 Pro and X6 Pro have a trio of rear cameras and a 16MP front-facing camera. Of the rear-facing trio, both handsets include an 8MP ultrawide lens with f/2.2 aperture and a 2MP macro lens with f/2.4 aperture, however they differ with their main lens offering.

While the F6 Pro has a 50MP main lens fitted with flagship object image stabilisation (OIS), the X6 Pro boasts a 64MP main lens without OIS support.

As we haven’t tested the F6 Pro’s snap-shooting ability ourselves yet, we can’t say whether the F6 Pro’s lower MP lens with OIS support is any better than the X6 Pro. However we did note in our review of the X6 Pro that the “the main camera … is very decent. There’s plenty of detail, the colours look realistic and the HDR effect is more natural than we’ve seen from some other devices.”

Our reviewer also noted that the X6 Pro’s main camera is “joined by the familiar and unimpressive 8MP ultrawide and 2MP macro combo” which “aren’t quite up to the standard set by the other cameras, and are best avoided for the most part”. With this in mind, we’d have reason to assume this is similar to the F6 Pro.

The F6 Pro has 120W HyperCharge

Both the F6 Pro and X6 Pro have a 5000mAh battery capacity, which is fairly standard with smartphones now. We were impressed with the X6 Pro’s 67W turbocharging, which we found took us from 1-100% in just 45 minutes.

The F6 Pro looks set to shorten this recharge time even further thanks to the inclusion of truly rapid 120W HyperCharge, which Poco promises will get you to 100% in just 19 minutes.

The F6 Pro reaches 4000 nits peak brightness

The display of the F6 Pro promises to impress, thanks to its “industry-leading” borderless glass deco design and 120Hz Flow AMOLED Dot Display which should deliver higher light efficiency with low power consumption, even with a WQHD+ resolution. The F6 Pro is also capable of a massive 4000 nits peak brightness which Poco explains will offer users a “fully immersive visual experience.”

The X6 Pro also boasts a noteworthy display, which our reviewer concluded was “nothing short of impressive”. While the handset boasts an impressive CrystalRes 1.5K Flow AMOLED Dot Display panel for rich colours, its brightness falls short when compared to the F6 Pro, reaching a peak of 1800 nits.

Having said that, it’s worth noting that 1800 nits is still impressive and means the phone is usable even in direct sunlight.

The X6 Pro is cheaper

Naturally as the older of the two, the X6 Pro has a cheaper RRP of £369/€349.90. The F6 Pro is slightly more expensive, starting at £499/€579.

You might like…

The post Poco F6 Pro vs Poco X6 Pro: Comparing the mid-rangers appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Poco F6 vs Poco F6 Pro: What's the difference?

Lewis Painter — Thu, 23 May 2024 12:15:00 +0000

Poco has just revealed two flagship-level devices, the Poco F6 and F6 Pro, but what’s the difference between the two?

While you might assume that the Poco F6 Pro is an all-round upgrade on the Poco F6, it’s not quite as clear-cut as that. Yes, the Pro model features more premium tech overall, but the regular Poco F6 isn’t that far behind with a focus on performance for mobile gamers that could sway your buying decision.

We’re yet to go hands-on with the Poco F6 and F6 Pro, but here are some of the key differences between the two based on specs.

The Poco F6 has a more powerful processor

You might assume that the Poco F6 Pro has the more powerful processor of the two given its Pro-level branding, but that’s not actually the case. You see, while the Poco F6 Pro features the flagship-level Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 – the choice of flagships in last year in 2023 – the Poco F6 features the new Snapdragon 8s Gen 3, which only made its debut in April 2024.

It’s not more powerful than the current-flagship Snapdragon 8 Gen 3, but when we asked about relative processing power at its reveal, Qualcomm explained that the Snapdragon 8s Gen 3 sits somewhere between the 8 Gen 2 and 8 Gen 3 in terms of processing power.

That’ll give the Poco F6 an edge in the performance department, but given that the regular F6 is framed as a gaming phone, that shouldn’t be too surprising.

It’s also worth noting that, while the Poco F6 features a more powerful processor, the Poco F6 Pro benefits from additional RAM and higher storage options. In fact, with either 12- or 16GB of LPDDRX5 RAM and either 256GB, 512GB or 1TB of storage to choose from, it leaves the regular F6’s 6- or 8GB of RAM and 256GB/512GB storage looking a little paltry in comparison.

Poco F6

The Poco F6 Pro has a more premium display

The Poco F6 might be the more powerful of the two, but it’s the Poco F6 Pro that has the more premium display tech – and by quite a bit too.

You see, the Poco F6 Pro features a 6.67-inch AMOLED screen with a pixel-packed WQHD+ (3200 x 1440) resolution matched only by truly premium alternatives like the Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra. That’s paired with a smooth 120Hz refresh rate and an impressive peak brightness of 4000 nits, double that of the Pixel 8 Pro.

It also offers support for 12-bit colour depth, and with 3840Hz PWM dimming, it should be easy on the eyes too.

Now don’t misunderstand us; the Poco F6’s display is far from unimpressive with a 6.67-inch AMOLED screen and matching 120Hz refresh rate, but it’s not quite as pixel-packed with a 1.5K resolution. Peak brightness has also taken a hit compared to its premium brethren, maxing out at 2400nits, and the PWM dimming has been halved down to 1920Hz too.

Still, these are very good specs that’ll likely deliver a great experience for mobile gamers – but we’ll confirm for sure once we go hands-on.

Poco F6 Pro

The Poco F6 Pro has faster charging

Both the Poco F6 and F6 Pro share the same 5,000mAh battery that should deliver strong battery life, but when it does come time to top-up the phones, the F6 Pro will recharge at a much faster rate.

In fact, with 120W HyperCharge support – and the charger in the box – users should expect rapid charge times. While we’re yet to test the F6 Pro specifically, the OnePlus 12 has a near-identical 5000mAh cell with 120W charge speeds and that could get a full charge in just 26 minutes.

The Poco F6 is no slouch with 90W HyperCharge support, again with the charger in the box, but it won’t be quite as quick to hit that 100% mark.

The Poco F6 Pro has a more capable camera setup

The Poco F6 Pro sports what the company calls a “50MP triple camera setup” which might lead you to believe that all three lenses are 50MP, but that’s not the case.

Instead, it’s just the main camera that gets the 50MP treatment, using the Light Fusion 800 image sensor that’s said to excel in HDR capture, along with staples like OIS and a super wide f/1.4 aperture that should also benefit low-light photography.

That’s paired with an 8MP ultrawide and a near-pointless 2MP macro camera, the latter only there to bump up the camera count compared to the regular F6.

That’s because the regular F6 also sports a 50MP main camera and 8MP ultrawide lens, though the main lens uses a Sony IMX882 sensor with a combination of OIS and EIS. The aperture is still pretty wide at f/1.59, which should give close-up shots a nice bokeh. You don’t get the 2MP macro lens like the Pro model, but honestly, you won’t be missing out on much.

The Poco F6 is more affordable

The Poco F6 is the cheaper of the new duo, coming in at £399 with 8GB RAM and 256GB storage, while the Poco F6 Pro will set you back £50 more at £499, with more premium options for both also available. Both are available to buy from parent company Xiaomi now, with discounted early bird pricing available until 30 May.

You might like…

The post Poco F6 vs Poco F6 Pro: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Poco F6 vs Samsung Galaxy A55 5G: What’s the difference?

Jessica Gorringe — Thu, 23 May 2024 12:15:00 +0000

Poco has just announced its latest flagship smartphones, the Poco F6 and the Poco F6 Pro, with the F6 promising a “truly flagship gaming performance”.

How does the new Poco F6 compare to the Samsung Galaxy A55? Although we haven’t reviewed the Poco F6 yet, we have reviewed the Galaxy A55 and gave the mid-range smartphone a solid four-star rating.

We’ve compared the specs of the two handsets and noted their key differences below.

The Poco F6 runs on the Snapdragon 8s Gen 3 processor

The Poco F6 runs on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8s Gen 3 processor, which launched back in March 2024. Although not Qualcomm’s top-end offering, the Snapdragon 8s Gen 3 promises to deliver the flagship 8-series capabilities to more Android smartphones.

Instead of using an external chipset the Galaxy A55 runs on Samsung’s own Exynos 1480 processor, which was introduced with this handset. Despite promising 37% more graphics power than its predecessor, our reviewer found that the handset isn’t “the most powerful phone you can get for the money” and concluded that this isn’t a great choice for gaming enthusiasts.

This is particularly noteworthy as Poco promises the F6 will offer “smoother gameplay and instant touch accuracy” with the Snapdragon 8s Gen 3’s AI capabilities offering “more detailed and realistic game visual effects.”

The Samsung Galaxy A55 has three rear cameras

The A55 boasts a trio of cameras at the rear, including a 50MP main lens, 12MP ultrawide and a 5MP macro although we found that the latter is “the closest we get to a filler camera” in the handset.

We found the A55 to be “a pretty satisfying little phone camera” which offered “good general image quality in almost all scenarios” but it’s worth noting that the handset “doesn’t offer as faithful a preview image as … high-end Samsungs.”

In comparison, the Poco F6 has a 50MP main lens with OIS support and an 8MP ultrawide lens. As we haven’t tested this camera setup yet, we can’t comment on how well it copes but Poco states that with the P3 colour gamut, images are more vivid and true-to-life and, thanks to upgraded motion tracking technology, fast-moving subjects are automatically focused.

There’s also a new AI functionality in the F6 which lets users edit images in Album mode, which we’d be interested to try. Unfortunately unlike Samsung’s flagship S24 range, the A55 misses out on Galaxy AI features.

The Poco F6 has 2400 nits peak brightness

The Poco F6 boasts an impressive peak brightness of up to 2400 nits which, when added to the Flow AMOLED display and slim bezel design, should create a “clear, immersive premium viewing experience, whether gaming, watching videos or reading online”.

The Galaxy A55 however has a peak brightness of 1000 nits which although is still an impressive figure, our reviewer noted that the A55 still didn’t feel like a “massively bright phone” due to the “slight contrast loss of internal screen reflections”.

The Poco F6 has 90W turbo charging

Both handsets have a 5000mAh capacity battery which is fairly standard with most modern Android smartphones. The difference is that the F6 offers much faster charging with 90W than the Galaxy A55 does with its 25W capability.

In fact we found that charging the A55 from 1-100% took 83 minutes and a 15% quick charge only provided a 26% battery boost.

While we haven’t tested the speed of the F6’s 90W charging yet, we can compare it to the 90W ability of the Xiaomi 14 which took just 34 minutes to get from 1-100%. If the F6 is similar then we can expect impressively speedy charging.

The Poco F6 is cheaper in the UK

Perhaps surprisingly as the newer model, the F6 has a cheaper starting RRP in the UK of £399 whereas the Galaxy A55 has a slightly more expensive starting price in the UK, starting at £439.

However in Europe the F6 is cheaper, with a starting RRP of €449.90 compared to the A55’s €529.

You might like…

The post Poco F6 vs Samsung Galaxy A55 5G: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Pro vs MacBook Pro: Tablet or laptop?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 22 May 2024 11:29:55 +0000

Apple offers a wide range of iPads and MacBooks, including budget-friendly devices for everyday use and those designed for professional needs.

Apple’s iPad Pro launched in 2015 alongside the slightly cheaper iPad Air and was offered as an option for busy professionals, such as Digital Designers and Producers. In comparison, the MacBook Pro launched back in 2006 and was the first Apple computer to take on the MacBook title.

Both the iPad Pro and MacBook Pro are the most premium options in their respective product lines and therefore the most expensive, but is one better than the other?

We’ve compared both the iPad Pro and MacBook Pro ranges as a whole to highlight the main differences between the two.

Design

Naturally as a tablet, the iPad Pro is much lighter than the MacBook Pro and is better suited if you intend on using your device predominantly on the move. The latest iPad Pro weighs up to 579g whereas the latest MacBook Pro can weigh between 1.55kg and 2.16kg (depending on the model and chipset).

The iPad Pro is currently available in either an 11-inch or 13-inch model, with the latter option replacing a previously available 12.9-inch iPad Pro. The MacBook Pro is currently available in either a 14-inch or 16-inch model.

Despite predominantly being a touchscreen tablet, the iPad Pro is compatible with extra accessories to enhance the experience including Apple’s Magic Keyboard, which is useful if you’d like to indulge in a bit of laptop-style productivity. In fact, if you invest in the iPad Pro M4 there’s a revised Magic Keyboard which includes a glass trackpad with haptic feedback and a 14-key function row.

The new iPad Pro is also compatible with the new Apple Pencil Pro which includes new featuressuch as barrel roll, a new gyroscope that allows precise control of shaped brush tools simply by rotating the pencil, and Find My support.

Perhaps reflecting the “Pro” label, both the MacBook Pro and iPad Pro are usually only available in more muted colours with options sticking to Silver, Space Grey or Space Black depending on the model.

Screen

All iPad Pro models have at least featured Apple’s Liquid Retina display, however the newest iPad Pro boasts an Ultra Retina XDR display which has been hailed by Apple as the “world’s most advanced display”.

The Ultra Retina XDR display was designed to push beyond the capabilities of the Liquid Retina XDR display found in both its predecessor and the most recent MacBook Pro lineup. The Ultra XDR Retina Display essentially is Apple’s term for Tandem OLED technology, which stacks two OLED screens on top of one another, combining the light from both to boost the full-screen brightness.

Apple explains that this “enables sub-millisecond control over the colour and luminance of each pixel” which should allow for the screen to feel more responsive and fluid, making the iPad Pro a great choice for creative professionals.

The latest MacBook Pro M3 models instead have a Liquid Retina XDR display which utilise mini-LED technology. This essentially is an LCD panel that uses more LEDs that are smaller and individually dimmed to achieve a better contrast ratio than previous Retina displays.

Performance

Like the MacBook Pro range, the iPad Pro has run on Apple’s desktop-level M-series chipset since the 5th Gen model launched back in 2021. Starting with M1, followed by the M2 chip in the 6th Gen, the iPad Pro is currently the only Apple device running on the newest M4 chipset at the time of publishing.

Despite the most up to date iPad Pro currently running on the new M4 chipset, and the MacBook Pro still running on the M3 chipset, the two devices utilise entirely different operating systems: iPadOS and macOS. iPadOS has more in common with the iPhone operating system, iOS, and is unable to run macOS apps, whereas macOS is able to run more intensive programs as well as iPadOS apps.

Unlike the iPad Pro and even MacBook Air, the MacBook Pro can also be picked up with the Pro and Max versions of the M chip too.

The Pro version of the M chip promises faster performance than the standard, with the most recent M3 Pro providing “extremely fast performance when working on more graphics-intensive tasks”.

The M3 Max goes even further and was “designed for pros needing the highest performance available in a MacBook Pro with industry-leading battery life in a pro laptop”.

Battery

The iPad Pro has remained consistent with its battery life since its inception, offering up to 10 hours of watching video or surfing the web with Wi-Fi.

In comparison, the MacBook Pro’s battery life depends on both the chip it’s running on and the size of the device.

Using the most recent M3 line-up as an example, the MacBook Pro M3 promises up to 22-hours of Apple TV playback. The 14-inch MacBook Pro M3 Pro and Max offer slightly less, with up to 18 hours video playback. Finally, the 16-inch MacBook Pro M3 Pro and Max actually match the standard M3 chip with 22-hours of Apple TV playback.

Similarly, while the MacBook Pro M3 is fast-charge capable with 96W USB-C Power Adapter, the 16-inch MacBook Pro M3 Pro and Max kick things up a notch with an even faster 140W USB-Power Adapter.

You might like…

The post iPad Pro vs MacBook Pro: Tablet or laptop? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Sonos Roam 2 vs Sonos Roam: A true upgrade?

Thomas Deehan — Tue, 21 May 2024 14:54:21 +0000

Sonos just announced the follow-up to its portable Roam speaker, but how do the two devices compare? Let’s take a look.

It’s been quite the day for Sonos. Not only has the company just unveiled its first-ever pair of headphones in the form of the Sonos Ace, it also quietly released a successor to the Sonos Roam, simply titled the Sonos Roam 2.

Even though the Sonos Roam is still one of the best Bluetooth speakers currently available, it has been over three years since it hit the market, and with more competition than ever, it only makes sense for Sonos to unveil a refresh that packs along a few improvements. To know how the Sonos Roam 2 and the original Sonos Roam compare, keep on reading.

There’s now a dedicated Bluetooth button

As much as we loved the Sonos Roam at launch (it scored a rare five-star rating after all), the device was definitely contrarian in having a single button for not just turning it on and off but also switching between Bluetooth and Wi-Fi modes.

This time around Sonos has sought to simplify the whole process by having a separate, dedicated button for Bluetooth, hopefully making it a much easier process to jump from one device to the next, depending on where you want to beam your music from.

The Sonos Roam 2 can work straight out of the box

One of the needlessly convoluted aspects of the original Sonos Roam was that you couldn’t simply connect it to a device via Bluetooth right away. To get to that part you first needed to connect the Sonos Roam to your Wi-Fi hotspot and follow the set-up process (the last thing anyone wants on a camping trip).

This time around, Sonos has done away with all that as you can connect to the Sonos Roam 2 via Bluetooth from the jump, making it more accessible in the way that you would want a Bluetooth speaker to be.

The design and sound quality are almost completely unchanged

To anyone hoping for a massive uptick in sound quality for the Roam 2, I’m afraid that you’re going to be disappointed. With the same core components under the hood, Sonos has avoided any declaration about improved audio for the Roam 2, meaning that the Roam’s successor probably isn’t an essential upgrade for anyone who owns the first-gen speaker.

The design has also remained almost completely untouched, except for one minor change. Unlike last time, the Sonos logo now adheres to the same colour as the rest of the device (with five options available). From a visual perspective, it’s the only thing that lets you know if you’re looking at a Sonos Roam 2 or an original Sonos Roam.

The price has stayed the same

Probably knowing that a few minor tweaks aren’t really enough to justify a major price increase, Sonos has wisely decided to keep the price of the Sonos Roam 2 the same as the original Sonos Roam, retailing at £179/$179.

In this context, the Sonos Roam 2 is best seen as a minor refresh of Sonos’ portable speaker range as opposed to a full-on successor, although it is worth mentioning that you can find original Sonos Roam at a discounted rate at certain retailers, potentially making it a better buy for those on a budget.

You might like…

The post Sonos Roam 2 vs Sonos Roam: A true upgrade? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Sonos Ace vs Sony WH-1000XM5: What’s the difference?

Jessica Gorringe — Tue, 21 May 2024 14:10:11 +0000

Sonos has just announced its first-ever pair of over-ear headphones, Sonos Ace, marking the brand’s “long-awaited entry into the personal listening category”.

How does the Sonos Ace compare to Sony’s WH-1000XM5 headphones? Although we haven’t reviewed the Sonos Ace yet, we have spent time with the Sony WH-1000XM5 and awarded them with a perfect five-star rating.

With that in mind, we’ve compared the specs and features of the new Sonos Ace to the Sony WH-1000XM5 so you can get an idea of which headphones are better suited for you.

Get the top-end Google Pixel 8 Pro on a bargain contract

Pick up a Google Pixel 8 Pro for just £79 upfront and £29.99 a month on a 24-month contract. Powered by ID Mobile, this contract includes a whopping 100GB of data and unlimited texts and minutes.

Mobiles UK
£79 upfront
£29.99 a month

View Deal

Sonos Ace has 40mm dynamic drivers

The Sonos Ace has a custom-designed 40mm dynamic driver in each ear cup to deliver “superior precision and clarity.”

In comparison, the Sony WH-1000XM5 has a specially designed 30mm driver unit which Sony explains improves high-frequency sensitivity for more natural sound quality and enhances noise cancelling too.

As we haven’t tested the Sonos Ace yet, it’s hard to say whether the 40mm drivers will result in a better sound to the Sony WH-1000XM5, especially as Kob Monney concluded the headphones “remain the best-sounding headphones at their price”.

Both have Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

As is now standard with most premium headphones, both the Sonos Ace and Sony WH-1000XM5 feature Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) technology. For ANC to work, microphones in headphones detect and actively counter external sounds to provide a more immersive listening experience.

Both the Sonos Ace and Sony WH-1000XM5 use eight microphones to detect and counter external sounds. Again, while we haven’t tested the ANC of the Sonos Ace yet, we were impressed with the Sony WH-1000XM5’s capabilities with Kob noting that “when faced with sharp, screeching sounds the 1000XM5 dull the edges to make them less noticeable”.

Speaking of microphones, both the Sonos Ace and Sony WH-1000XM5 also feature beamforming microphones that target voice pickup and suppress background noise. In fact, the WH-1000XM5 has Sony’s Precise Voice Pickup Technology, which uses its four beamforming microphones alongside an AI-based noise reduction algorithm to isolate your voice, whether you’re indoors or outdoors, for industry-leading call quality.

Both have 30-hours of battery life

Both the Sonos Ace and Sony WH-1000XM5 boast impressive battery life with up to 30 hours of music playback with noise cancelling turned on. The Sony WH-1000XM5 promises a maximum of 40 hours when noise cancelling is switched off too.

Both headphones also offer a convenient fast battery top-up, with just three minutes plugged in providing three hours of battery life.

Sony WH-1000XM5 is cheaper

The WH-1000XM5 currently has a cheaper RRP than the Sonos Ace, at just £299, and is also available to buy now. The Sonos Ace has an RRP of £449 / €499 / $449 and is currently available for pre-order, ready to ship from 5th June 2024.

You might like…

The post Sonos Ace vs Sony WH-1000XM5: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Sonos Ace vs AirPods Max: How do these flagship headphones compare?

Jessica Gorringe — Tue, 21 May 2024 13:00:00 +0000

Sonos has just launched its first ever pair of over-ear headphones: Sonos Ace. Here’s how they stack up against the AirPods Max from what we currently know.

While we haven’t yet had a chance to review the headphones, Sonos promises that the Sonos Ace “builds on Sonos’ leading reputation for superior sound, sophisticated design, and category-disrupting innovation to redefine personal listening”.

So how does the Sonos Ace compare to Apple’s over-ear headphone offering, the AirPods Max? As the latter launched back in 2020, we have spent a lot of time with the Apple’s premium headphones and gave them a solid four-star rating.

We’ve compared the specs of the Sonos Ace with the AirPods Max so you can see the key differences and any similarities between the two flagship headphones.

Get the top-end Google Pixel 8 Pro on a bargain contract

Pick up a Google Pixel 8 Pro for just £79 upfront and £29.99 a month on a 24-month contract. Powered by ID Mobile, this contract includes a whopping 100GB of data and unlimited texts and minutes.

Mobiles UK
£79 upfront
£29.99 a month

View Deal

Both have Active Noise Cancelling (ANC)

Like most premium headphones, both the Sonos Ace and AirPods Max have Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) technology. With ANC, microphones detect and actively counter external sounds to offer a more immersive listening experience.

To do this, both the Sonos Ace and AirPods Max use eight microphones to detect and counter external sounds. The difference here is that while the Sonos Ace has eight microphones in total, for both ANC and for phone calls, the AirPods Max has one additional microphone for voice pickup.

If you don’t require total noise cancellation then you can activate Aware Mode by simply pressing a button on your Sonos Ace, allowing you to hear and engage with your surroundings. Similarly, AirPods Max also offers Transparency mode, which can also be activated by pressing a button on your headphones.

Sonos Ace has TrueCinema technology coming soon

Sonos has teased an upcoming new technology that is set to be introduced into the Sonos Ace headphones later this year: TrueCinema. Sonos explains that TrueCinema is an all-new technology that “precisely maps your space then renders a complete surround sound system for an audience of one”.

Until the launch of this new feature, Sonos Ace users will have to make do with its spatial audio compatibility and head tracking with Dolby Atmos, which promises an immersive listening experience.

While the AirPods Max don’t have a dedicated technology like this, Apple does promise that its personalised spatial audio with dynamic head tracking offers a cinema-like sound that surrounds you.

Sonos Ace have a longer battery life

While the AirPods Max have 20 hours of battery life with ANC and Spatial Audio turned on, the Sonos Ace boast up to 30 hours even with ANC enabled.

In addition, the Sonos Ace uses a USB-C connector whereas the AirPods Max still uses Apple’s Lightning adaptor. If you have an iPhone 14 or older then this shouldn’t be too much of an issue for you, but if you’ve already turned to USB-C then this is an extra cable to keep for charging.

Just a three-minute charge of the Sonos Ace results in three hours of battery life which makes it perfect for last minute dashes out the house. The AirPods Max do offer a similar speedy charge option, with a five-minute charge offering just 1.5 hours of battery.

AirPods Max is available in five colours

The AirPods Max boast a more colourful lineup and is available in five colours: Silver, Space Grey, Sky Blue, Green and Pink. In comparison, the Sonos Ace are only available in Silver or Black.

Speaking of design, the Sonos Ace have a lightweight memory-foam-lined headband with stainless steel arms that expand. The ear cushions are also wrapped in a vegan leather for softness and durability.

The AirPods Max’s headband is made from a breathable knitted mesh which distributes weight to reduce on-head pressure. It is also durable, thanks to the stainless steel frame and aluminium cups which house the mesh textile wrapped memory-foam ear cushions.

Sonos Ace is cheaper

The Sonos Ace will be available from the 5th June 2024 with an RRP of £449 / €499 / $449 / AUD 699.

Despite being the older model of the two, the AirPods Max actually has a higher RRP of £499 / €579 / $549, however this does include a Smart Case.

You might like…

The post Sonos Ace vs AirPods Max: How do these flagship headphones compare? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Tempered Glass vs Plastic Film: Which iPad screen protector is better?

Lewis Painter — Tue, 21 May 2024 11:36:46 +0000

The display on the iPad Air 2022

iPads have such large, gorgeous displays, so it’s important to keep them looking their best with a screen protector. But, with both plastic film protectors and tempered glass protectors available for Apple’s big-screen tablet collection, which is best?

It’s not as simple a question as you might assume; while tempered glass certainly offers better overall protection for your iPad, film protectors can also serve a purpose for the right person, being much thinner, lightweight and cheaper than the premium alternative.

With that said, here are the key differences between tempered glass and plastic film protectors, and our verdict on which is better to protect your iPad screen.

Plastic film protectors are near-invisible, but they’re not perfect

The biggest benefit to plastic film screen protectors is that they’re near-invisible once applied to a screen. They’re incredibly thin, offer 100% clarity and don’t add any real heft to your device while still protecting it from light damage.

In fact, many 2024 smartphones come with one pre-applied as they cause such little impact on the overall screen experience – though the same can’t be said about the iPad, sadly. Still, that means you’re free to apply a plastic film screen protector on your iPad’s display without worry that it’ll have any negative effect on the look or feel of the screen.

The biggest benefit to plastic film protectors is the cost; given that they’re just thin sheets of transparent plastic, it shouldn’t come as much surprise that they’re pretty cheap.

You can pick up plastic screen protectors for the 10th-gen iPad for just £3.95 at Amazon at the time of writing, and alternatives for other iPads are just as affordable. This means that they’re not only an inexpensive initial investment that’ll help protect your iPad’s screen, but they’re cheap enough to replace once they get a little scratched.

However, the thin, flexible nature of plastic film screen protectors means they only offer limited protection. A plastic film protector can protect your precious iPad from marks, light scratches and other cosmetic damage, but that’s about it; any hard impacts to the screen that’d crack a non-protected screen will cause similar damage with a plastic protector applied.

That’s where tempered glass screen protectors come into play.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Tempered glass screen protectors are much more durable

Tempered glass screen protectors are a more premium alternative to plastic film protectors that offer way better protection, both from cosmetic damage and hard impacts to the screen.

That’s possible because the glass used has been tempered to improve its durability. That means it’s essentially highly scratch-resistant, with a hardness rating of 9H which makes it almost as hard as diamond. That means that tempered glass protectors can confidently resist scratches from even sharp objects like keys, and that should translate to a largely mark-free iPad experience.

Tempered glass protectors don’t just protect the screen from incoming damage either; they can also help protect the screen if you drop your iPad. This is because tempered glass has excellent shatter resistance, helping to absorb the impact from the drop and prevent the screen from taking the brunt of the damage.

It’s not going to protect it from all drops – if the corner of the iPad’s frame gets dented into the display from a drop, that’ll cause internal screen damage – but it’s certainly added peace of mind, especially when combined with a durable case.

The use of glass also means that tempered screen protectors are very clear, not impacting the clarity of your iPad’s screen, while many also come with an oleophobic coating to help reduce the amount of fingerprints and smudges the protector picks up.

You’ve also got other options when it comes to tempered screen protectors, like privacy glass that hides your screen activity from those around you, and textured alternatives that feel nicer to the touch, which further improve your tablet experience.

Of course, with all these benefits comes increased cost, especially when it comes to larger tempered glass screen protectors for iPads – though they’re still relatively cheap in the grand scheme of things. These can cost upwards of £15 depending on the manufacturer you opt for, but it’s generally worth paying a little more for better quality.

Tempered glass protectors are also quite thick, meaning they’ll be noticeable once applied to your iPad, and this could also cause potential compatibility issues with protective iPad cases, some of which reach right to the edge of the screen.

It’s not necessarily a dealbreaker with the improved screen protection on offer, but it’s worth bearing in mind if you use a case or keyboard cover frequently.

Which type of iPad screen protector is best?

Both plastic and tempered glass screen protectors have their merits, and the decision of which is best will depend entirely on your personal needs.

If you just want a cheap screen protector to protect your iPad from cosmetic damage, or you already use a case and just want extra peace of mind, a plastic screen protector will likely fulfil your needs. It may not offer the best protection, but it’s slim, affordable and offers great screen clarity.

If, however, you want the best protection for your iPad screen, tempered glass is certainly the way to go. It’s a more expensive investment and they’re much thicker than plastic alternatives, but with 9H hardness and shatter resistance, it’ll not only stave off scratches and other marks but possibly even protect your screen from fall damage.

You might like…

The post Tempered Glass vs Plastic Film: Which iPad screen protector is better? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Apple iPad Air vs iPad Pro: What's the difference?

Lewis Painter — Thu, 16 May 2024 13:47:20 +0000

Apple’s iPad collection isn’t as simple as it once was, with various brands like iPad Air and iPad Pro thrown around, and it isn’t always clear how they differ.

To some, Air branding might suggest a lighter, less powerful version of the standard iPad. However, that’s not the case with the iPad Air, looking increasingly like a mid-way point between the regular iPad and the top-end iPad Pro – even more so with the latest generation of devices.

The issue is that, even with that logic in mind, there are plenty of similarities between the iPad Air and iPad Pro collections that blur the line between the two. With that in mind, we’ve created this guide to explain the key differences between the iPad Air and iPad Pro families. We won’t be focusing on individual products here, but rather on the ranges as a whole, to explain how they differ conceptually.

It’s worth noting that we’ve tested every model of iPad Air and iPad Pro that Apple has released, so we’re well-equipped to provide the best insight into the key differences between the two ranges and help guide you on your buying journey.

Plus, if you need any more help, we’ve also got the best iPad and best tablet guides to point you in the right direction.

Pricing

Both the iPad Air and iPad Pro are very much premium options not only in Apple’s tablet collection but the tablet market at large, and both have price tags to match – though the iPad Air is slightly more affordable than the top-end iPad Pro.

That’s because the iPad Air has transitioned to become the mid-way point between the regular iPads and the top-end iPad Pro, boasting key iPad Pro features without costing quite as much. It has still steadily risen in price since its revival back in 2019 though, with the latest 11-inch iPad Air starting at £599/$599, going up to £799/$799 if you want the new larger 13-inch model.

That’s still much more tempting than the iPad Pro though; Apple’s no-holds-barred tablet range has the most advanced tech and best accessory support of the entire iPad collection, but starting at £999/$999 for the 11-inch model and rising to £1,299/$1299 for the 13-inch model, you’re certainly paying a premium for the experience.

Design

At one time it was pretty easy to tell the iPad Pro range from the rest of the iPad collection; the tablets were not only larger at 11 and 12.9 inches respectively, but they sported a unique angular design in place of the curved chassis of other models in the iPad collection.

However, that has changed over the past few years as Apple has transitioned the rest of the iPad collection to sport the same general look and feel, complete with the same angular edges and general industrial look. That’s especially true of the iPad Air, whose screen has also grown from 10.5 to 11 inches over the past few years, with the latest iteration looking pretty similar to the 11-inch iPad Pro.

That’s also true of the new 13-inch iPad Air, released as part of the 2024 range, which brings the iPad Air closer to the 13-inch iPad Pro than ever before.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

It’s not just the general look either; the iPad Air is the only other iPad to match the iPad Pro’s accessory support, sporting the same 3-dot connector on the rear panel as the iPad Pro, and there’s an area on the right side of the tablet designed to house the Apple Pencil too – but more on accessories in a bit.

Despite the growing similarities between the two ranges, there are a few ways to differentiate between the iPad Air and iPad Pro. For one, the iPad Pro range is only ever available in muted tones like space grey and silver. The iPad Air range, on the other hand, leans into more colourful finishes like blue and purple.

As a general rule of thumb, the iPad Air is generally thinner and lighter than the equivalent iPad Pro – as the branding suggests. However, that has actually changed with the latest iPad Pro, which at 5.1mm thick, is the thinnest Apple product to date. Thanks for confusing things, Apple!

Design aside, the most obvious difference should come when you power the tablets on, with the iPad Pro range sporting the most advanced screen tech in Apple’s collection. The crowning glory of which, 120Hz Apple ProMotion tech, remains exclusive to the iPad Pro range.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

For those unaware, that means that the screens of recent iPad Pro models will look and feel smoother than most competing tablets that render at a standard 60Hz.

The difference is even more stark when comparing the iPad Air to the latest generation of iPad Pro, with the new 11- and 13-inch models offering OLED technology for the first time. As with OLED panels on recent iPhones, this translates to much deeper blacks, more vivid colours and, with double-stacked OLED panels, it’s plenty bright too.

Performance

Performance was once an area where the iPad Pro stood head-and-shoulders above the rest of the competition. It was a clear message to consumers: if you want the best performance possible, get the iPad Pro.

That’s still the story with the most recent models of iPad Pro, sporting Apple’s desktop-class M2 or M4 chipset depending on the variant you opt for. The M-series chipsets not only delivers the best performance of any tablet on the market – Apple-branded or not – but enables the iPad Pro to perform some pretty cool tricks including Apple’s new Stage Manager multitasking system, powering a second display and more.

However, as with the design, recent models of iPad Air have begun to encroach on the iPad Pro’s hold on performance power. That’s not so much the case with older models of iPad Air, usually sporting the same A-series chipset of the equivalent flagship iPhone available at the time, but the 2022 model made the jump to the Apple M1 chipset, and the 2024 model continues that journey with the M2.

That means that the latest iPad Air can not only perform at a similar level to the iPad Pro in terms of everyday performance, but it means that it’s the only non-Pro iPad to offer features like the aforementioned Stage Manager multitasking system and, with the M2 variant, Apple Pencil Hover tech.

That said, the M4 chip of the latest iPad Pro is still much more powerful than the M2 chip in the iPad Air, so if you really want the best performance possible, the iPad Pro is the one to go for. Just be sure you’ll really make the most out of that power, as you could save a pretty penny with the still-capable M1 or M2 iPad Air.

Accessories

Apple’s iPad Pro range initially set the bar for accessory support with first-party accessories like the Apple Pencil 2, which magnetically snaps onto the side of the tablet for storage and wireless charging, as well as the upgraded Magic Keyboard that provides something more akin to a traditional laptop experience, complete with a dedicated trackpad.

You’ve also got the option of the second-gen Magic Keyboard and the new Apple Pencil Pro, but these are exclusively available for the latest generation of iPad Pro.

Combined, they make the iPad Pro a powerful laptop replacement, especially when combined with elements of iPadOS like Stage Manager.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

However, the iPad Air also boasts great accessory support, with the past few generations all supporting the Apple Pencil 2 and its own version of the pro-level Magic Keyboard, levelling the accessory playing field. That trend has continued with the latest-generation iPad Air range, offering the same support for the Apple Pencil Pro and Magic Keyboard as the equivalent Pro model.

That means you no longer need to go for the top-end iPad Pro if you want a solid laptop replacement; the iPad Air, combined with the optional accessories, is just as capable.

Verdict

Both brands of iPad service different users – the iPad Air is a great work/school companion while the Pro range is designed for pro-level creatives that’ll really get the most out of the high-end tech on offer – so it’s largely down to how you envision you’ll use your iPad.

If you truly believe you’ll make use of the top-end spec on offer, be it for work or play, the iPad Pro is a worthy purchase that’ll service all your tablet needs. But for most people, the iPad Air – especially the recent M2 variant – will be all the iPad you need.

You might like…

The post Apple iPad Air vs iPad Pro: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Google Pixel 8a vs iPhone 14: What’s the difference?

Lewis Painter — Thu, 16 May 2024 10:41:38 +0000

The Google Pixel 8a is the latest mid-range smartphone to hit the market – but how does it compare to the popular iPhone 14?

While it might seem odd to compare a mid-range phone and a flagship phone, the iPhone 14 has dropped in price dramatically since it first came to market in 2022, making the choice between whether to buy a Pixel 8a or an iPhone 14 a very real one for consumers.

With that said, here are five key differences between the Google Pixel 8a and iPhone 14 to help you buy the best smartphone for your specific needs.

The iPhone 14 has a higher-quality build

While design preferences are largely subjective, it’s hard to argue that the iPhone 14 isn’t the better-built smartphone of the two – largely because it was once a premium phone before dropping down into mid-range territory with the release of subsequent iPhones.

That means that all the staples of a high-end smartphone, including the use of glass and aluminium in place of the aluminium and plastic build of the Google Pixel 8a, but it goes further than that.

The iPhone 14 also offers better IP68 dust and water resistance than the IP67 of the Pixel 8a, and it also uses Gorilla Glass and Apple’s own Ceramic Shield tech to protect the rear and front glass respectively. The Pixel 8a does have its own display protection in the form of Gorilla Glass 3, but that’s fairly long in the tooth in 2024.

The iPhone 14 is also thinner and lighter at 7.8mm and 172g respectively, compared to the 8.9mm and 188g on offer from the Pixel 8a.

That’s not to say that the Pixel 8a isn’t a good-looking phone; it has rounded edges, the same matte finish as the Pixel 8 Pro and the infamous camera bar doesn’t protrude quite as far as the flagship variants either. It’s just not quite up to the task of taking on a flagship-level iPhone.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The Google Pixel 8a has higher-res cameras

There’s more to a good quality camera than megapixel count, but with pixel-binning tech utilised on most high-res smartphone sensors, it certainly helps. That’s what Google hopes with the Pixel 8a anyway, with a higher-res camera offering than the competing iPhone 14.

More specifically, the Pixel 8a sports a main 64MP camera with an f/1.9 aperture and OIS, backed up by a 13MP f/2.2 120-degree ultrawide camera.

The iPhone 14, on the other hand, has dual 12MP main and ultrawide lenses, though with a wider f/1.5 aperture on the main camera, it could perform better than the Pixel 8a specifically in low-light conditions.

However, where the Pixel 8a – and Pixels in general – excel is in the AI department, with AI-powered photo modes like Night Shot and Super Res Zoom delivering images of a higher quality than its mid-range price tag suggests. There’s also a bunch of AI-powered photo editing tools that you won’t find on the competing iPhone.

However, we did find that the iPhone 14 took exceptional shots when we reviewed it back at release in 2022, so we’ll have to do some side-by-side testing to determine which is actually the better camera of the two.

The iPhone 14 is more powerful than the Pixel 8a

The Google Pixel 8a sports the same Tensor G3 chipset as the flagship Pixel 8 and Pixel 8 Pro – making it all the more surprising that the two-year-old iPhone 14 and its A15 Bionic chipset manages to beat the G3 in terms of sheer power output in our early benchmark testing.

Admittedly, Google has never focused on making the Tensor chipset the most powerful around. Instead, it focuses more on AI capabilities, helping power some of the cool camera and photo tech mentioned earlier as well as other AI functionality baked into the phone’s operating system.

Still, that means that when it comes to gaming or any other chip-heavy tasks, the iPhone 14 will be the more capable option.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The Google Pixel 8a has a faster screen

As it was once a flagship-level phone, the iPhone 14’s 6.1-inch OLED screen comes packed with all kinds of premium tech simply not offered by the mid-range Pixel 8a including support for HDR10 and Dolby Vision, but Google isn’t out of the fight just yet.

You see, the Pixel’s competing 6.1-inch OLED screen has something that the iPhone 14 doesn’t; a super smooth 120Hz refresh rate. While that’s common among even budget Android phones, it’s a feature that remains exclusive to the Pro and Pro Max models of iPhone. That means that the Pixel 8a looks and feels smoother and more responsive in everyday use, and that translates to a more frame-packed gameplay experience too.

The Pixel 8a is also brighter than the iPhone 14, with a maximum brightness of 2000nits compared to 1200nits, and although it’s a slightly lower resolution screen, the Pixel 8a’s always-on screen tech makes it a worthy trade-off.

The iPhone 14 is slightly more expensive

While the iPhone 14 was a flagship smartphone that cost £849 at release in 2022, the price has dropped significantly in the two years since. At the time of writing, you can pick up an iPhone 14 for just £599 at Amazon.

Meanwhile, the Google Pixel 8a will set you back £499, and it’s available to buy right now following its announcement earlier in May.

You might like…

The post Google Pixel 8a vs iPhone 14: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Sony Xperia 10 VI vs Sony Xperia 10 V: All the upgrades you need to know about

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 15 May 2024 07:00:00 +0000

Sony has just launched its newest lineup of smartphones, including the new Xperia 10 VI. Launched as a budget-friendly smartphone, the Xperia 10 VI is the successor to last year’s Xperia 10 V.

While we haven’t reviewed the Xperia 10 VI yet, we have conclusively reviewed the Xperia 10 V and gave the handset a rather standard three-star rating. With this in mind, we’ve compared the specs of the Xperia 10 VI against our review of the 10 V to see if things have improved a year on.

Read on to learn more about the new Sony Xperia 10 VI and how it compares to 2023’s Xperia 10 V.

The Xperia 10 V is lighter

Both marketed as being lightweight smartphones, the older Xperia 10 V weighs just 159g and has a 6.1-inch display whereas the 10 VI weighs slightly more at 164g with its similar 6.1-inch display. Although this difference is negligible, with a mere 5g between the two that’ll be tough to notice in real-world use, it’s still worth noting.

Both have a 5000mAh battery for two-day battery life

Similarly to the above, both the 10 V and 10 VI are marketed as having an impressively long-lasting battery life, thanks to their 5000mAh battery capacity. Sony claimed the 10 V’s battery would provide non-stop movie playback for 34 hours, and our testing confirmed that it was a budget battery beast.

In fact, our reviewer found that “even with a bit of light gaming and YouTube, we managed two days of comfortable use.” Considering there haven’t been any major changes with the battery in the newer 10 VI, we’d expect this to be the case this time around too.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Xperia 10 V1 sports the Snapdragon 6 Gen 1

The Xperia 10 V runs on Snapdragon 695 5G Mobile Platform which launched back in October 2021, and it’s beginning to show its age. In fact, our reviewer found that the chipset “just can’t keep up like some other top-tier phones in its mid-range price bracket can” and that was at launch a year ago.

Our reviewer noted home screen stuttering and a camera app that frequently crashed and couldn’t keep up, which all added up to the 10 V feeling “sluggish right out of the gate.”

Instead, the 10 VI runs on Snapdragon 6 Gen 1, which launched back in October 2022. So although not the newest or most powerful Snapdragon chipset, this promises a few upgrades to the predecessor. We haven’t yet had a chance to test the processor on this smartphone specifically, but it’s featured on the Honor Magic 6 Lite which performed well enough for everyday use.

Xperia 10 V has three cameras

Speaking of the camera, the 10 V has a trio of rear lenses whereas the 10 VI just had a duo. Our reviewer concluded that getting a good shot “isn’t hard” in the standard camera app, with “all three of the lenses (a rare sight in a budget phone) delivering solid results when lined up correctly.” However, he does note that the “noticeable delay between pressing the shutter button and the photo actually saving (before processing) is frankly disappointing”.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Instead, the 10 VI has two lenses with three focal lengths, 16mm, 26mm and 52mm, suggesting that one of the two lenses will double up as a 2x sensor. Although we haven’t yet tested its camera capabilities just yeta, we’re keen to see how it compares to its predecessor.

Both are currently the same price

The Sony Xperia 10 V comes in at £349 for a handset with 6GB of RAM and 128GB of internal memory. It is available in a choice of four colours: Sage Green, Black, White and Lavender.

The new Sony Xperia 10 VI is available for pre-order now, with shipping to begin in June. It also starts at £349for an 8GB of RAM and 128GB internal memory handset and it’s available in a slightly more limited choice of three colours: Black, White and Blue.

You might like…

The post Sony Xperia 10 VI vs Sony Xperia 10 V: All the upgrades you need to know about appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Sony Xperia 10 VI vs Google Pixel 8a: What's the difference between the budget-friendly Androids?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 15 May 2024 07:00:00 +0000

The past week or so has been packed with announcements and launches from some of the biggest tech brands, including Sony and Google.

On 7th May, Google announced its newest smartphone in the Pixel lineup, the Pixel 8a, a budget-friendly alternative to the full-fat Pixel 8. Today (15th May), Sony has announced two new smartphones: the Xperia 1 VI and the more budget-friendlyXperia 10 VI.

But how do the two Android smartphones compare? Although we haven’t yet reviewed either the Sony Xperia 10 VI or Google Pixel 8a, we’ve compared the technical specifications and noted their differences here.

Be sure to check back here, as we’ll update this once we’ve reviewed both handsets.

The Pixel 8a includes Google-exclusive AI capabilities

One of the biggest features of the entire Pixel 8 range, including the Pixel 8a, is the use of Google AI. AI has been cleverly integrated into numerous apps, including the camera and photo apps, but also everyday apps like recorder.

Photos and video recordings can be enhanced with the help of Google AI editing tools, which include the Magic Editor which lets you change an image’s background, move objects and even delete photobombers with Magic Eraser.

There’s also the inclusion of Circle to Search, a nifty feature that allows you to simply draw a circle around an image, text or video and, with Google AI, you should receive search results directly in the app you’re using.

Although we haven’t tested Google AI’s capabilities with the new Pixel 8a yet, we have tried it with the Pixel 8 and Pixel 8 Pro and have been impressed.

It’s not just the Google Pixel that has AI inclusion. The Xperia 10 V1 is also fitted with Sony AI, which is predominantly used to enhance the camera and photo editing capabilities. Sony AI allows you to shoot with automatic AI settings, change the look of photos and even create AI-edited videos.

The Google Pixel 8a runs on Google Tensor G3

The Xperia 10 VI runs on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 6 Gen 1 chipset which isn’t the newest or most powerful chipset around, but is a capable processor that’s still rolling out in new Android smartphones.The Snapdragon 6 Gen 1 offers a few impressive features, including support for over 60fps for a better gaming experience, 3x better AI performance than its predecessor and concurrent photo capture at gigapixel speeds.

The Pixel 8a instead runs on Google’s latest and most powerful chip, the Tensor G3, found across the entire Pixel range. With a focus on AI over pure performance, we concluded in our Pixel 8 review that the “Tensor G3 is more in line with 2022’s Snapdragon 8 Plus Gen 1 than the … Snapdragon 8 Gen 2” and very much expect that to be the case here.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Google offers seven years of security and Feature Drop upgrades

Google is generous with upgrades and promises up to seven years of security and OS upgrades for the Pixel 8a, taking you up to Android 21.

Sony, on the other hand, is only offering three OS upgrades and four years of security patches, falling quite short of the Pixel’s lofty heights. Even so, Sony has said that the battery should stay healthy for three years thanks to Sony’s charging technologies which are designed to preserve the battery’s health over time.

The Xperia 10 VI has a 21:9 aspect ratio

Both the Xperia 10 VI and Pixel 8a boast impressive display specs but the former takes the edge with the aspect ratio. The Pixel 8a’s 20:9 aspect ratio ratio offers an immersive viewing experience and allows for better multitasking, as there’s simply more screen real estate to play with.

The Xperia 10 VI impressively surpasses this slightly with a 21:9 aspect ratio that’s perfectly suited to widescreen Hollywood blockbusters, though this does give the screen a tall-and-narrow look in comparison to the Pixel 8a. Regardless, if you know you’ll use your smartphone to watch series or movies then either of these handsets will do just fine.

The Xperia 10 VI is cheaper

Currently available to pre-order, ready to start shipping in June, the Xperia 10 VI has an RRP of £349/€399. The Pixel 8a is available now and starts from £499/€549.

You might like…

The post Sony Xperia 10 VI vs Google Pixel 8a: What's the difference between the budget-friendly Androids? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Sony Xperia 1 VI vs Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra: Comparing the Android flagships

Lewis Painter — Wed, 15 May 2024 07:00:00 +0000

Sony has revealed its top-end flagship for 2024, the Xperia 1 VI, but how does it compare to the Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra? It is considered by many to be the best smartphone of 2024, after all.

Despite both being camera-focused flagships, there are key differences between the two, from camera tech to the use of AI and much more, that could sway your opinion one way or the other. If you’re struggling to decide between the Xperia 1 VI and Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra for your next upgrade, we’re here to help.

Here are five key differences between the Sony Xperia 1 VI and Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra. If you’re curious about what’s new from this year’s flagship, take a look at our Sony Xperia 1 VI vs Xperia 1 V comparison.

The Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra has a more versatile camera setup

Both the Sony Xperia 1 VI and Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra are camera-focused flagships with capable camera setups, but the Galaxy S24 Ultra has the edge here.

That’s because it has an impressive camera setup comprised of four lenses; a 200MP main camera, 10MP 3x telephoto, 50MP 5x periscope and a 12MP ultrawide lens, essentially providing a range of 0.5x to 10x and beyond – all the way to 100x with Samsung’s digital zoom tech.

It’s a capable system that we were very impressed with in our review, calling it one of the best camera systems of any smartphone in 2024.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The Sony Xperia 1 VI, on the other hand, sports a 52MP main camera alongside a 12MP 3.5x periscope lens and a matching 12MP ultrawide lens. While the periscope lens provides an optical range of up to 7.1x, it’s not quite as expansive as Samsung’s competing ultrawide. The main and periscope lenses are also of a lower resolution, limiting just how good its digital zoom offering can be in comparison.

The Sony Xperia 1 VI is better for pro-level photographers

While Samsung has a more versatile camera setup overall, there’s no doubt that the Sony Xperia 1 VI is the one to go for if you’re a pro-level photographer or videographer.

Not only does the phone offer the ability to double up as extra storage, a wireless viewfinder and more for recent models of Sony Alpha DSLR, but it also offers a range of advanced on-device shooting modes to get the best out of the camera system.

These were previously split into various apps, including Camera Pro, Video Pro and even Cinema Pro, but they’ve all been bundled into the main Camera app on the Xperia 1 VI, making them even easier to access.

The exact functionality depends on the mode in question, but it essentially provides granular control over every element of smartphone photography, and when it comes to video, it can make use of LUTs, record in LOG and much more.

The Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra does offer a Pro mode for camera capture, but it doesn’t quite go as far as Sony’s offering.

The Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra boasts Galaxy AI capabilities

One of the key features of the Galaxy S24 Ultra is Galaxy AI – so much so that it took centre stage over the hardware at the phone’s reveal back in January. It’s an impressive suite of AI-powered features that all take place entirely on device, allowing for cool functionality that’s fast and doesn’t need an internet connection to work.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The features range from AI transcription from voice notes to tech that’ll summarise chunks of text, as well as real-time translation tech for phone calls, advanced editing tools and much more. Though the results aren’t always perfect, it’s one of the best uses of GenAI on smartphones so far.

The Xperia 1 VI also has AI smarts, dubbed Sony AI, but it powers behind-the-scenes tech like the camera-focused human pose estimation tech and AI animal eye recognition, as well as improving connectivity and audio performance, rather than offering flashy big features users can call on at any point.

The Sony Xperia 1 VI has a high-quality headphone jack

Headphone jacks were found on practically every high-end phone in the mid-2010s, but as wireless Bluetooth headphones surged in popularity, manufacturers began ditching the jack.

Everyone, that is, apart from Sony (and a few budget smartphone makers). Sony has continued to include a 3.5mm headphone jack in practically every Xperia device around, and that continues with the Xperia 1 VI.

In fact, Sony claims that this year’s flagship has a new premium audio circuit for its 3.5mm headphone jack that should further improve the high-res audio experience on offer.

With that all said, it shouldn’t be surprising to learn that the competing Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra doesn’t offer a headphone jack, meaning you’ll have to get a USB-C adapter or opt for wireless headphones in future.

The Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra has better long-term software support

Another area where Samsung has Sony beat is with its long-term software promise for the Galaxy S24 Ultra. While previous Samsung phones already had one of the best promises around, committing to 5 OS upgrades and 4 years of security patches, that was boosted to a whopping 7 OS upgrades with the S24 series.

That means that the Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra will eventually receive the Android 21 update, continuing to enjoy all the benefits that come with yearly OS upgrades.

The Xperia 1 VI, on the other hand, has a rather paltry promise of 3 OS upgrades and 4 years of security patches, matching that of phones that cost a fraction of the price.

You might like…

The post Sony Xperia 1 VI vs Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra: Comparing the Android flagships appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Sony Xperia 1 VI vs Sony Xperia 1 V: What’s the difference?

Lewis Painter — Wed, 15 May 2024 07:00:00 +0000

Sony has revealed the Xperia 1 VI, but how does it compare to last year’s flagship, the Sony Xperia 1 V?

While the two sport a largely similar look, there are a few key differences on offer from this year’s Xperia flagship, from screen tech to camera technology and even performance. These are important elements that could sway your buying decision one way or the other.

While we’ve not yet reviewed the Xperia 1 VI, we’ve spent a lot of time with the Xperia 1 V. With that in mind, here’s how the two compare on paper ahead of the Xperia 1 VI going on sale later this month.

The Sony Xperia 1 V has a higher-res display

You might assume that, being the newer phone of the two, the Xperia 1 VI has a higher-res screen than its predecessor – but that’s not the case.

You see, while the Xperia 1 V had a 6.5-inch 4K display, this year’s Xperia 1 VI has a 6.5-inch FHD+ panel in its place. It’s easy to see why Sony ditched the 4K screen, as it came at a cost to gameplay performance and overall battery life, but it is a surprise to see a drop all the way to FHD+ rather than the QHD+ seen by similarly premium alternatives.

That’s not the only difference either; the Xperia 1 VI also ditches the traditional 21:9 aspect ratio employed by Xperia phones, instead offering a similar 19.5:9 aspect ratio as many competing smartphones. While this means that widescreen Hollywood blockbusters will no longer fill the screen completely, it does mean that the 1 VI is better suited to 16:9 content on apps like TikTok and Instagram.

The 1 VI’s screen also boasts LTPO tech for the first time, allowing the screen to drop down to as little as 1Hz dynamically to boost battery life, and it’s 50% brighter too, so it’s not an all-round downgrade by any means – but the fact remains that the Xperia 1 V has a higher-res screen better suited to true 4K content.

Sony Xperia 5 V

The Sony Xperia 1 VI has a better telephoto camera

While the Sony Xperia 1 VI and Xperia 1 V share the same excellent main camera sensor – a 52MP Exmor T sensor that outputs at 48MP used only by Sony – it has upgraded the phone’s telephoto camera this time around.

More specifically, the Xperia 1 VI has a new 12MP optical telephoto lens with an extended zoom range between 3.5x and 7.1x. As well as being the ideal sensor for portrait photography, complete with improved edge detection capabilities, the telephoto sensor can double up as a high-quality macro camera with subjects around 4cm away.

Compared to the Xperia 1 V’s 12MP telephoto that offered a shorter 3.5x – 5.2x range, it’s a decent boost. Elsewhere, however, both share the same 12MP ultrawide lens, so the only real difference between the two systems is the telephoto camera.

The Sony Xperia 1 VI has a simpler approach to camera software

Sony’s top-end Xperia 1 devices are aimed at pro-level photographers and videographers not only because they play exceptionally well with Sony Alpha cameras, doubling up as both a remote control and a viewfinder, but because of the granular control they provide users with when it comes to smartphone photography and videography.

The issue with previous Xperia 1 entries, including the V, is that the functionality was split over several apps, and it was a rather confusing experience with a slightly different UI in each depending on what the focus was. There was Photo Pro, Video Pro and even Cinema Pro, along with dedicated audio recording apps, just to name a few.

Thankfully, Sony has simplified its offering with the Xperia 1 VI. It still boasts the same granular control over its camera system as its predecessors, but they’ve all been rolled into the main Camera app for easier access. As with most other smartphone camera apps, you now only need to swipe between the various modes for quick access.

We asked Sony if the updated Camera app will also come to the Xperia 1 V via a software update in future, but the company refused to comment, so it’s an Xperia 1 VI exclusive for now.

Sony Xperia 1 VI

The Sony Xperia 1 VI is better for gaming

The newer Xperia 1 VI doesn’t only have an advantage over its predecessor with the use of the newer, faster Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 in place of the Gen 2 – it’s also the first Xperia device to boast vapour chamber cooling inside.

This is a feature often found in gaming phones, as it allows the phone to more effectively dissipate heat generated by the chipset in particularly demanding situations. It should translate to not only a cooler phone to the touch when gaming, but one that’s more stable than the Xperia 1 V over longer sessions.

Combined with a healthy dose of 12GB of RAM, 256GB or 512GB of storage and the possibility of expanding by as much as 1.5TB via microSD, it’s undoubtedly the better of the two smartphones for mobile gamers.

You might like…

The post Sony Xperia 1 VI vs Sony Xperia 1 V: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Apple iPad vs iPad Air: What's the difference?

Lewis Painter — Tue, 14 May 2024 12:06:24 +0000

Apple’s iPad collection is split across four product lines, but it’s not always clear how they differ.

The standard iPad and the iPad Air represent two of those tablet families, although the ‘Air’ moniker can be confusing to those without in-depth knowledge of Apple’s products.

We’ve created this guide to explain the key differences between the iPad and iPad Air families. We won’t be focusing on individual products (you can check out our iPad 10th gen vs iPad Air 2024 guide for that) but rather the ranges as a whole.

We’ve tested all of the latest models of the iPad and iPad Air families (except the new Air 6, for now!) so we’re well-equipped to provide all the buying advice required to get you the best value for money. And if you need more help, make sure to visit our Best iPad and Best Tablet guides for even more options.

Price

The first thing to note is that the iPad Air is generally more expensive than the base iPad, ignoring pre-owned and refurbished models.

The basic Apple iPad has acted as the go-to for those in need of a cheap iPad experience for years, while more specific variants of iPad – the Mini, Air and Pro – are much higher in price. Though the price has fluctuated and grown in line with inflation, the 10th-gen iPad will set you back around £349/$349, dropping down from its initial £499/$449 RRP in mid-2024.

The iPad Air, on the other hand, has always been a more premium option compared to the basic iPad, with the latest model costing as much as £599/$599.

Generally speaking, the iPad is seen as the entry-level iPad and the price reflects this, while the iPad Air is positioned as a more premium, powerful option that bridges the gap between regular iPads and the top-end iPad Pro collection.

Design

The design is usually a key differentiator between these two tablets, with the word ‘Air’ representing a sleeker and lighter design. The latest iPad Air is 6.1mm thick and 462g, while the iPad (10th Gen) is chunkier by 0.9mm and heavier by 15 grams.

There used to be a larger difference between the two iPad ranges, but the arrival of the iPad 10 has closed the gap, and therefore complicated things.

Up until the iPad 10, the design of the tablet had changed very little. Though it got a little flatter and bigger in recent years, all iPads until the iPad 9 are quite reminiscent of the original iPad with thick bezels and a now-ageing Home button.

It does have a largely premium build with an aluminium rear, but its budget nature is notable in a few ways, lacking a laminated display that makes taps on the display’s tablet feel more hollow than the laminated iPad Air display. It’s also more limited in terms of accessory support, lacking the smart connectors present on most other recent models of iPad.

However, the latest generation of iPad confuses things somewhat. The 10th-gen tablet sports a complete redesign that brings it in line with the likes of the iPad Air and iPad Mini with slimmer bezels, an angular body and the introduction of Touch ID within the side-mounted power button.

That said, while the recent iPad 10 looks pretty similar to its iPad Air brethren, the majority of the entry-level iPad collection doesn’t, and that’s worth bearing in mind if the design is important to you.

The iPad Air, on the other hand, looks and feels more modern and premium with an angular design reminiscent of the iPad Pro and recent models of iPhone. It ditches the Home button completely to expand screen space with much smaller bezels than the entry-level tablet, sports smart connector support for advanced accessory use and, as the name suggests, it’s pretty damn lightweight too.

Performance

With the Apple iPad framed as the entry-level option in Apple’s tablet range, it shouldn’t come as much surprise to find out that the iPad Air is generally the more powerful of the two with the inclusion of newer chipsets.

The Apple iPad is very much an entry-level tablet in terms of processing power. Though the exact chipset depends on the generation of iPad you opt for, generally speaking, it’s usually a year or two behind what you’ll find on more premium models of iPad.

Take the iPad 10 as an example; it sports the same A14 Bionic as the previous-gen iPad Air 4 and iPhone 12, both released two years before the iPad. That means that, while still powerful enough to be used on a flagship phone, it’s not the best processing power available right now.

That’s a stark difference to the iPad Air, which since its renaissance in 2020, has seen it act as a bridge between Apple’s standard and Pro tablet lines, sauntering between casual and pro device.

That said, the processing power of the iPad Air is usually equal to – or greater than – what’s available on the equivalent flagship iPhone of the time. That means that the iPad Air 4 shared the same A14 Bionic chipset as the iPhone 12, both of which appeared in September 2020.

However, the 2022 iPad Air took it even further with the inclusion of the Apple M1 chipset – the same as that on Apple’s laptop and desktop range, as well as previous iterations of Apple’s top-end iPad Pro. That’s a significantly more powerful chip compared to the A14 Bionic inside the vanilla iPad.

That trend continues with the latest iPad Air, sporting the same M2 chipset as the 2022 iPad Pro range, making it the second most powerful iPad in Apple’s current collection.

More broadly speaking, the iPad Air range is more capable than the entry-level iPad range, though if you’re opting for a fairly recent iPad, you’re unlikely to notice much of a difference in day-to-day tasks. Where the iPad Air will shine, however, is with more processor-hungry apps like LumaFusion Pro and Procreate and console-level games.

Accessory support

As with processing power, the iPad Air has been seen as a bridge between the regular iPads and the iPad Pro, and accessory support reflects this.

Rather than supporting the older first-gen Apple Pencil and basic folio keyboard, the past few generations of iPad Air boast support for the second-gen Apple Pencil and premium Magic Keyboard, while the latest has made the jump to the Apple Pencil Pro and second-gen Magic Keyboard. This makes them a tempting option for those who want a tablet for both work and play without forking out for an iPad Pro.

The entry-level iPad, on the other hand, has traditionally been more limited in terms of accessory support. This means only being able to use the first-gen Apple Pencil and more basic Bluetooth keyboard folios. They’d still get the job done on a budget, but it wasn’t the ideal experience.

However, as with other elements, the iPad 10 confuses this somewhat. The latest iPad offers support for the second-gen Apple Pencil and even gets its own dedicated Magic Keyboard, making the gap in differences in accessories much smaller than before.

Verdict

The standard iPad is the more affordable option, with the iPad Air occupying the mid-range zone in Apple’s tablet family. However, with the latest iPad 10 seeing a design refresh, there isn’t much separating the two tablets these days.

The most noticeable difference can be found in the performance department. The iPad Air is generally far more powerful than the normal iPad, and that’s especially true of the latest generation and its M2 chipset. But you’ll likely only notice that performance difference if you engage in heavy-duty tasks such as video editing – the iPad 10 is perfectly fast enough for day-to-day jobs.

Elsewhere the iPad Air boasts an advantage with the addition of a fully laminated display, support for the second-generation Apple Pencil (and, more recently, the Apple Pencil Pro), and a marginally slender design. If you think those features are worth paying the extra cash for, then the iPad Air is your go-to tablet. Otherwise, the standard iPad is a fantastic alternative that will save you a decent amount of money.

You might like…

The post Apple iPad vs iPad Air: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Air vs MacBook Air: Which is better for you?

Jessica Gorringe — Tue, 14 May 2024 10:09:04 +0000

The first generation of iPad Air launched in November 2013 and has continued to be part of Apple’s more premium tablet offering (though not as premium as the iPad Pro.) In comparison, the MacBook Air series first launched back in 2008 and has come a long way since.

Aside from sharing a similar name, are the iPad Air and MacBook Air really similar devices? As the iPad Air is a tablet and the MacBook Air is a laptop, is one better than the other?

We’ve put together this comparison guide, highlighting the differences between the iPad Air range and the MacBook Air range, so you can decide which one is better suited for you and your needs.

This guide will be comparing the iPad Air and MacBook Air ranges as a whole, rather than solely focusing on specific models.

Pricing and availability

Direct from the Apple website, the cheapest available MacBook Air is the 13-inch M2 model which starts at £999/$999 and the most expensive is the 15-inch M3 model which starts at £1699/$1699.

Similarly, the cheapest iPad Air that’s available on the Apple website is the latest 11-inch M2 model for £599/$599 and the most expensive is the 13-inch for £799/$799. At the time of writing the iPad Air M1, which only launched in 2022, is not available directly through Apple.

It’s also worth considering the price of the Magic Keyboard accessory, which is required to use the iPad Air as a makeshift laptop. This Magic Keyboard has a starting price of £299/$299, which means you’d need to pay a total of at least £898/$898 in order to buy the iPad Air with the keyboard accessory bundled in.

Design

In its simplest form, the biggest difference between the iPad Air and MacBook Air is that the former is a touchscreen tablet and the latter is a laptop. However the iPad Air has always been compatible with either a generic Bluetooth or Apple’s own Magic Keyboard, which means you can create your own makeshift touchscreen laptop if that’s what you’d prefer.

The MacBook Air has usually had larger options to the iPad Air, varying from 11-inches up to 15-inches, whereas the iPad Air has ranged from 10-inches and only recently reached to 13-inches with the new iPad Air 6.

While both the MacBook Air and iPad Air have a front-facing camera, and have for the last decade or so, the iPad Air has previously favoured a portrait-positioned camera rather than the landscape-positioned camera that’s found on the MacBook Air. However, the recent launch of the iPad Air 6 saw Apple switch to a landscape camera for the first time in an iPad Air model.

Screen

Naturally as a tablet, the iPad Air has always been a touchscreen device and doesn’t need a trackpad or external mouse. Even so, the iPad Air is compatible with Apple Pencil, which was introduced alongside the iPad Air 3rd Generation to make using the touchscreen easier, especially if you’re a digital designer or just enjoy doodling and hand writing notes.

In comparison, the MacBook has never had a touchscreen display and always included a trackpad on the device.

Both iPad Air and MacBook Air have a Liquid Retina display and are equipped with True Tone, an Apple display technology designed to make images appear more natural in different lighting situations.

Performance

Since 2020, all new MacBook Air models have run on one of Apple’s desktop-level M-series chips. Starting with M1 and going up to M3, the MacBook Air has promised speedy performance and a long-lasting battery life.

Impressively, the two most recent iPad Air offerings have also run on Apple’s desktop level M chip, with the iPad Air 5 running on the M1 and the newest iPad Air 6 running on the M2. This should give the latest devices from each range a similar performance, although older iPad Air models used to run on the A-series chip instead, which offer a performance more equivalent to an iPhone than a MacBook.

The two devices also run on different operating systems, iPadOS and macOS, with the former having more in common with iOS which the iPhone runs on. While Macs are able to run iPadOS apps, iPads aren’t able to run macOS apps.

Battery life

While the iPad Air can compete with the MacBook Air in terms of speed, it’s not quite the case for battery life. In our testing of the iPad Air (2022), the tablet lasted around 10 hours of video streaming. For comparison, the MacBook Air M3 lasted around 18 hours of video playback, offering far better stamina.

These results will of course differ for different products in each range, but expect the MacBook Air to still offer better battery life than an iPad Air since its larger size is able to accommodate a bigger battery.

In terms of charging, the iPad Air made the switch from a 30-pin connector to USB-C, skipping the Lightning connection entirely. In comparison, the latest MacBook Air laptops now use Apple’s own MagSafe technology.

You might like…

The post iPad Air vs MacBook Air: Which is better for you? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Huawei MatePad 11.5S PaperMatte vs Huawei MatePad 11.5 PaperMatte: Which tablet is better?

Jessica Gorringe — Fri, 10 May 2024 15:43:43 +0000

Huawei has recently launched its newest tablet, the MatePad 11.5S PaperMatte.

Although we haven’t given our final verdict of the 11.5S PaperMatte yet we have reviewed its predecessor, the Huawei MatePad 11.5 PaperMatte. With this in mind, we’ve compared the specs of the two tablets so you can determine which one is better suited for you.

Both lack Google services

Due to US sanctions, all Huawei devices lack the Google Play Store and access to any Android apps that rely on Google services to operate. This includes all Google apps (Gmail, YouTube, Google Maps and more) and even third-party apps like Uber Eats that use Google Maps tech to run.

Even so, there are ways you can access Google apps but they require extra effort by using workarounds like GBox and the MicroG Project. Whether this is worth the hassle is up to you but we’d suggest that if you’re just looking for an everyday tablet then the Huawei MatePad tablets may not be the best for you.

However, if you’re a digital artist, the lack of Google services could be worth overlooking thanks to the PaperMatte screen tech.

The Huawei MatePad 11.5S PaperMatte has an OLED display

The MatePad 11.5S PaperMatte features an OLED display with, as the name suggests, a PaperMatte coating that Huawei promises up to 98% reduced reflections and has already been hailed as the “star of the show” in our reviewer’s early verdict.

He continues to praise the matte display as it “feels velvety smooth on your fingertips” and the third-gen M Pencil support offers the “most natural feeling stylus experience”.

The MatePad 11.5 PaperMatte tablet, in comparison, features an LCD display with the same PaperMatte coating. Its surface glass features “nano-level anti-glare etching technology” that reduces eye staring and glare. Our reviewer found there was a “noticeable difference in the texture of the glass, and it is easier on the eyes than some displays.”

The Huawei MatePad 11.5S PaperMatte has a larger battery capacity

With a massive battery capacity of 8800mAh, the MatePad 11.5S PaperMatte promises to be a significant upgrade over the MatePad 11.5 which has a 7700mAh capacity. While we are still testing the longevity of the 11.5S, our reviewer’s early verdict is that it’s a “promising first sign.”

In their review of the MatePad 11.5 PaperMatte, our reviewer was able to drain the tablet to “50% with around 5 hours of use” and concluded that although 7700mAh isn’t the biggest capacity “it should be enough to provide acceptable battery life”.

The Huawei MatePad 11.5S PaperMatte is cheaper

Perhaps surprisingly as it’s a newer model, the Huawei MatePad 11.5S currently has a cheaper RRP than the MatePad 11.5, starting at £349 / €399. The latter starts at £399 / €499 but it can often be found cheaper at third-party retailers.

You might like…

The post Huawei MatePad 11.5S PaperMatte vs Huawei MatePad 11.5 PaperMatte: Which tablet is better? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Google Pixel 8a vs Nothing Phone (2): Which is better value?

Max Parker — Fri, 10 May 2024 08:00:00 +0000

The mid-range Android smartphone market is full of excellent devices, two of the most notable being the Google Pixel 8a and Nothing Phone (2).

These two phones are currently available for similar prices, with the Google Pixel 8a starting at £499/$499 and the Nothing Phone (2) seeing big reductions from its initial £629/$699 price. It is now available for $549/£519 direct from the brand, and often cheaper elsewhere.

So, while the pricing might be similar these two phones go in very different directions with different focuses and objectives. Let’s compare, and see which is right for you.

The Nothing Phone (2) is the larger phone

These two phones are very different sizes – one is smaller and more pocketable, while the other is larger and a better choice for content or games.

It’s the Nothing Phone (2) that has the bigger screen, and larger overall footprint as a result. The screen is 6.7 inches, and the device weighs 201g – not the heftiest phone around, but hardly what we’d consider light.

On the other hand, the Pixel 8a has a much smaller 6.1-inch display and a lower weight of 190g.

Nothing Phone (2) – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Both have 120Hz displays

One of the notable upgrades for the Pixel 8a is the switch to a 120Hz display, a feature found on the Nothing Phone (2). However the Phone (2) has a higher-end LTPO panel, allowing for more granular changes in the display.

Both use OLED panels, with high brightness levels and HDR support.

Nothing goes big on specs, but the Pixel 8s could have the camera to beat

When it comes to specs, the Nothing Phone (2) has more going for it. RAM options go up to 12GB – as opposed to 8GB on the Pixel 8a – and storage maxes out at 512GB, double the maximum 256GB on the Pixel.

There’s also support for the Snapdragon Sound protocol and dual SIM slots – neither of which are present on the Pixel 8a.

Pixel 8a

Nothing has more battery features than Google’s entry. Not only is the battery bigger at 4700mAh, but it has faster charging too. Nothing supports 45w charging, a lot snappier than the 18w Pixel. Neither comes with a charger, though.

In terms of cameras, both of these phones have a dual sensor array on the back – comprising a standard wide and ultra wide – and a single camera on the front. The two 50MP sensors on the rear of the Nothing Phone (2) might win out in pure numbers, but if the Pixel 8a continues Google’s impressive camera run it should be the one to choose for photography.

The Pixel 8a has some extras you won’t find on the Phone (2)

While the Nothing Phone (2) might have more power, the Tensor G3 inside the Pixel 8a enables numerous AI skills. These include a fantastic Recorder app that can transcribe conversations, various camera editing skills that use GenAI to completely alter images and even an AI that can answer calls for you.

The Pixel 8a also has a slightly better IP rating, packing an IP67 rating rather than a splashproof IP54.

Google has also promised seven years of software updates, far more than Nothing.

The Nothing Phone (2) has a very unique design – even if it won’t appeal to all

The Pixel 8a has a nice, simple design that follows the blueprint set out by the series. There’s a visor covering the cameras on the back, nice colour choices including a bright Aloe and the use of recycled materials.

However, it’s the Nothing Phone (2) that really stands out. On the back of the phone is the Glyph system of lights that can showcase incoming calls, texts and even show how charged the phone is.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

These lights shine through the phone’s transparent back, giving it a real retro feel. We think it looks great, and stands out.

You might like…

The post Google Pixel 8a vs Nothing Phone (2): Which is better value? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Apple iPad 10th gen vs iPad 9th gen: Which tablet should you buy?

Jessica Gorringe — Thu, 09 May 2024 16:45:00 +0000

After the recent launch of the new iPad Air M2 and iPad Pro M4, you might be thinking now’s the time to invest in a more budget-friendly option.

We’ve compared the specs and our reviews of the iPad 10 (2022) to its predecessor, the iPad 9 (2021) so you can decide which entry-level iPad is right for you.

Pricing and availability

Available as Apple’s most budget-friendly iPad option, the iPad 10 currently has an RRP of £349/$349.

Apple has quietly removed the iPad 9 from its shelves, although at the time of writing it is still readily available in some retailers for around £299/$299.

Design

The iPad 10th Gen is bigger than the iPad 9, measuring 10.9-inches whereas the latter is 10.2-inches. Although negligible, this is worth considering if you know you’ll be travelling around with your iPad in tow.

Both iPads have a 12MP front-facing camera that’s fitted with Apple’s Centre Stage, a technology that uses machine learning to automatically pan the camera to keep you and others centred in the frame. However, the iPad 9’s front camera is portrait whereas the iPad 10’s is landscape, which is actually the same as the newly launched iPad Air and iPad Pro.

Now slightly outdated, especially for iPads, the iPad 9 has a Lightning connector but the iPad 10 has the USB-C connector. If you have an iPhone 14 Pro Max or older then this may not necessarily be an issue, but if you have made the swap to USB-C then this will feel like a step backwards.

Speaking of outdated, the iPad 10 has a much slimmer bezel and no Home button, which makes the iPad 9 look quite dated in comparison, as it sports much larger bezels and a Home button.

The iPad 10 is available in much brighter colours than the iPad 9, with a choice of Blue, Yellow, Pink or a more muted Silver. The iPad 9 is only available in either Silver or Space Grey.

Screen

Both iPads also have Apple’s trademarked Retina displays, however the iPad 10 screen is Liquid Retina. This means the iPad 10’s display is built upon LCD technology which has a higher pixel-density.

Even so, while the iPad 10 does boast a higher screen resolution than the iPad 9, it definitely isn’t the best screen found on an iPad with the iPad Pro moving onto OLED. For a budget option though, it is more than acceptable.

Performance

Unlike the newer and higher-end iPads, both the iPad 10 and iPad 9 run on Apple’s A chips rather than the desktop-level M chip. The iPad 10 runs on the A14 Bionic Chip, which is also found in the iPhone 12 series, and the iPad 9 runs on the A13 Bionic Chip, found in the iPhone 11 series.

Neither chip is Apple’s most up to date offering however, as the Apple A17 Pro is now available inside the iPhone 15 Pro. Although we found the iPad 9 to “perform admirably” with the 2019 chip “still seriously snappy and more than adequate,” we found the iPad 10 “ticks all the boxes when it comes to performance” with “obvious upgrades if you’re coming from an iPad 9 or iPad 8.”

The iPad 9 also falls short with connectivity, as there’s no Wi-Fi 6 and if you do want a cellular model, you’ll only get 4G networks as there’s no 5G support.

Battery

Apart from the more convenient USB-C port on the iPad 10 and the Lightning port on the iPad 9, the battery and charging life of both iPads remains virtually unchanged with Apple claiming a 10-hour battery life for both models.

We found in our tests that after a typical day the iPad 10 was left with over 50% battery left and the iPad 9 needing to be charged “a couple of times a week.”

Accessories

The iPad 10 is compatible with more iPad accessories, including Apple Pencil First Generation and USB-C and Magic Keyboard Folio.

Meanwhile, the iPad 9 does support Apple Pencil First Generation, but it isn’t compatible with Magic Keyboard, supporting the Smart Keyboard instead.

Verdict

While the iPad 10 isn’t exactly perfect, there are still some clear improvements over its predecessor here, most notably in terms of its design and performance. We’d have appreciated further improvements to the screen, but it remains good enough for watching videos or gaming, and the battery life remains excellent.

If you’re on a tight budget then the iPad 9 still offers plenty of great value and should not be dismissed, but if you have a little more cash to splash then the iPad 10 will be worth it.

You might like…

The post Apple iPad 10th gen vs iPad 9th gen: Which tablet should you buy? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad vs iPad Pro: What's the difference between Apple's tablet ranges?

Ryan Jones — Thu, 09 May 2024 12:05:00 +0000

Apple offers a wide range of iPad tablets, each with their own key strengths and weaknesses. While the likes of the iPad and iPad Pro may look similar on the outside, there are actually so many differences that they serve completely different audiences.

We’ve created this comparison guide to explain how the iPad and iPad Pro ranges differ, and which is best suited for your needs and requirements. Note that this guide will be judging the tablet ranges as a whole rather than focusing solely on specific models, although we will put more focus on the latest editions currently for sale on Apple’s store.

For a quick summary, the standard iPad is the most affordable tablet in Apple’s range, and so is designed for the average consumer who just wants to browse the web, stream video and play the odd game. It features the same grade chip as what you’d find in an iPhone, so expect more smartphone performance than laptop.

Meanwhile, the iPad Pro is significantly more expensive, but for good reason. It has a more luxurious design and screen, but most importantly, it has a laptop-grade performance that could even challenge the MacBook Pro. This means that this laptop is best suited to pro-grade creation such as photo/video editing.

Keep reading on for a more detailed breakdown of the two tablets, as we highlight the main differences and what kind of benefits you’ll gain from going for the more expensive option.

Price

There’s a significant gulf in price between these two laptops, to such an extent that they serve completely different audiences.

The iPad is Apple’s entry-level tablet and has a price tag to match. The iPad 10 is priced at just £349/$349 following a recent price cut. Apple now longer sells the preceding iPad 9

The iPad Pro range is very much a premium option in the tablet world, with the most recent 11-inch iPad Pro starting at £999/$999 while the 13-inch model starts at £1299/$299. It has more advanced features, better accessory support and a faster performance to justify the price, but it’s still an expensive tablet no matter how you frame it.

The Apple Pencil (USB-C) is now almost half the price of the new Apple Pencil Pro

Whether you’re considering investing in one of the upcoming new iPads or just want to upgrade your current iPad experience, you can get an Apple Pencil (USB-C) for just £69 on Amazon.

Amazon
Was £79
Now £69

View Deal

Design and screen

Though the iPad and iPad Pro once boasted the same design, the two began to diverge with the release of the fourth-generation iPad Pro range. With it came a complete redesign of the chassis, going from rounded edges to something more angular and industrial, reminiscent of Apple’s iPhone 5 design.

It also introduced enhanced support for accessories with new magnets and a smart connector on the rear of the iPad, but that’s something we discuss in more detail a little later on.

It’s actually a design philosophy that trickled down to most other Apple products, from the iPhone to the iPad Air, iPad mini and even the latest iPad 10, but for the most part, the entry-level iPad looked nearly identical up to the release of the iPad 9.

Sure, it has had tweaks to make it thinner and lighter, but it broadly looks the same. Admittedly, It looks a little dated in 2024, but it won’t impact the core iPad experience too much.

It’s not just the design either; the iPad range features a smaller display than the iPad Pro range. The iPad measured in at 9.7 inches initially, though it increased to 10.2 inches with the iPad 7, and the latest iPad 10 pushes that even further up to 10.8 inches. It’s a decent size, allowing you to make the most of a large display while still being portable enough to throw into a rucksack.

iPad Pro – Credit: Apple

The iPad Pro range, on the other hand, has always had larger screens. The display’s actual dimensions depend on the generation of iPad Pro – it started off with a combination of 9.7 inches and 12.9 inches, though the latest model now offers 11-inch and and 13-inch sizes.

While the iPad Pro may be larger than the entry-level iPad, it’s actually thinner believe it or not. The new 11-inch iPad Pro is just 5.3mm thick, compared to the 7mm iPad. This also makes the Pro the lighter option, hitting the scales at just 444g, compared to the 477g weight of the iPad.

The iPad Pro range also boasts Apple’s ProMotion tech, which delivers a super smooth 120Hz refresh rate – a feature exclusive to the iPad Pro in the iPad collection. The latest model of iPad Pro has also made the jump to a new technology that Apples calls Tandem OLED, which effectively stacks multiple OLED panels together in order to achieve a stunning 1000-nit brightness for SDR content, and up to 1600 nits with HDR activated. With the standard iPad 10 only capable of 500 nits, this means the Pro is twice as bright, making it easier to view in harsh sunlight.

Importantly for creators, the iPad Pro promises superior colour accuracy to the standard iPad, to such an extent that it’s ideal for professional creators who crave perfection.

Performance

The performance is the true differentiator between these two tablets.

The entry-level iPad range offers entry-level performance in the form of older iPhone chipsets. Though specifics depend on the iPad in question, as a rule of thumb, the iPad tends to feature the same chipset as a two- or three-generation-old iPhone.

2021’s iPad 9 sports the same A13 Bionic as 2019’s iPhone 11, for example, while the latest iPad 10 sports the same A14 Bionic as the iPhone 12 range.

That makes no difference when compared to the iPad Pro, however. As Apple’s pro-level tablet focused on creative professionals, it should be no surprise that the iPad Pro boasts the best performance possible.

In earlier iPads, that would come in the form of modified iPhone chipsets with additional CPU and GPU cores to get better performance than even flagship iPhones, though that trend changed with the introduction of Apple’s M-series silicon on the 2021 iPad Pro.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The M1 and M2 chipsets used in the newer models of iPad Pro are the same as those used in Apple’s iMac, MacBook Air and MacBook Pro lines, offering a serious boost to performance that allows them to outcompete some fully-fledged laptops.

The latest iPad Pro is now powered by the Apple M4 chip, making the tablet even faster than the current MacBook Air, and around the same level as a base MacBook Pro. Not only does it pack a lot of processing power, but also powerful graphics for gaming and content creation, as well as a super-speedy AI performance to future-proof it for years to come.

Though there may be some parity in performance between the oldest iPad Pros and the newest iPad, generally speaking, the iPad Pro will always be much more powerful than any other iPad in Apple’s collection.

Accessories

Accessory support is another key area of differentiation between the iPad and iPad Pro ranges, though the iPad 10’s halfway-house support has muddied the waters.

Let’s start with the iPad Pro range; ever since the release of 2020’s iPad Pro range, the pro-level tablets have offered support for the Magic Keyboard. It’s a game-changing accessory that essentially turns the tablet into a laptop with a large keyboard, a trackpad and an adjustable hinge.

It’s very much a premium accessory, but it’s a worthy purchase if you’re looking for a laptop replacement. The latest version of the Magic Keyboard also has a larger glass trackpad, a new function row and USB-C passthrough, making it feel just like a laptop keyboard.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

It also boasts support for the newer second-gen Apple Pencil, which, in addition to better ergonomics, snaps onto the side of the iPad Pro to charge. This is a much more convenient way to charge compared to the first-gen stylus, which had to be plugged directly into the iPad’s Lightning port.

The new Apple Pencil Pro offers even more advanced features for iPad Pro, including features like squeeze, barrel roll and haptic feedback.

Apple Pencil Pro – Credit: Apple

The entry-level iPad range, on the other hand, supports the first-gen Apple Pencil – it has done so since the iPad 6 – and Apple offers a keyboard folio case that makes text entry much easier. The iPad 10 takes the typing experience up a notch with support for the Magic Keyboard (albeit not the latest one).

It, however, doesn’t offer the same support for the second-gen Apple Pencil as the iPad Pro. Instead, it supports the first-gen Pencil like the rest of the iPad collection, though unlike its predecessors with a Lightning port, you’ll need a Lightning-to-USB-C adapter to charge the Apple Pencil on the iPad 10.

You might like…

The post iPad vs iPad Pro: What's the difference between Apple's tablet ranges? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Google Pixel 8a vs Samsung Galaxy S23 FE: Which phone wins?

Hannah Davies — Wed, 08 May 2024 16:37:12 +0000

Google recently announced its latest Pixel phone to join the Pixel 8 family and the follow-up to the Pixel 7a, the Google Pixel 8a.

Here’s how the mid-range phone compares to Samsung’s similarly priced Galaxy S23 FE.

The Google Pixel 8a has a brighter screen

The Samsung Galaxy S23 FE might have a larger 6.4-inch screen, but the 6.1-inch Google Pixel 8a has a brighter display with a brightness of up to 1400 nits with HDR and a peak brightness of 2000 nits. The Galaxy S23 FE, meanwhile, has a peak brightness of up to 1450 nits.

The Pixel 8a screen is also an always-on display, meaning it supports Google’s At A Glance and Now Playing features so you can see key information like the time, live travel updates and weather alerts without unlocking the phone.

Pixel 8a

The Samsung Galaxy S23 FE includes a telephoto camera

The Samsung Galaxy S23 FE features three cameras, a 50-megapixel main camera, a 12-megapixel ultra-wide angle camera and an 8-megapixel telephoto camera with 3x optical zoom.

The Google Pixel 8a, meanwhile, includes two cameras, a 64-megapixel main camera and a 13-megapixel ultra-wide angle camera.

Both phones have their benefits when it comes to mobile photography, with Samsung and Google widely regarded as forerunners in this regard. The Pixel 8a has Google’s brilliant camera software, while the Galaxy S23 FE can get closer to its subject with the telephoto lens.

The Galaxy S23 FE also supports 8K video recording at up to 24fps, while the Pixel 8a tops out at 4K/60fps.

The Google Pixel 8a is powered by Google’s own chipset

The Google Pixel 8a is powered by the same Google Tensor G3 chip found in the Pixel 8. This is paired with 8GB of RAM and 128/256GB of storage.

The Samsung Galaxy S23 FE, meanwhile, runs on the Snapdragon 8 Gen 1 chip in the US or the Exynos 2200 in the UK. The former is Qualcomm’s flagship chipset from 2021 and comes paired with 8GB of memory and 128GB of storage.

All of that said, you’ll have to wait for our review of the Pixel 8a to learn how these two phones compare when it comes to their performance.

Samsung Galaxy S23 FE

The Samsung Galaxy S23 FE supports faster charging

Battery is another area we plan to test in our full review.

At a glance, the Google Pixel 8a has a 4492 mAh battery with a 24+ hour battery life or up to 72 hours with the Extreme Battery feature. The phone also supports fast charging up to 18W and wireless charging with the Qi standard.

The Samsung Galaxy S23 FE packs a similarly sized 4500 mAh battery which Samsung claims offers up to 20 hours of internet usage, up to 22 hours of video playback, up to 69 hours of audio playback, and up to 39 hours of talk time. The S23 also supports 25W wired charging and 15W wireless charging with support for reverse wireless charging too.

You might like…

The post Google Pixel 8a vs Samsung Galaxy S23 FE: Which phone wins? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Air 6 vs Google Pixel Tablet: Apple or Android?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 08 May 2024 16:20:24 +0000

The newly launched iPad Air 6 promises to be “more powerful and versatile than ever” with a range of features and upgrades over its predecessor. So how does it compare with Google’s only offering in this category, the Pixel Tablet?

Although the Pixel Tablet launched back in 2023 to mixed reviews and criticism, it’s still a capable Android tablet for communal home use.

We’ve compared the specs of the new iPad Air 6 to the Google Pixel Tablet and highlighted their key differences below.

The iPad Air 6 runs on iPadOS 17

The biggest difference between the iPad and Pixel Tablet comes from their operating system. The iPad Air 6 is part of the Apple ecosystem and runs on iPadOS 17 with access to the App Store. The Pixel tablet, unsurprisingly, has access to the Google Play Store and runs on Android 14.

If you’re already fully-submerged in either the Apple or Android ecosystem, then this alone could sway your decision over which one to get.

The iPad Air 6 runs on Apple’s M2 chip

Similar to the above, the iPad Air 6 and Pixel Tablet run on totally different chips. While the iPad Air 6 runs on the desktop-level M2 which, until somewhat recently, was Apple’s most up to date chip offering and found in certain Macs.

Running on M2, the new iPad Air promises to be 50% faster than its predecessor which ran on Apple’s M1 chip. It also promises to be 3x faster than the A14 Bionic Chip, which can be found in both the iPad (10th Generation) and the iPhone 12.

In comparison, the Google Pixel Tablet doesn’t run on a desktop-level chip and instead runs on Google’s Tensor G2, which is also found in the Google Pixel 7 smartphone range and the Google Pixel Fold.

home screen on pixel tablet

The Pixel Tablet has a compatible speaker dock

Until recently every Pixel Tablet included the speaker dock but you can now opt to buy the tablet on its own. Even so, the speaker dock is a good addition to the Pixel Tablet as it not only keeps the tablet powered 24/7 but it also works as a smart home hub and, as the name suggests, a speaker.

While the iPad Air 6 doesn’t include any accessories of the sort in the box, there are dedicated add-ons. There’s Apple’s own Magic Keyboard which features a built-in trackpad, a backlit keyboard and a floating design, or the Apple Pencil Pro for precise hand-written notes and drawings.

The iPad Air 6 is available in two sizes

While the Pixel Tablet is only available in an 11-inch model, the iPad Air 6 is available in two sizes. Matching the Google Pixel Tablet, the smallest iPad Air 6 is 11-inches with the larger model being 13-inches, offering 30% more screen real estate.

The Google Pixel tablet is cheaper

When we first reviewed the Google Pixel Tablet, our tester concluded that it was perhaps too expensive in the UK, with an RRP of £599 (which did include the speaker dock.) Almost a year on from its initial launch, it’s now cheaper with prices starting from £399 for the tablet only and £499 for the tablet and docking station bundle.

The iPad Air has a starting price of £599 for the 11-inch model and £799 for the 13-inch version. This does include a USB-C to USB-C cable in the box but no extra accessories, such as the Magic Keyboard and Apple Pencil.

The iPad Air 6 also has more storage options than the Google Pixel Tablet, offering a choice of 128GB, 256GB, 512GB or even a massive 1TB, whereas the Pixel Tablet only offers 128GB or 256GB.

You might like…

The post iPad Air 6 vs Google Pixel Tablet: Apple or Android? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Pro (2024) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9: What's the difference?

Hannah Davies — Wed, 08 May 2024 11:51:53 +0000

Apple recently announced two new iPad models, the iPad Pro (2024) and the iPad Air 6.

The iPad Pro (2024) boasts a slimmer design, a brighter display, and a more powerful processor than its predecessors. We’ve already compared the tablet to the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra, but how does it stand up to the standard Galaxy Tab S9?

Keep reading to learn more about how these two tablets compare.

The iPad Pro (2024) is slimmer

When it comes to design, who wins will depend on your priorities.

If you want a thin, lightweight tablet, the iPad Pro (2024) is a clear winner, with a depth of 5.3mm or 5.1mm and a weight of 0.98 lbs (~445g) or 1.28 lbs (~581g) depending on if you opt for the 11-inch model or the 13-inch version.

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9, comparatively, is 11 inches in size and 5.9mm thick. The tablet weighs 500g, making it heavier for its size but lighter than the larger 13-inch iPad Pro.

When it comes to colours, both tablets are available in two neutral shades. The iPad Pro comes in Silver and Space Black, while the Galaxy Tab S9 is available in Graphite or Beige.

The iPad Pro (2024) boasts a brighter display

Another major upgrade on the iPad Pro (2024) is the tablet’s brighter display.

Apple announced the Ultra Retina XDR, which uses the company’s new Tandem OLED display technology to combine the lights of two OLED panels and achieve a brighter screen. The result is a tablet that can reach 1000 nits of brightness when displaying SDR and HDR content, or 1600 nits of peak brightness with HDR.

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 features a Dynamic AMOLED 2X display with a brightness of 420 nits and a peak brightness of 750 nits.

iPad Pro (2024)

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 comes with a stylus

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 comes with Samsung’s S Pen stylus in the box. This is a huge bonus for digital artists, note-takers, and really anyone who likes the sound of using a pen to scrawl on their tablet.

The iPad Pro (2024) supports the new Apple Pencil Pro, along with the standard Apple Pencil (USB-C). However, neither stylus comes with the tablet. This means you’ll need to pay an additional $79/£79 to $129/£129 to get your hands on it, depending on the pencil you choose.

The iPad Pro (2024) packs the M4 chipset

The Apple M2-powered iPad Pro (2022) was our one to beat when it comes to performance and Apple has knocked its performance out of the park with the M4-powered iPad Pro (2024).

According to Apple, the tablet has a 50% faster CPU, 4x faster GPU, and improved power efficiency compared to its predecessor.

While we haven’t had the opportunity to test the tablet ourselves just yet, we have tested the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 and the iPad Pro (2024)’s predecessor, the iPad Pro (2022).

We found the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy-powered Galaxy Tab S9 to be incredibly powerful, with the Tab S9 series beating out any of its Android competitors in terms of performance. However, the Tab S9 couldn’t compete with the iPad Pro (2022).

Samsung Galaxy Tab S9

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 is much cheaper

A major benefit to picking up the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 over the iPad Pro (2024) is its price.

The Galaxy Tab S9 starts at $699/£799 for 128GB of storage and Wi-Fi-only, while the iPad Pro (2024) begins at $999/£999 for 256GB and Wi-Fi-only. Increasing the storage on the Galaxy Tab S9 to a matching 256GB will cost you $799/£899.

That’s a $200/£100 to $300/£200 saving (plus a free stylus) when you opt for the Galaxy Tab S9 over the iPad Pro.

You might like…

The post iPad Pro (2024) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Air 6 vs iPad 10: Should you upgrade?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 08 May 2024 11:23:18 +0000

Apple recently launched two new iPad options, the iPad Air and iPad Pro, in the first new iPad announcement since October 2022.

We’ve compared the specs of the new iPad Air to the older iPad (10th Generation) and highlighted their key differences and any similarities so you can see which iPad is better suited for you.

The iPad Air 6 runs on the M2 chip

The iPad 10 runs on the A14 Bionic chip, which is also found in the iPhone 12 series. The A14 chip launched back in 2020 and has since been succeeded by the A15, A16 and even the A17 Pro.

In comparison, the iPad Air 6 runs on the desktop-level M2 chip which, until recently, was Apple’s most up to date chip offering and found in Macs. The M2 promises to be 50% faster than even the M1 chip, found in the previous iteration of iPad Air, and actually 3x faster than the A14 Bionic Chip.

Both have landscape front-facing cameras

Although this is a new move for the iPad Air, the iPad 10 has always featured a landscape front-facing 12MP camera. This redesign for the former is “perfect” according to Apple “since it has become the most common orientation for iPad users”.

Both cameras are also fitted with Centre Stage, which uses machine learning to keep everyone centred in the frame.

iPad Air 6 – Credit: Apple

The iPad Air 6 supports Apple Pencil Pro and Magic Keyboard

Launched alongside this new iPad Air and the iPad Pro, the Apple Pencil Pro is the newest addition to the Apple Pencil lineup. The Apple Pencil Pro includes a few updates from the Pencil 2, including a new barrel sensor to let users quickly switch between tools and a hover feature which allows users to visualise the exact orientation of a tool before making a mark.

Although the iPad 10 does support Apple Pencil (USB-C), it won’t support the Apple Pencil Pro and its wireless charging ability.

The iPad Air 6 is also compatible with the Magic Keyboard whereas the iPad 10 is not. However, the iPad 10 is instead compatible with Magic Keyboard Folio, which is a dedicated option for the iPad 10. The two Magic Keyboards are similar, although the Magic Keyboard for iPad Air has a floating design and is designed for the iPad Air and iPad Pro models.

The iPad 10 has brighter colour options

If you want an iPad that stands out then look no further than the iPad 10. While the iPad Air is available in a choice of arguably more sleek options, including Space Grey, Starlight, Purple and Blue, the iPad 10 is available in brighter Yellow, Pink and Blue colours. If you would prefer a more muted iPad 10, then it is also available in Silver.

iPad Air 6 – Credit: Apple

The iPad Air 6 has up to 1TB of storage

A huge improvement for the iPad Air 6 is its varying storage capacity. While the iPad 10 is available in a choice between 64GB and 256GB, the iPad Air comes in a choice of four storage sizes.

Starting at a generous 128GB, you can also opt for either 256GB, 512GB and even a massive 1TB. If you intend on using your iPad for gaming, work or studies, then these larger capacity options are a great new addition.

The iPad 10 is cheaper

Unsurprisingly, the iPad 10 is currently cheaper than the newly launched iPad Air, starting at just £349. In comparison, the iPad Air starts at £599 for the 11-inch model and £799 for the 13-inch model.

You might like…

The post iPad Air 6 vs iPad 10: Should you upgrade? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Air 6 (11in) vs iPad Air 6 (13in): What’s the difference between the two tablets?

Lewis Painter — Wed, 08 May 2024 10:21:12 +0000

Apple has thrown the iPad Air rulebook out of the window with the latest iPad Air 6 – and that’s because, for the first time, it’s available in two screen sizes. But what’s the difference between the two?

While some differences – like the size of the screen – are obvious, there are a few small differences between the two that may sway your buying decision one way or the other. If you’re tempted to pick up the iPad Air 6 but aren’t sure which is best for your needs, carry on reading.

Both have different-sized screens

The most obvious difference between the two iPad Air variants is the screens’ size. The 10.9-inch display of the previous-gen iPad Air has been boosted by 0.1 inches to 11 inches, matching that of the new iPad Pro 11. The completely new variant of iPad Air, on the other hand, has a large 13-inch panel that mirrors that of the new 13-inch iPad Pro – in terms of sheer size, anyway.

Rather refreshingly, that’s essentially the only big difference when it comes to iPad Air screen tech, with both sporting Liquid Retina displays that cap out at 60Hz – though there are a few small differences if you look closely enough.

That includes resolution, with the larger 13-inch iPad Air somewhat obviously boasting a slightly larger 2732 x 2048 resolution than the 11-inch alternative’s 2360 x 1640, though the pixel density is identical at 264ppi.

What is surprising, however, is that the 13-inch iPad Air is also slightly brighter than its smaller sibling, boosting to a maximum of 600nits while the 11-inch variant caps out at 500nits. It’s arguably not going to be that notable in everyday use, but if you plan on using your tablet in bright outdoor conditions, it might be worth opting for the bigger screen.

The 11-inch iPad Air is much lighter

Sporting a screen that’s two inches smaller than that of the 13in iPad Air, it shouldn’t come as much of a surprise to learn that the 11in model is the lighter of the two variants of iPad Air – and by quite a bit too.

That’s because the 13-inch iPad Air weighs in at 617g, making it 38g heavier than the iPad Pro of the same size, while the 11-inch variant weighs in at 462g, making it lighter and thus easier to throw into a rucksack for use on-the-go. In fact, it’s only 1g heavier than the previous-gen iPad Air.

Aside from the size of the screens and other minor differences noted above, the 11-inch and 13-inch versions of the iPad Air both share the same key specs. That means both sport the same M2 chipset with the same storage options from 128GB to 1TB, the same 12MP selfie camera, the same support for Wi-Fi 6E and much more.

It’s a refreshing change to Apple’s previous approach of offering slightly different specs between two variants of the same product. Take the previous-gen iPad Pro range for example; while both sported largely the same specs, the 12.9-inch model had an upgraded mini-LED screen while the 11-inch model used the same LCD panel as previous entries.

It makes things much simpler for consumers, leaving the decision down to something as simple as whether they want a regular or large-screen tablet.

The 11-inch iPad Air is cheaper

With a smaller 11-inch screen than the 13-inch alternative, the 11-inch iPad Air is comfortably the cheaper of the two tablets, starting at £599/$599 while the 13-inch alternative starts at £799/$799. That’s a pretty tempting price for the tablet, especially when you consider the M2-level power on offer.

If you are interested in either model, both variants of the sixth-gen iPad Air are available to pre-order now, with a general release set for 15 May 2024.

You might like…

The post iPad Air 6 (11in) vs iPad Air 6 (13in): What’s the difference between the two tablets? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Air 6 vs iPad Mini 6: Which is better?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 08 May 2024 09:22:10 +0000

Apple has recently announced its newest iPad lineup, which includes the latest iPad Air and iPad Pro. Considering their most recent iPad launch was back in 2022, this is incredibly exciting for Apple and iPad fans.

If you’ve been considering a new iPad but aren’t sure which one to go for, keep reading as we’ve compared the newly launched iPad Air to the iPad Mini and highlighted their key differences so you can decide which iPad is better for you.

The iPad Air 6 runs on Apple’s M2 chip

One of the biggest differences between the two iPads is their chip. While the iPad Mini runs on Apple’s A15 Bionic Chip, which is also found in the iPhone 14, the iPad Air 6 impressively runs on Apple’s M2 chip. This chip was, until recently, found in the most up to date MacBook Air and Pro laptops.

The iPad Air 6 promises to be 50% faster than its most recent predecessor, the iPad Air 5 and 3x faster than the A14 Bionic Chip.

It’s not just speed that gets an upgrade, as the M2 chip is also able to support and deliver powerful AI performance on the iPad Air 6, across all iPadOS supported apps that include advanced AI features.

The iPad Mini has a smaller screen

As the name suggests, the iPad Mini is a smaller iPad, measuring at just 8.3-inches. The iPad Air 6 is actually available in two screen sizes, an 11-inch and a 13-inch, and is the first iPad Air to have this option.

If you prefer a bigger screen then the iPad Air might be a better fit, however if you are looking for a super portable model then the iPad Mini is definitely one for you.

The iPad Air 6 supports Magic Keyboard

The iPad Air works with Apple’s own Magic Keyboard, which includes a floating design, built-in trackpad and, of course, a backlit keyboard. This support is especially useful now the iPad Air 6’s front camera is landscape rather than portrait, and makes video calling much easier.

Even so, the iPad Mini can still support generic Bluetooth keyboards which can be found for much cheaper than the Magic Keyboard. Although you won’t have the benefits of Magic Keyboard support, such as easy setup and a trackpad that expands how users work with iPadOS,if you just want a keyboard to make using your iPad easier then you won’t necessarily miss out.

The iPad Air 6 has a landscape front camera

As we mentioned above, another big change with the iPad Air is its new landscape-positioned front facing camera whereas its predecessors, including the iPad Mini, favoured the front camera in portrait view.

Both the iPad Air 6 and iPad Mini’s front cameras are also fitted with Apple’s Centre Stage technology. Using machine learning, this technology automatically pans the camera to keep you and others centred in the frame, making it perfect for video calls and virtual meetings.

The iPad Mini is cheaper

Perhaps unsurprisingly as it launched back in 2021, the iPad Mini is cheaper than the iPad Air 6 with a starting RRP of £499/$499/€599. In comparison, the iPad Air 6 is more expensive with the 11-inch starting at £599/$599/€649 and the 13-inch starting at £799/$799/€949.

The iPad Air 6 also has more storage options than the iPad Mini, offering a choice of 128GB, 256GB, 512GB or even a massive 1TB, whereas the iPad Mini only offers 64GB or 256GB.

You might like…

The post iPad Air 6 vs iPad Mini 6: Which is better? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Google Pixel 8a vs iPhone 15: iOS or Android?

Max Parker — Tue, 07 May 2024 17:06:12 +0000

Google has just revealed the Pixel 8a, its latest mid-range device to tempt people away from upgrading to the iPhone.

While they run completely different operating systems (we won’t get into the iOS vs Android debate here) these two devices have plenty in common. From yearly updates that’ll keep the phones fresh for ages, pocketable builds and a focus on camera performance.

If you’re happy to choose between Android and iOS these are two excellent picks. Here we will compare some of the big differences and run through some of the similarities too.

A-series vs Tensor

Both of these phones run on chips designed by their manufacturers, and they’re built especially to cater for the needs of the different operating systems. For instance, the Tensor G3 found inside the Pixel 8a focuses less on performance, but more on AI skills and enables Pixel features like Magic Eraser, Translation and so on.

Performance, both for everyday use and gaming, will likely be better on the iPhone 15 as the A16 Bionic chip is very impressive in this area.

Both phones start with 128GB of onboard storage, however while the Pixel 8a only goes up to 256GB the iPhone 15 can be purchased with 512GB of storage. Neither has a microSD card slot.

A fair camera fight

While we haven’t fully reviewed the Pixel 8a yet, judging by the pedigree in the photographic department of the series we’d expect to challenge the best camera phones at its price. The iPhone 15 camera is also very capable in this regard.

Until we’ve properly tested the Pixel 8a, we will stick to the specs. On the back of Google’s device, there’s a 64MP main camera, with an f/1.89 lens plus an ultra wide 13MP camera alongside it. On the front, there’s a 13MP camera for selfies.

4K video is supported up to 60fps and there are a multitude of AI-infused camera features. Best Take, for example, lets you switch up facial expressions if things don’t look right, while Magic Editor lets you change the look of the image through GenAI. You won’t find any of these features on the iPhone 15.

Moving over to the iPhone 15, Apple’s device has a main 48MP main camera with a wide f/1.6 lens and a 12MP ultrawide.

The video support is certainly better than the Pixel, with Dolby Vision HDR recording, 4K at 24fps and 1080p up to 240fps. As a comparison, the Pixel 8a can only record 1080p up to 60fps.

iPhone 15 back

Two distinct designs

These are two good looking phones, with distinct touches and plenty of colour choices. They have matte backs to prevent fingerprint buildup and metal rims for rigidity.

They both take different approaches to the camera bump, though. On the Pixel, the cameras are spread across the back inside a visor, while on the iPhone they’re shunted to the side.

In terms of colour choices, the iPhone’s hues are quite subdued. It’s available in black, blue, green, yellow and pink. The Pixel 8a also comes in black, plus white, a bright blue called Bay and a vivid green called Aloe.

Both tick plenty of feature boxes

Both the Pixel 8a and the iPhone 15 have handy extras not seen on every phone. These include wireless charging, an IP68 rating (iPhone) or an IP67 rating (Pixel) for protection against water and dust plus some form of fast charging.

The Pixel 8a has a fingerprint sensor built into the display for biometric unlocking, while the iPhone 15 has Face ID instead.

iPhone 15

120Hz vs 60Hz

There are plenty of similarities between the two displays on these phones, but there are some key differences too.

Both are 6.1 inches, flat (rather than curved) and use the OLED screen tech that we prefer for its punchier colours and inky, deep blacks. The iPhone has a marginally higher resolution, although the difference is minimal. Both support HDR formats and reach levels above 1000 nits of brightness

The big difference between the two panels is the refresh rate. The iPhone 15 is merely a 60Hz panel, whereas the Pixel 8a is 120Hz. A faster screen makes for smoother scrolling and more responsive gaming, and it’s something we’ve wanted Apple to bring to all its non-Pro phones for ages.

How do the prices compare?

The iPhone 15 is the cheapest model in the range, with the 128GB base model starting at £799/$799. However, shop around and sites in the UK like Amazon have it for £699.

The Pixel 8a is cheaper, starting at £499/$499 – again for 128GB of storage.

You might like…

The post Google Pixel 8a vs iPhone 15: iOS or Android? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Apple M4 vs Apple M2: What's the difference?

Ryan Jones — Tue, 07 May 2024 16:27:58 +0000

It was only two years ago when Apple first announced the M2 processor, and yet it is starting to feel a little outdated following the recent launch of the new Apple M4 processor.

But what kind of performance upgrade can you expect from the M4? And are there any other benefits for opting for the newer chip? This is a particularly important question if you’re deciding between the latest iPad Pro and its predecessor.

We’ve created this guide to highlight the key differences between the Apple M4 and Apple M2 processors, so you’ll know exactly what you’re getting by spending extra.

M4 has eight billion extra transistors

One of the biggest indicators for a processor’s performance is the number of transistors squeezed onto the chip. Thanks to the adoption of the new second-generation 3nm architecture, Apple has managed to increase the number of transistors on the M4 processor to a whopping 28 billion.

For comparison, the Apple M2 chip is based on 5nm architecture, and is therefore limited to 20 billion transistors. That’s still plenty enough for a fast performance, but the M4 has an extra eight billion transistors to push performance to new heights.

Credit: Apple

M4 offers 50% more processing power

Apple claims that the M4 chip offers 50% more processing power than the M2 processor, resulting in a noticeably speedier overall performance.

This extra processing power isn’t purely down to the upgraded architecture, but also to an increase in the number of cores. The M4’s CPU is made up of four performance cores and six efficiency cores, totalling up to an overall 10-core count.

In comparison, the Apple M2 has four performance cores and six efficiency cores, and so therefore is restricted to a total CPU core count of eight. The extra cores in the M4 will allow it to better handle multiple workloads, which is particularly important for the likes of video editing.

Hardware-accelerated ray tracing

The Apple M4 chip has a new 10-core GPU, which is apparently 4x faster than the M2. It also flaunts exciting features such as Dynamic Caching and hardware-accelerated ray tracing. The latter feature enables the M4 to make use of highly advanced lighting, shadow and reflection effects in video games. It’s impressive to see the technology make its way to Apple devices, considering it was one of the most exciting features of the PS5 and Xbox Series X.

The older Apple M2’s GPU also has a 10-core design, but it’s lacking cutting-edge features such as hardware-accelerated ray tracing. This means that M2-powered devices won’t be capable of the same photorealistic visuals as those with an M4 chip.

Apple also claims that the M4 is more power efficient than the M2. Apparently, the M4 can deliver the same level of performance as the M2, but at half the power. This should go a long way to extending battery life, which has been one of the biggest selling points of the M processors.

Credit: Apple

M4 offers fantastic AI performance

One of the most exciting elements of the M4 processor is its upgraded AI performance. The 16-core neural engine is now capable of 38 trillion operations per second, making it the most powerful NPU ever seen on a device.

The Apple M2 also features a 16-core neural engine, but it’s only capable of 15.8 trillion operations per second, making it less than half as powerful as the M4.

So why is AI performance so important? Apple says the new AI powers of the M4 chip allow users to isolate a person from their background in a 4K video with just a tap on the iPad Pro’s screen. It’s also able to automatically create musical notation in real time when listening to someone play the piano. The number of AI features and apps are only going to increase in the near future, which will make AI performance even more important going forward.

You might like…

The post Apple M4 vs Apple M2: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Google Pixel 8a vs Pixel 7a: Is it worth the upgrade?

Max Parker — Tue, 07 May 2024 16:13:06 +0000

Google has taken the wraps off the Pixel 8a, its latest mid-range device and the successor to the excellent Pixel 7a.

The Google Pixel 7a was one of the best affordable phones of 2023, offering plenty of features – including wireless charging and an IP rating – for a price that we felt was very good value for money.

A year on and we’ve now got its successor, the Pixel 8a. But what are the big differences? Let’s take a look and see.

A faster, more capable chipset

For the Pixel 8a, Google is using the same Tensor G3 chipset you’ll find in £999 Pixel 8 Pro – considering this is a sub £500/$500 phone, that seems like a very good deal. Using a high-end chip in a cheaper device is nothing new for Google, as it used a similar tactic with the outgoing Pixel 7a. That phone used the Tensor G2 chip, the same silicon found in the Pixel 7 series.

While someone who paid a lot more for the Pixel 8 Pro might be a little annoyed that the same chip is being used in a phone half the price, this is a huge benefit for those picking up the Pixel 8a.

Many of the AI features Google is touting with the Pixel 8a are either enabled or improved by Tensor G3, including support for Gemini Mini. This is currently the cheapest phone to support Gemini Mini, even if it’s not enabled by default.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Two standout new colours

Google has switched up the colour choices for the Pixel 8a, ditching the Sea and Coral options and tweaking the more neutral black and white options.

Now we’ve got Obsidian (black) and Porcelain (white) plus the same Bay hue that was introduced with the Pixel 8 line. This is a very bright, vivid blue. Alo is the new colour, and it’s bright green, far more punchy than the muted Mint Pixel 8.

The back of the Pixel 8a is now matte, to reduce fingerprints, and it has satin sides.

A brighter, faster display

There are numerous upgrades to the screen on the Pixel 8a when compared to the 7a. First off, the refresh rate has been boosted to 120Hz, making it faster than the 90Hz screen used before.

This isn’t a fancy LTPO panel, instead it can switch between 60Hz and 120Hz depending on usage. You can also lock it to 60Hz if you want to be more energy efficient.

Google also said that the display is brighter, up to 40% thanks to the Actua Display used.

Double the storage – with a catch

For the first time, Google is offering both a 128GB storage and a larger 256GB variant. Previously, 128GB was the only choice and as there’s never been expandable storage on the Pixel, it could be tricky for those who wanted to store lots of offline files on the phone.

However, there is a catch. That 256GB option is only available if you plump for the fairly dull Obsidian colourway – not any of the brighter options.

Google Pixel 7a

A lot will come down to the cameras

Google is positioning the Pixel 8a as the best camera phone at its price, and there’s every chance it could achieve that goal.

In terms of specs, the phones seem very similar but of course a lot can change thanks to the Tensor G3’s processing. They both have a 64MP f/1.9 main camera, 13MP ultrawide and 13MP selfies. 4K video up to 60fps is supported.

We’ll have a full look at the cameras when we’ve had time to properly test the Pixel 8a and compare it to the 7a.

There’s been a price rise

In the UK, the Pixel 8a will sell for £499, an increase over the £449 RRP of the Pixel 7a. In the USA it retains the same $499 price as the 7a.

It is worth noting that Google has been selling the Pixel 8 for £569 previously and we’ve seen it drop below £500 thanks to a fantastic deal from EE.

You might like…

The post Google Pixel 8a vs Pixel 7a: Is it worth the upgrade? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Air 6 (11-inch) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9: Which tablet is best?

Lewis Painter — Tue, 07 May 2024 16:06:16 +0000

Apple has just revealed the new 11-inch iPad Air 6, but how does it compare to the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9? The Samsung tablet is one of the best Android tablets around, after all.

While you might assume that both are fairly evenly matched, the iPad Air 6 pulls away from the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 not only in terms of sheer power but accessories, and importantly, it’s cheaper than the competing tablet too.

However, the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 has a lot going for it, not only with unique IP68 dust and water resistance but also GenAI-powered tools in the form of Galaxy AI.

Here’s how the two tablets compare to help you decide which is best for your needs.

The iPad Air 6 is more powerful

Both the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 and iPad Air 6 are impressively powerful tablets at the top of their respective games, but the iPad Air 6 manages to peel away with the inclusion of Apple’s desktop-level M2 chipset.

Previously the chipset of choice of the 2022 iPad Pro range, Apple claims that the new chipset is 50% faster than that of the M1-enabled iPad Air from 2022, and that was already one of the most powerful tablets around. It means that the new iPad can take advantage of console-level games like Assassin’s Creed Mirage when it becomes available on the App Store in the coming months.

That doesn’t mean that the Tab S9 is a slouch, sporting a custom chipset dubbed the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy, but it’s no longer the fastest chipset around with the launch of the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 just a few months after the Tab S9 was revealed. It’s still more than enough to power the premium Android tablet experience, but it can’t compete with the Apple M2.

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 is dust and water-resistant

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 separates itself not only from the iPad Air 6 but practically every other tablet on the market with an impressive IP68 dust and water resistance rating.

While many tablets could survive a splash of water, the Tab S9 can take a trip to the beach and remain totally unscathed – an impressive feat of engineering from Samsung, that’s for sure.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The iPad Air, on the other hand, has no official dust or water resistance, so we’d keep it far away from swimming pools and the like to be safe.

The Galaxy Tab S9 has better AI features

AI is the big buzzword of 2024 with GenAI capabilities now appearing in various flagship smartphones. Galaxy AI was the star of the Galaxy S24 launch earlier this year, but don’t assume that it’s only on the S24 range; following a wider rollout of Samsung’s OneUI 6.1 update, the Tab S9 now has GenAI capabilities.

It’s not just one or two of the key Galaxy AI features either, with the Tab S9 boasting practically every feature available on the Galaxy S24 including the ability to rewrite texts and emails, on-device translation, transcription capabilities, website summarisation and even the GenAI-powered photo editing tools.

Both tablets have great accessory support

The core tablet experience is one thing, but if you want a truly versatile bit of tech that can double up as a sketch pad or even a laptop, accessories are key. The good news is that both the iPad Air 6 and Galaxy Tab S9 offer support for high-end accessories including styluses and keyboard covers.

Let’s start with the iPad Air; as with the 2022 variant, the iPad Air 2024 offers support for the second-gen Apple Pencil and the first-gen Magic Keyboard. While it doesn’t quite extend to the newer variants of the accessories, currently exclusive to the iPad Pro range, the experience from the Apple Pencil 2 and Magic Keyboard is certainly a high-end one that we appreciated during the review process.

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 also boasts support for Samsung’s S Pen stylus and a keyboard case that works in a similar way to the iPad Air’s accessory, essentially turning the tablet into a laptop. If anything, Samsung’s implementation is a little better with DeX support turning the tablet UI into something akin to Windows 11 for a true multitasking experience.

The iPad Air is much cheaper

Despite the various similarities between the two top-end tablets, Apple’s iPad Air is actually cheaper than the competing Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 – and by quite a bit too.

While the iPad Air comes in at £599/$599 with 128GB of storage, the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 starts at £799/$799 with the same 128GB of storage, making it £200/$200 more. The catch? The Tab S9 comes with a stylus in the box, while the Apple Pencil 2 is an optional accessory.

If you’re interested in either, you can buy the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 now following its launch in August 2023, while the iPad Air – both 11- and 13-inch models – are available to pre-order now ahead of release on 15 May 2024.

You might like…

The post iPad Air 6 (11-inch) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9: Which tablet is best? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Google Pixel 8a vs Pixel 8: Don't make the wrong choice

Max Parker — Tue, 07 May 2024 16:00:00 +0000

Ahead of its yearly i/O conference, Google has announced the Pixel 8a, its latest mid-range device. But how does it compare to the Pixel 8?

The Google Pixel 8a looks set to be an enticing affordable option, just like the Pixel 7a was before it.

But with many features plucked directly from the now-discounted Pixel 8, what are the big differences between Google’s two cheaper smartphone options?

The screens and sizes are very similar

When it comes to the screen and general size of these two phones, there’s not much to separate them.

Both phones have a 1080p resolution, brightness levels up to 1400 nits (Google calls this Actua tech) and they are also both OLED for deep blacks and punchy colours. Neither has the LTPO tech found on the Pixel 8 Pro for the dynamic altering of the refresh rate, instead they both can move between 60Hz and 120Hz.

The Pixel 8 has a slightly bigger screen, at 6.2-inch as opposed to 6.1-inches. That isn’t a huge difference though, and likely only noticeable if the two devices are next to each other.

Pixel 8 and 8 Pro

There are different colours available

While there are some visual similarities between the two phones, the colour choices are different. The Pixel 8, for example, is available in Mint, Hazel, Rose and Obsidian.

The Obsidian colour makes its way to the 8a, as does the Bay colour the Pixel 8 Pro is available in. Next, we’ve got Porcelain – another Pixel 8 Pro choice – and finally, there’s a completely new hue in Aloe. This is a shade of green that’s far brighter than the Mint Pixel 8.

We have to say we much prefer the matte finish of the Pixel 8a over the glossy Pixel 8, which should help to eschew fingerprints and oily residue.

The cameras are different

The Pixel 8 has an excellent camera, easily one of the best you can find at its price. It has a main 50MP camera with an f/1.7 lens, a 12MP ultrawide and a 10.5MP selfie camera.

In our Pixel 8 review we said, “Images in well-lit conditions are punchy while not looking overprocessed like some rivals, with plenty of detail and impressively accurate colours. That’s especially true of skin tones, with the Pixel 8 delivering some of the most true-to-life skin tones of any phone I’ve tested this year.”

We’ve not properly tested the Pixel 8a yet, so we can’t make a judgment yet on the camera’s quality or how it compares to Pixel 8, yet on paper it seems very similar to the Pixel 7a. We’d expect it to be good if maybe a level below the Pixel 8.

The 8a has a 64MP main sensor with an f/1.89 aperture, 13MP ultrawide and 13MP selfie camera on the front.

The Pixel 8 has more video shooting options, including capturing at 24fps in 4K.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Pricing isn’t quite as clear cut as you might think

If we look at RRPs, there’s a noticeable difference between the two phones. The Pixel 8a starts at £499/$499 while the Pixel 8 costs £699/$699. A £200/$200 difference seems fair, considering the differences on offer.

However, looking at the actual prices the Pixel 8 goes for paints a different story. Google is currently selling the phone for £569 or $549, while we’ve seen it drop to below £499 thanks to some excellent deals. Being so close in price to the Pixel 8 could be an issue for the 8a, especially as we approach Black Friday and the Pixel 9.

You might like…

The post Google Pixel 8a vs Pixel 8: Don't make the wrong choice appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Pro (2024) vs iPad Pro (2022): All the big differences explained

Max Parker — Tue, 07 May 2024 16:00:33 +0000

iPad Pro 2024 vs iPad Pro 2020

Apple has finally introduced the new iPad Pro, ending the longest dry spell without an update to the tablet range since its inception. The iPad Pro (2024) looks to be a hefty refresh of the series, bringing a load of new features and changes.

2023 was a year without any new iPads, and it’s taken nearly five months of 2024 for Apple to finally upgrade its tablet line. But those upgrades are here, and they might just be worth the wait.

Here we’ll compare the new iPad Pro (2024) to the outgoing iPad Pro (2022) and highlight some of the biggest and best new features.

Hello OLED

One of the leading rumours ahead of the new iPad Pro was the switch to an OLED display. Aside from the Mini LED panel on the 12.9-inch iPad Pro in 2020 and 2022, Apple has stuck to IPS LCD for all iPads – until now.

Both the 11-inch and the new larger 13-inch iPad Pro (2024) utilise OLED displays – that’s the same screen tech found on the iPhone and Apple Watch. This is a welcome change, especially for the 11-inch model, as OLED offers higher brightness levels, perfect blacks and punchier colours.

Apple is calling the displays here Ultra Retina XDR, which is a banner term for all tech packed inside these displays. Apple is combining two OLED panels together (Tandem OLED), offering up to 1600 nits of peak brightness. There’s also an nano-textured glass option, which adds an etched finish to the display to try and reduce glare.

Credit: Apple

One camera vs two cameras

In an interesting move, Apple has actually reduced the amount of cameras on the back of the iPad Pro 2024. Gone is the ultra wide camera that was present on the 2022 model, with a single 12MP wide camera now the only focal length.

Forget M3, we’ve got M4

With the IPad Pro (2022) coming with the M2 chip, many had expected the 2024 version to up that to the same M3 found in the recent MacBook Pro updates.

However, that’s not the case. Instead, the iPad Pro (2024) runs on the brand-new M4 chip, the first time a new M-series chip is debuting with an iPad. We’d expect to see this chip arrive in MacBooks and other Macs later this year.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

While we’ll have to wait until we can properly review the new iPad Pro to judge its performance, Apple has already made some bold claims. It has the largest neural engine yet – likely for all the AI benefits we expect to see in iOS 18 – plus ray tracing, 4x faster rendering than on the M2 and more efficiency cores.

Looking a little deeper at the specs, we can see that Apple is separating out the number of cores depending on the storage size. The 256GB and 512GB options have a 9-core CPU with 3 performance cores (actually down from the 6 performance cores in the base M2 chip) and 8GB RAM. Choose either the 1TB or 2TB option and you’ll get a 10-core CPU, with 4 performance cores and 6 efficiency cores. You’ll also get 16GB RAM.

Credit: Apple

A thinner design, but not a massive redesign

Those hoping for a huge redesign for the new iPad Pro (2024) might be disappointed, as visually it does look very similar to the outgoing model. However, there are some big differences.

These are two seriously thin tablets, with the 13-inch Pro taking the crown of being Apple’s thinnest-ever device. The 11-inch model is just 5.3mm thick, while the 13-inch variant is even thinner at 5.1mm. Compared to the 6.4mm thick 12.9-inch predecessor, that’s a notable upgrade.

The 13-inch model is also over 100g lighter than the 12.9-inch model from 2022, tipping the scales at 579g as opposed to 682g.

The tablet still arrives in two colours – silver and Space Grey – but the enclosure is now made from 100% recycled aluminium.

The front of the Apple iPad Pro M2

The front camera has a new position

Rejoice! Apple has finally moved the position of the 12MP TrueDepth camera from the side to the long edge on the top of the iPad Pro (2024) making it far more suitable for video calls when you have the tablet docked in a keyboard. This seems like a small change, but it could be one of the most welcome among iPad fans.

You might like…

The post iPad Pro (2024) vs iPad Pro (2022): All the big differences explained appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Pro (2024) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra: Which is best?

Hannah Davies — Tue, 07 May 2024 15:48:26 +0000

Apple has officially announced its latest slew of iPads, including the iPad Pro (2024) and iPad Air 6.

The iPad Pro is designed to “crush” the limits of what you can do on an Apple tablet. Here’s how the premium iPad compares to Samsung’s current high-end tablet, the Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra.

The iPad Pro is thinner and more lightweight

Apple called the iPad Pro its thinnest product ever during the launch event, stating that the 11-inch Pro measures only 5.3mm thick, while the 13-inch model is even slimmer at just 5.1mm thick.

The two tablets also weigh less than previous versions of the iPad Pro at 0.98 lbs (~445g) and 1.28 lbs (~581g), respectively.

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra is 14.6 inches in size, has a width of 5.5mm and weighs 732g. This makes it slightly thicker and at least 25% heavier than the new iPad Pro, depending on the size you choose.

The iPad Pro has a brighter screen

The iPad Pro also features a brighter screen, making it ideal for streaming movies and editing content in bright conditions.

The new Tandem OLED display combines the light from two OLED panels to achieve a brighter screen. Apple claims the iPad Pro can reach 1000 nits of brightness when displaying both SDR and HDR content, or 1600 nits of peak brightness with HDR. The new iPad is also configurable with a nano-texture glass option to reduce glare.

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra features a Dynamic AMOLED 2X display and is capable of hitting up to 930 nits of brightness.

The iPad Pro features the Apple M4

Another major update for the iPad is the Apple M4 chip. The chipset features 2nd gen 3nm technology, offering improved power efficiency, a 50% faster CPU and a 4x faster CPU compared to its predecessor, the Apple M2. The Neural Engine is also able to complete up to 38 trillion operations per second.

Of course, we haven’t had the chance to test the iPad Pro (2024) out ourselves at this stage, but if the performance overtakes its predecessor, it should have no problem beating the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for Galaxy in the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra.

That isn’t to say the Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra performs poorly by any means. The tablet comfortably delivered some of the best benchmark scores of any Android tablet in our tests. However, we did previously find that it fell behind the Apple M2 in the iPad Pro (2022).

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra comes with a stylus

A major advantage to the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra is that it comes with the S Pen in the box. That means you don’t need to worry about paying extra for a stylus to take notes or create digital art.

While the iPad Pro offers support for the new Apple Pencil Pro, it doesn’t come with the stylus or its predecessor, meaning you’ll need to pay upwards of $100/£100 on top of the price of the tablet to get your hands on a pen.

The Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra has expandable storage

Finally, the Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra features a microSD slot, meaning you can expand the storage beyond the 1TB model.

The iPad Pro is available with up to 2TB, but there’s no SD slot for expanding the storage beyond this or for a lower price.

You might like…

The post iPad Pro (2024) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra: Which is best? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Air 6 vs iPad Air 5: What’s new?

Jessica Gorringe — Tue, 07 May 2024 15:34:26 +0000

Apple has just announced the iPad Air 6, an impressive upgrade to the iPad Air 5 which launched back in 2022, in an event which was hailed as the “biggest day for iPad since its introduction.”

But how does the new tablet compare to 2022’s iPad Air? We’ve compared the newly announced iPad Air 6 to its predecessor, the iPad Air 5, and highlighted the key differences between the two models to help you decide which is best for your needs.

The iPad Air 6 is available in two sizes

The iPad Air now comes in a choice of two sizes, a redesigned 11-inch model and an all-new 13-inch, with the latter offering a decent 30% more screen real estate.

Speaking of screens, both iPad Air models feature Apple’s signature stunning Liquid Retina Display and allow for SplitView so you can easily multitask and switch between open apps. It’s not quite the same as the new OLED-powered Ultra Retina XDR panels of the similarly-sized iPad Pro range, but it’s a solid middle ground.

The iPad Air 6 has a new front camera position

Up until now, all models of iPad Air have had a front camera embedded along the top portrait edge. The iPad Air 6 now has a landscape 12MP front camera, found at the top of the screen when the iPad is in a horizontal position. This should make it easier to use the camera when you’re connected to the compatible Magic Keyboard or generally for video calls, and follows suit from a similar change in the latest models of iPad and iPad mini.

Similarly to the iPad Air 5, the front camera on the iPad Air 6 is fitted with Centre Stage technology. This technology uses machine learning to automatically pan the camera to keep you centred in the frame. When others join or leave the shot, the view will also act accordingly and expand or zoom.

The iPad Air 6 runs on the M2 chip

Another upgrade for the iPad Air 6 is its processor. While the iPad Air 5 runs on Apple’s M1 chip, the Air 6 runs on the M2 chip. Launched in October 2022,the M2 chip was included in the MacBook Air and MacBook Pro and has only recently been succeeded by the M3 chip. It was also the chipset of choice for the previous iPad Pro range.

With the new chip in tow, the iPad Air 6 promises to be 50% faster than the iPad Air 5 and 3x faster than the A12 Bionic.

Not only does it promise to be faster, but with M2, the iPad Air 6 can deliver powerful AI performance across the vast ecosystem of apps that include advanced AI features.

The iPad Air 6 has more storage options

The iPad Air 5 offers just two storage options, a 64GB and a 256GB.To offer users more flexibility, the iPad Air 6 now has a choice of a staggering four storage options, starting with 128GB up to a massive 1TB. There are also the 256GB and 512GB options too, so there’s guaranteed to be a storage size to better suit your needs.

The iPad Air 6 is available from 15th May

The new iPad Air 6 is currently available to pre-order from the Apple website ready for its official global launch on 15th May. The 11-inch model is unsurprisingly cheaper, starting at $599 / £599 / €699 and the 13-inch model has a starting RRP of $799 / £799 / €949.

You might like…

The post iPad Air 6 vs iPad Air 5: What’s new? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Apple Pencil Pro vs Apple Pencil 2: You won’t believe the price difference

Thomas Deehan — Tue, 07 May 2024 15:31:35 +0000

Apple just pulled back the curtain on the latest stylus for the iPad range, the Apple Pencil Pro. Here’s how it compares to the previous flagship pick.

Apple’s May event has now come and gone and while it was certainly shorter than the iPhone/Apple Watch showcase that the company tends to air in September, it was by no means bereft of new things to talk about. Quite the contrary.

In addition to bringing a 2024 update to the iPad Air, now available in not one but two sizes, the company also brought a mammoth update to the iPad Pros. Both size options now feature an OLED display, a landscape centred front-camera and above all, an M4 chip under the hood.

That’s a lot to digest but Apple made sure to point out that one of the best ways to get the most out of these new devices (particularly the iPad Pro) is to pair it with the new Apple Pencil Pro, so if you’re wondering whether or not you should also add the stylus to your online basket then here’s all you need to know about how it compares to the Apple Pencil 2.

There’s a new, touch sensitive button

The first thing to be shown off on the Apple Pencil Pro is a new section just before the Pencil’s tip that can be squeezed between your thumb and index finger.

In Apple’s demo, a single squeeze brought up a mini toolkit of options wherein you can quickly change between different colours and brush types without having to dive into a separate menu. This alone feels like it could streamline the drawing process by quite a bit, to the point where you start to wonder how previous Apple Pencils got on without it.

Twists and turns are now registered

In addition to the squeeze button, the Apple Pencil Pro can now also register when it’s being rotated in your hand thanks to a new built-in gyroscope. Apple showed how a single twist can be used to change the thickness of a brush stroke in real time, or even the shape of your brush.

Again, much like the toolkit that appears when you squeeze the Pencil Pro, Apple seems to be focusing on streamlining the drawing process by giving users more control from the Pencil itself.

Haptic feedback makes an appearance

Thanks to a motor that now sits inside the Apple Pencil Pro, it’ll be possible for users to feel Haptic Feedback as they interact with it. This probably isn’t as much of a game-changing feature as what’s been mentioned so far, but it will certainly help with knowing when interactions have been registered.

Apple Pencil Pro finally supports Find my

Easily a must-have upgrade for anyone who’s previously lost an Apple Pencil, the Apple Pencil Pro now supports Find My. There was no mention of the Pencil Pro using Apple’s W1 chip which sits inside the Apple AirTag and iPhone 15 range, so you won’t have the same level of tracking precision but it’ll definitely go a long way towards preventing any future mishaps.

Strangely, they’re the same price

One has to wonder if Apple will slowly sunset the Apple Pencil 2 or if the stylus is set for a price drop in the near future because right now, at the time of publishing, the Apple Pencil Pro and Apple Pencil 2 have the same RRP of £129/$129.

While we won’t for sure exactly how well the Apple Pencil Pro performs until we get it in for testing, it does seem as if it’ll be the obvious choice for most people, particularly given that it’s coming to the table with far more features on offer than the Apple Pencil 2.

You might like…

The post Apple Pencil Pro vs Apple Pencil 2: You won’t believe the price difference appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPad Air (2024) vs iPad Pro (2024): What’s the difference?

Lewis Painter — Tue, 07 May 2024 14:49:30 +0000

Apple has just announced two powerful tablet ranges for 2024, the iPad Air and the iPad Pro. The question is, what’s the difference between the two?

It’s arguable that with the introduction of the iPad Air 11 and iPad Air 13, the iPad Air and iPad Pro ranges are closer together than ever – but there are still crucial differences between the two that’ll sway your opinion one way or the other.

Before slapping down your hard-earned cash, here are a few crucial differences between the new iPad Air and the new iPad Pro.

The iPad Pro is more powerful

The iPad Pro range is Apple’s all-singing-all-dancing tablet, and to further cement its position, it’s one of few Apple tablets to utilise the desktop-level M-series chipsets. It started with the inclusion of the M1 in 2021, before the M2 made its debut in 2022, and that trend continues with the use of the brand-new M4 in this year’s iPad Pro range.

That top-end chipset is the most powerful you’ll find on any tablet at the moment, boasting a 50% boost to CPU performance compared to the M2, complete with elements like ray-tracing support, that make it the ideal tablet for serious creative work like editing and exporting video, working with large files and even animation.

That doesn’t mean the iPad Air should be sniffed at, however; it’s the only other tablet range to sport the M-series chipset, with the 2022 iPad Air boasting the (slightly older) M1 chipset, and the 2024 range has seen a boost to the M2, cementing its place as a true powerhouse of tablet processing power – it’s just not quite as powerful as the iPad Pro.

The iPad Pro is more lightweight

One of the key differentiators between the iPad Air and iPad Pro has, traditionally, been heft. The Air branding of the iPad Air signifies the focus on a lightweight design, an element that’s not quite as important with the pro-level tablets in Apple’s collection – until this year, that is.

While the iPad Air has traditionally been thinner and lighter than the Pro models, the redesigned iPad Pro range is impressively thin and lightweight; in fact, it’s the thinnest product in Apple’s product collection ever.

More specifically, the iPad Air 11 measures in at just 5.3mm and 444g, while the iPad Pro 12.9 measures in at 5.1mm and 580g– the latter is truly impressive considering the size. We don’t yet know exactly how thick and heavy the new iPad Air is in comparison, but Apple has stated that the new iPad Pro range is the thinnest and lightest yet, so expect some extra heft from the ironically-named iPad Air.

The iPad Pro has a way better screen

The iPad Pro has always had a top-end screen, but the 2024 range takes that to the next level by switching from LCD (or miniLED in the case of the previous 12.9in model) to OLED, a first in Apple’s iPad range.

It’s not just your regular OLED panel either, instead using two layers of OLED sheets to deliver top-end brightness of 1600nits, deeper blacks and more vibrant colours than the Liquid Retina LCD display of the iPad Air.

The iPad Pro range also enjoys new options like NanoTexture glass, a matte-finish display that helps negate reflections, and like previous entries, it sports 120Hz ProMotion support for buttery-smooth animations. That’s just as true of the new slightly larger 13-inch model as the 11-inch model, with no difference between the two.

The iPad Air’s Super Retina XDR display is still very much a great LCD display, also available in 11- and 13-inches for the first time, with a pixel-packed resolution and support for multiple HDR formats to make viewing a great experience, but it misses out not only on the OLED tech but the 120Hz refresh rate and matte-finish display option.

The iPad Pro has more advanced accessories

The iPad Air (2022) was a particularly tempting tablet for Apple fans as it shared the same support for the same high-end Apple Pencil 2 and Apple Magic Keyboard as the top-end Pro collection. That meant you could get much of the Pro functionality at a much cheaper price point.

However, the iPad Pro has new accessories in the form of a refreshed Magic Keyboard and the Apple Pencil Pro, and while iPad Air users can use the latter, they can’t use the former.

The new Magic Keyboard has an aluminium trackpad for better performance, combined with the same haptic feedback from Macs for a more aligned trackpad experience, and there are new shortcut keys to better control elements of your tablet like brightness with a press.

The Apple Pencil Pro, on the other hand, sports a new squeeze interaction (similar to that of the AirPods Pro) that’ll bring up a new tool palette for quick brush/pen selection, and the new haptic engine should add interesting feedback to the drawing experience. There’s also a new gyroscope to change orientation for shaped pens and brushes, and Find My support.

The iPad Air is much cheaper

It’s clear to see that the new iPad Pro range is much more capable than the new iPad Air range – even the large 12.9-inch model – but there’s a reason for that; the iPad Pro is Apple’s top-end tablet with all the latest features, while the iPad Air likes to strike a middle ground between high-end features and a more affordable nature.

That said, it shouldn’t be much surprise to learn that the iPad Air is way more affordable than its Pro sibling, with the 11-inch iPad Air starting at $599, going up to $799 for the 13-inch model, while the 11-inch iPad Pro starts at $1199, going up to $1299 if you want the 13-inch iPad Pro experience.

You might like…

The post iPad Air (2024) vs iPad Pro (2024): What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Apple M4 vs Apple M3: What's the difference?

Ryan Jones — Tue, 07 May 2024 14:39:35 +0000

Apple has announced the new M4 chip, the latest entry to the Apple Silicon family.

This reveal has come as a surprise to many, with Apple only launching the preceding Apple M3 processor late last year. With so little time separating the two processors, you may be wondering how they differ.

We’ve created this guide to highlight the key upgrades for the new Apple M4 chip compared to the existing M3 processor, so you know which processor is best for you.

Powerful AI performance

The headline upgrade for the Apple M4 chip seems to be its advancement in AI performance. Apple has demonstrated new AI-powered features that the chip will make possible, such as isolating a subject from its background in a 4K video in an instant.

This advancement in AI performance is thanks to the new neural engine inside the M4 chip, which Apple claims is the most powerful of its kind in the world. Apple’s neural engine has a 16-core design and is capable of 38 trillion operations per second. For comparison, the 16-core NPU of the Apple M3 is only capable of 18 trillion operations per second.

Apple’s introduction of the M4 chip follows a big trend of doubling down on AI in recent years. AMD, Intel and Qualcomm are all in the process of rolling out AI chips, while Adobe, Google and Microsoft have also been developing AI-powered software.

If anything, it seems like Apple is actually a little late to the AI party compared to its competitors. But the M4 chip marks Apple’s biggest leap into the market yet, and it seems this is only the beginning.

Credit: Apple

M4 chip offers more processing power

The focus may well be on AI when it comes to the M4 chip, but that doesn’t mean Apple has neglected the raw processing power. Apple claims that the M4 offers 50% more processing power than the M2 chip. Unfortunately, Apple didn’t offer a percentage increase compared to the M3.

Apple has upped the core count of the chip, with the M4 featuring 4 performance cores and 6 efficiency cores, totalling up to 10 cores. Meanwhile, the Apple M3 only features 8 cores, made up of 4 performance cores and 4 efficiency cores.

The performance boost is also aided by the move to a new architecture, using the cutting-edge second-generation 3nm process from TSMC.

This is still a baseline chip of course, with Apple expected to launch Pro, Max and Ultra variants of the M4 processor further down the line for its high-performance Macs.

The M4 chip is only available in the iPad Pro, for now…

Apple usually introduces its new processors inside a Mac, with the M3 debuting inside the iMac and MacBook Pro late last year. However, the Apple M4 has bucked this trend by exclusively launching inside the iPad Pro.

The new chip isn’t available in any Mac right now, which means the MacBook Air, MacBook Pro, iMac, Mac Mini and more are all still stuck on the previous M3 generation.

There’s no need to worry though, as renowned Apple leaker Mark Gurman says that Apple is still planning to launch a slew of M4–powered Macs before the end of the year, most likely in October or November.

But for now, if you want access to the new M4 chip and all of its AI powers right now, then your option is opting for the iPad Pro tablet.

You might like…

The post Apple M4 vs Apple M3: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Budget TVs vs Premium TVs: Comparing picture quality and longevity

Kob Monney — Mon, 06 May 2024 15:00:00 +0000

When it comes to purchasing a TV, you’ve got a plethora of options at various price points. But if we were to cull those options and end up with two simple choices, you’d have a choice between budget and premium TVs.

Not all TVs are alike, and not everyone has the budget to spend on a premium TV. In some cases your choice will be made for you by how much you can spend. If you have the money to spend on a premium TV, we’d recommend you do just that. You’d get a higher quality performance. If you don’t, there are plenty of less expensive options to choose from.

Nevertheless, we’ll be comparing a few areas which may have an impact on whether you’ll go for a premium or budget TV.

How long do TVs last?

This is an area that we’d describe as rather nebulous. TVs are meant to last for a long time, though there are various competing ideas of how long a TV should last. Some say 4-6 years, other sources suggest 7-8 years. It’s not so much the TV itself that’s the limiting factor, but like with every electronic device, how well you take care of it.

OLED is a premium TV tech but as its panel is made from organic materials, the picture performance degrades over time. Part of this is down to image retention or burn-in.

The former sees static elements in the image retained in the screen, but this issue can resolve itself over time if you watch different types of content. Burn-in is more serious, and sees static elements retained permanently within the screen. However, for this to happen, usage of your OLED TV has to be in the extreme. With normal use, burn-in shouldn’t be an issue.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

That’s primarily because OLED TVs come with a range of technologies to avoid image retention and burn-in. Some of these are done automatically, while others are performed manually, though in the latter case we’d suggest you don’t perform these actions often (only if you absolutely need to) as they can affect the lifespan of an OLED TV.

Plasma TVs suffered from a similar issue, but there are some Plasma TVs such as Pioneer’s Kuro that are still running more than a decade after release.

LCD LED TVs don’t suffer from burn-in, but like with any type of TV there are few things to consider. One is that you shouldn’t run the backlight at its maximum setting all the time. You’ll not only use more energy but potentially wear out the LEDs in the backlight faster.

This applies to any type of TV but heat and ventillation are an issue. There’s a temperature range that TVs perform comfortably in and you won’t want to place a TV in areas where it becomes too hot. At the very least, if the TV is uncomfortable in the heat, you’ll get a warning suggesting that is the case.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

In all the TVs we’ve reviewed on this site, we’ve found issues with TVs to be very rare. Whether you’re buying a premium TV (OLED, Mini-LED) or a budget one (Direct LED, Edge-lit), you’re looking at the same lifespan.

For further peace of mind, you can always purchase from a retailer that offers a long-term guarantee. In the UK, John Lewis & Partners offers a five-year warranty on all its TVs. If you purchase a OLED TV direct from LG, you can get five-year limited panel warranty on a G and Z-series OLED.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Although we’ve focused on the physical aspect of TVs, in terms of longevity the software is one to consider too. TV interfaces are regularly updated and changed. Features will be added, some features will be taken away, but most important is keeping the same level of performance as when you first bought the TV.

Adding more features can put a strain on the TV’s processor, slowing it down over time, and there is the possibility that it’ll affect a cheaper TV that has a slower processor than a more expensive model. Interfaces that we’ve found quick and easy to use include Roku TV, LG’s webOS, Google TV, and Panasonic’s My Home Screen.

Is there a difference in picture quality?

Picture quality is where you’ll find the biggest differences between budget and premium TVs. TV performance tends to scale upwards, so the more you pay, the better the performance should be.

Premium TVs have more advanced features, whereas budget TVs have fewer. Inexpensive TVs don’t often have motion interpolation, which is processing that helps smooth out a signal to reduce stutter that comes with 24fps content. Whether this is pain point for you depends on whether you care about having it.

Upscaling is another area where a premium TV will outperform a budget TV. The use of AI technologies, machine learning and more advanced processing gives premium TVs the ability to take an image signa and constantly refine each frame. Budget TVs don’t have that level of processing available, with some TVs processing images in a smeary way that lacks detail and clarity.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

HDR brightness is another area where premium TVs have a sizeable advantage. 500 nits is considered the minimum in order to see the effects of HDR, but many budget TVs that we’ve tested struggle to hit 400 nits. Highlights are dimmer, colours are not as wide-ranging, and in some cases, TVs can lack punch, making HDR content look drab and dull.

HDR support is also limited on cheaper TVs. Though some TVs carry Dolby Vision or HDR10+, they’re not widespread across budget models and rarely are both premium HDR formats supported.

That said, premium TVs that carry both these formats aren’t widespread either, with Philips, Panasonic and TCL TVs being the main brands to carry these features.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The main difference here in terms of HDR picture quality between budget and premium TVs is the type of backlight used. A Direct-LED or an Edge-lit panel won’t offer as much contrast or precision as a Full Array Local Dimming (FALD) screen. Performance improves further with OLED and Mini LED because they can offer more precision in terms of brightness, contrast, and black levels.

Budget TVs won’t be able to hit the performance of a more expensive model but that doesn’t mean you shouldn’t consider buying one. If you’re not looking for a premium home cinema-type experience, and just want to watch daytime TV or what’s on Disney+, a budget TV will do fine, though some are better than others.

If you want the best picture quality then you should be prepared to fork out the money for it. We’re spoilt for options, which is why you should consider taking a look at our best lists to help you decide, whether its the best cheap TV, best OLED TV, best 4K TVs from each brand or the best TVs full stop.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

You might like…

The post Budget TVs vs Premium TVs: Comparing picture quality and longevity appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Huawei Pura 70 Ultra vs Honor Magic 6 Pro: Which is best?

Jessica Gorringe — Mon, 06 May 2024 08:00:00 +0000

Announced in April 2024, the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra is part of the brand’s newest smartphone lineup.

As the Honor Magic 6 Pro launched back in February, we’ve been able to give it an in-depth review, awarding the handset with a high 4.5-star (out of 5) rating. Although we haven’t yet conclusively reviewed the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra, we’ve given it an early verdict based on our first impressions with the phone.

We’ve put the specs of two smartphones together and have listed their differences below.

Honor Magic 6 Pro is available now

As it launched back in February 2024, the Honor Magic 6 Pro is currently available to buy now, starting at £1099.99/€1299.90.

The Huawei Pura 70 Ultra was announced more recently, in April 2024, and is currently available to pre-order in China and across parts of Europe. The handset starts in Europe at €1499.00, with no UK pricing released just yet.

Honor Magic 6 Pro has a higher brightness output

The Honor Magic 6 Pro boasts an impressively high peak brightness output of up to 5000-nits, which is currently the brightest display on the market.

Even so, the Pura 70 Ultra still has a peak brightness of 2500-nits, which although may read much lower than the Magic 6 Pro’s, in reality is more than enough.

Huawei Pura 70 Ultra has a retractable camera

One of the key features of the Pura 70 Ultra is its camera setup. Consisting of three lenses including a 50MP macro telephoto lens with OIS support and a 40MP ultrawide lens, which are rounded off with an impressive 50MP retractable anti-shake camera.

Although we haven’t conclusively reviewed the camera yet, our reviewer has stated in his early impressions that he’s “very impressed with the images captured by the Pura 70 Ultra so far.” He continues that “it could prove to be one of the finest camera systems this year, and with the competition being so fierce, that’s really saying something.”

The Honor Magic 6 Pro also boasts an impressive trio camera system, including a 50MP main lens with OIS, 50MP ultrawide and a mammoth 180MP periscope telephone camera with up to 100x digital zoom.

Mobile Editor Lewis Painter was impressed with the Magic 6 Pro’s camera and concluded that “simply put, the Magic 6 Pro is gunning for the Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra’s zoom crown with a particularly impressive trio of lenses.”

Honor Magic 6 Pro has a 50MP front camera

The front selfie camera of the Honor Magic 6 Pro has a higher resolution to the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra, at 50MP compared to 13MP.

While we are yet to review the Pura 70’s front camera, we concluded that Magic 6 Pro’s use of autofocus technology and an f/2.0 aperture “makes this a particularly impressive option” and will “more than suffice for the occasional selfie and video calls alike.”

The Huawei Pura 70 Ultra has faster charging

The Huawei Pura 70 Ultra promises impressively fast charging speeds of up to 100W wired and 80W wireless SuperCharge, as long as compatible chargers are used.

Even so, the Honor Magic 6 Pro still boasts fast speeds despite not quite reaching the level of the Pura 70 Ultra. Instead, the Magic 6 Pro has maximum speeds of 80W wired and 66W wireless SuperCharge.

You might like…

The post Huawei Pura 70 Ultra vs Honor Magic 6 Pro: Which is best? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

GoPro Hero 12 Black vs DJI Osmo Action 4: Which action cam is better?

Hannah Davies — Fri, 03 May 2024 16:25:00 +0000

DJI released its newest action camera, the Osmo Action 4, in August 2023. This was followed by GoPro’s current flagship model, the Hero 12 Black, in September.

If you’re stuck between these two great action cams, you’ve come to the right place. Keep reading to learn how the two cameras compare when it comes to design, performance, waterproofing and more.

Design

The GoPro Hero 12 Black and DJI Osmo Action 4 look similar enough from afar, but several design aspects set these two rectangular action cameras apart.

Both cameras are small and lightweight, making them ideal for vlogging when travelling or strapping to your body when partaking in more extreme sports and activities.

Both action cams are also incredibly rugged. However, Osmo Action 4 takes the lead in this area with waterproofing up to 18 and batteries designed to function in temperatures ranging from -20ºC to 45ºC. The Hero 12 Black, meanwhile, is waterproof up to 10m and can function in temperatures from -10ºC up to 35ºC. Both cameras can plunge as far as 60m with waterproof casing.

While the Hero 12 Black has two displays, only the rear display is a touchscreen. The Osmo Action 4 features two touchscreens, making it easier to use when taking selfies.

Features

The GoPro Hero 12 Black and the DJI Osmo Action 4 share many of the same key features, including powerful image stabilisation, a horizon lock to ensure the horizon remains level, and wireless data transfers via their respective smartphone apps.

Both cameras also include features that begin capturing footage before you hit record to ensure you don’t miss a crucial moment, voice commands, live streaming capabilities, and Timecode Sync for synchronising multiple cameras to record at once.

Of course, each camera also offers its own additional features, with the Hero 12 Black including Scheduled Capture for scheduling videos overnight and a variety of creative Night Effects, while the Osmo Action 4 includes AI selfie stick removal with InvisiStick.

The Hero 12 Black also supports up to 8x slow-mo in 2.7K, while the Osmo Action 4 drops to 1080p when recording 8x slow-mo.

Another key difference between the Hero 12 Black and the Osmo Action 4 is how they handle transitioning between horizontal and vertical video. The Osmo Action 4 uses a magnetic mount to physically move the camera between the two orientations, while the Hero 12 Black captures content on a square sensor and crops it to fit the desired format.

GoPro Hero 12 Black

Image and video quality

When it comes to image quality, the GoPro Hero 12 Black is capable of capturing higher resolutions, with its 5.3K/60fps or 4K/120fps beating out the 4K/120fps available on the Osmo Action 4.

We found that the Hero 12 Black offered sharper and punchier results in daylight, making it our top choice in good lighting. However, the Osmo Action 4 shines in low-light conditions, with its larger sensor making it the stronger choice for shooting in the evening and darker settings.

Battery life

Battery life is another important factor to consider when buying an action camera, as the last thing you want is for your camera to die when you’re out and about.

Both cameras carry similar-sized batteries, but the GoPro has the upper hand in this respect. The DJI Osmo Action 4 has a 160-minute battery life when shooting at 1080p at 24fps, while the Hero 12 Black can last up to 180 minutes when recording 1080p at 30fps.

DJI Osmo Action 4

Final verdict

The GoPro Hero 12 Black and DJI Osmo Action 4 are two excellent action cameras that carry many of the same features.

If you’re looking for the highest image quality and seamless switching between portrait and landscape orientations, opt for the Hero 12 Black. For great low-light performance and better waterproofing out of the box, look toward the Osmo Action 4.

You might like…

The post GoPro Hero 12 Black vs DJI Osmo Action 4: Which action cam is better? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Huawei Pura 70 vs Google Pixel 8: Which mid-range is best?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 01 May 2024 12:09:21 +0000

Part of Huawei’s newest smartphone lineup, the Pura 70 is offered as its mid-range option. Currently only available for pre-order in China, Huawei promises the Pura 70 will offer quality photography and speedy performance.

We haven’t managed to get our hands on a Pura 70 yet for testing however we have reviewed the Google Pixel 8, the most recent mid-range offering for the Pixel series. We’ve compared the specs of both and listed their key differences here.

Keep reading to learn more about the new Pura 70 and how it compares to the Google Pixel 8.

The Pura 70 is currently only available to pre-order in China

Announced in April 2024, the Pura 70 is part of the new smartphone lineup from Huawei and is currently only available to pre-order in China. It starts at 5999 CNY, which roughly equates to £663 (at the time of writing). We aren’t sure when this will be available elsewhere yet.

The Pixel 8 has an RRP of £699/$699/€799 and as it launched back in October 2023 we have seen numerous deals for the handset already.

The Pixel 8 has Google AI

The first Pixel smartphone to run on Google’s G3 Tensor chip, the Pixel 8 is built with Google AI which is an all-encompassing term that includes the AI-powered features found in Google devices.

Thanks to Google AI, photo editing is seamless with Magic Editor which allows you to add custom edits and studio-quality enhancements to any image. With Magic Eraser you can easily remove background distractions with AI providing an accurate generative fill. There’s also the Audio Magic Eraser, which cleverly reduces distracting sounds from videos.

It’s not just photography that utilises AI in the Pixel 8. With Live Translate you can interpret face-to-face conversations in 49 languages in real time, transcribe messages and translate signs, making it an ideal travel companion.

The Pura 70 also has AI features, which we are especially keen to test. Similarly to Google’s photo editing tools, the Pura 70 has an AI photo retouching tool and AI elimination, which is a similar concept to the Magic Editor.

The Pura 70 has three rear cameras

The Pura 70 features three cameras at the rear, one extra to the Pixel 8’s dual camera setup. This includes a 50MP main lens with OIS support, a 13MP ultrawide lens and a 12MP periscope telephoto lens which supports autofocus and OIS too.

We’d be keen to test the camera, especially as we know previous Huawei smartphones have boasted an impressive picture quality.

The Pixel 8’s camera setup includes a 50MP main lens with up to 8x Super Res Zoom and a 12MP ultrawide camera with auto-focus. In his review, Mobile Editor Lewis Painter found the Pixel 8’s camera to be “capable of taking some truly stunning photos” with images in well-lit conditions appearing “punchy while not looking overprocessed like some rivals, with plenty of detail and impressively accurate colours.”

The Pura 70 supports 66W fast charging

The Huawei Pura 70 supports a super fast wired charge of 66W and an impressive 50W wireless charging too. Although we haven’t had a chance to test this ourselves, this certainly exceeds the Pixel 8’s up to 30W wired charging.

Lewis concluded that the Google Pixel 8 took 81 minutes to charge from 1-100%, which definitely isn’t as fast as other Android competitors. Even so, the Pixel 8 promises an all-day battery life which we found was the case in our tests.

Both the Pura 70 and Pixel 8 also offer battery share, which allows you to share battery with other compatible devices.

You might like…

The post Huawei Pura 70 vs Google Pixel 8: Which mid-range is best? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Beats Solo 4 vs Beats Solo Pro: Big differences explained

Chris Smith — Tue, 30 Apr 2024 18:00:52 +0000

Apple-owned Beats has refreshed its over-ear headphones line with the Beats Solo 4, but how does this bass-popping set of cans compare to the existing Beats Studio Pro? Let’s find out.

Beats has followed up the launch of the excellent Beats Studio Pro on-ear headphones in 2023 with the brand new Beats Solo 4 less than a year later.

The fourth-generation model is the first in seven years and finally succeeds 2017’s Beats Solo 3 wireless earphones. The differences there are more pronounced. However, when it comes to Beats Solo 4 vs Beats Studio Pro there’s a more difficult choice to make.

Despite the price disparity, the cheaper Solo model might just be preferable to the premium Studio Pro for some users.

Beats Solo 4 cost a lot less

If you want a pair of the top tog Beats Studio Pro, you’re going to pay £349.99/$349.99, while the company is selling the Beats Solo 4 at £199.95/$199.95. This is significant considering what we’re about to tell you.

Get the iPhone 15 Pro with 500GB of data for £38.99 a month

You can currently pick up the iPhone 15 Pro on a 24 month contract with 500GB of monthly data for just £38.99 a month and £69 up front.

Mobiles.co.uk
500GB monthly data
£38.99 a month, £69 up front

View Deal

Studio Pro has ANC

Active noise cancellation is a must-have feature for many in 2024, but Beats has decided against including ANC within the Solo 4 model, probably to keep the price down and to keep the Studio Pro feeling like the premium option.

Not only is that a downside compared to the much-more-expensive Studio Pro, which also offers a Transparency Mode, but also to competing devices at a similar price point.

While ANC is a distinguishing factor, both have personalised spatial audio with head tracking for 360-degree sound via Dolby Atmos.

Beats Solo 4

Both offer versatile connectivity

Both models provide support for UBC-C for charging and both have a 3.5mm jack for connecting to legacy audio equipment. Both the Beats Solo 4 and Studio Pro support for lossless audio over USB-C. Both the Studio Pro and Solo 4 play nice with both iOS and Android devices, with support for the respective Find My and Find My Device networks.

In terms of Bluetooth, both devices offer Class 1 Bluetooth for really strong and reliable connectivity over Bluetooth 5.3. iOS users get a light benefit with hands-free Hey Siri.

Beats Solo 4 with USB-C

Solo 4 wins on battery life

Beats says its new Solo 4 can muster up to 50 hours of playback from a single charge, compared to the 40 hours from the Beats Studio Pro. That’s not necessarily representative of the absence of ANC either as the Beats Pro offers 24 hours of playback with ANC turned on.

Beats Solo 4

Studio Pro offers a premium design

The Studio Pro has plush leather cushions to go over the ear, but if you’re not a fan of dead animal hide overing your ears the Solo 4 is the way to go. Still “UltraPlush” but no leather. The Pro model also includes premium metal sliders to adjust the fit, while they’re also heavier at 260g compared with 217g.

We’re yet to test the Beats Solo 4, but it would be surprising if they could match the sonic quality of the Studio Pro with all things being equal.

The press release says: “Beats Solo 4 has been re-engineered for incredible, high-fidelity acoustics. The custom-built 40mm transducers minimise electronic artifacts, latency, and distortion for extraordinary clarity and range.”

We’ll have a better idea of the nuances of the side-by-side comparison when we review the Beats Solo 4 in the coming weeks.

You might like…

The post Beats Solo 4 vs Beats Solo Pro: Big differences explained appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

GoPro Hero 12 Black vs GoPro Hero 11 Black: What’s new?

Hannah Davies — Tue, 30 Apr 2024 16:00:00 +0000

In 2023, GoPro announced the latest device to join its flagship action camera line – the GoPro Hero 12 Black.

The action camera shares a good number of similarities with its predecessor, the GoPro Hero 11 Black. The two action cameras feature similar designs, the same 1/1.9-inch CMOS image sensor, and matching image and video resolutions. Both cameras also take advantage of identical waterproof ratings and the same-sized batteries.

Of course, there’s always room for improvement and GoPro has introduced a handful of them with the Hero 12 Black. Keep reading to discover how these two action cams compare.

Design

The GoPro Hero 12 Black looks almost identical to the Hero 11 Black in size and shape. The two action cameras also weigh the same and take advantage of two screens – one touchscreen on the rear of the camera and another non-touch display on the front.

The Hero 12 Black does feature a new blue-speckled finish but the material itself appears to be the same and the two cameras share the same trademark ruggedness and 10m waterproofing.

Both cameras include one MicroSD card split for storage and a USB-C port for charging and uploading footage to another device.

One update this year is the addition of 1/4-20 mounting threads. These make the Hero 12 Black compatible with standard camera mounts and accessories, along with the usual GoPro mods.

GoPro Hero 12 Black

Features

The GoPro Hero 12 Black also brings several feature updates to the Hero line.

The first of these is HyperSmooth 6.0, the latest version of GoPro’s in-body stabilisation feature. There’s also a new Interval Photo tool that allows the user to capture stills at set intervals, as well as the new Timecode Sync feature for wirelessly synchronising multiple Hero 12 Black cameras to record at once.

Additionally, AirPod users will be happy to hear that the Hero 12 Black now supports audio recording and voice commands via Bluetooth earbuds.

One downgrade on the Hero 12 Black is the lack of a GPS sensor – something that helped track location data on the Hero 11 Black. GoPro told Digital Camera World that it had ditched the GPS to increase the camera’s battery life after discovering that very few GoPro users actually made use of the Hero 11 Black’s location stickers.

Image and video quality

Both the GoPro Hero 12 Black and the Hero 11 Black are powered by the same GP2 processor and 1/1.9-inch CMOS image sensor combo. This enables the cameras to capture sharp 5.3K/60p video, 27-megapixel images, and 24.7-megapixel stills from video.

Key updates on the Hero 12 Black include the ability to record at a 4:3 aspect ratio in a wider variety of shooting modes. This includes TimeWarp, Time Lapse, and Night Lapse.

GoPro has also brought HDR support to the camera for the first time, making it possible to capture a greater dynamic range when shooting in 5.3K/30p or 4K/60p.

GoPro Hero 11 Black

Battery life

The GoPro Hero 12 Black delivers 2x longer recording times at 5.3K/60p compared to the Hero 11 Black. This is despite the two cameras sharing the exact same 1720 mAh Enduro battery.

GoPro credits the camera’s improved power management (and aforementioned lack of GPS) for the extended battery life, allowing users to shoot 5.3K/60p video for up to 70 minutes, 5.3K/30 for up to 1.5 hours, and 1080p/30p for up to 2.5 hours.

Final verdict

The Hero 12 Black is a minor upgrade on its surface but it brings a handful of improvements and features that make it an easy choice over its predecessor (unless you need GPS).

You might like…

The post GoPro Hero 12 Black vs GoPro Hero 11 Black: What’s new? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Huawei Pura 70 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra: Which Ultra is better?

Jessica Gorringe — Tue, 30 Apr 2024 14:37:49 +0000

Currently only available in China, the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra is part of Huawei’s newest smartphone lineup which launched in April 2024.

Although we are yet to test the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra, we have reviewed the Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra and gave it a 4.5 star rating. With that in mind, we’ve highlighted the differences between the specs of both handsets.

Huawei Pura 70 Ultra has a retractable camera

The Huawei Pura 70 Ultra features an impressive rear camera setup. Consisting of three lenses, including a 40MP ultrawide and 50MP macro telephoto lens with OIS support which is impressively rounded off with a 50MP retractable camera. This retractable camera promises anti-shake and has been tested for a total of 300,000 retractions.

As we haven’t tested the Pura 70 Ultra yet, we can’t comment on its camera performance, however we are keen to learn more based on its specs. We have, however, spent a lot of time with the Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra and found its camera to be nothing short of impressive.

The S24 Ultra includes a 200MP main lens, 12MP ultrawide, 10MP with 3x optical zoom and a new 50MP Telephoto lens with a 5x optical zoom. In his review, Mobile Editor Lewis Painter concluded that the “S24 Ultra can capture a stunning shot with little effort, with images usually packed with detail, vibrant colours and exceptional dynamic range.”

Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Huawei Pura 70 Ultra has faster charging

The Huawei Pura 70 Ultra promises 100W wired super fast charging and a massive 80W wireless super fast charging. As we haven’t yet tested the handset we can’t confirm whether it really is able to charge quickly nor can we state how long a full charge actually takes.

In comparison, the S24 Ultra offers a lower 45W charging compatibility which we found took 71 minutes to charge from 1-100%. It is worth noting that although charging may seem slower, we found the battery life of the S24 Ultra to be quite impressive, ending 16-hour days with 50-60% battery remaining.

Galaxy S24 Ultra has Galaxy AI

One of the standout features of the new Samsung Galaxy S24 series is the inclusion of Galaxy AI which is an all-encompassing term for all the AI features found on the devices. This includes photo-editing features, such as the editor which removes distractions from images and replaces them with an accurate generative fill.

There’s also the useful AI-powered Notes app that can transcribe and translate a conversation in real time and automatically summarise this in a clear bullet point form, as well as live translation which allows you to seamlessly converse in different languages.

The Huawei Pura 70 Ultra also has its own AI-powered features which we’re keen to try. Similarly to Galaxy AI, there’s a similar photo editor feature which removes distractions from photos and provides a generative auto-fill.

Huawei Pura 70 Ultra – Credit: Huawei

Huawei Pura 70 Ultra is currently only available in China

We aren’t sure if and when the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra will become available outside of China. It is currently available for pre-order, starting at 9999 CNY which is roughly £1100 (at time of writing.) This means it would be slightly cheaper than the S24 Ultra which currently has a starting RRP of £1249.

Of course this is speculative, but it’s good to get a rough idea of how much the Pura 70 Ultra could set you back.

You might like…

The post Huawei Pura 70 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra: Which Ultra is better? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Kobo Clara Colour vs Kindle Paperwhite: Which e-reader should you get?

Hannah Davies — Tue, 30 Apr 2024 11:13:39 +0000

Rakuten Kobo recently announced its first-ever colour e-readers. The launch included two models, the Kobo Libra Colour and the Kobo Clara Colour.

The Clara Colour is a traditional style e-reader, while the Libra Colour incorporates a digital notetaking feature for annotating texts and jotting down ideas in colour.

Keep reading to learn how the Kobo Clara Colour compares to Amazon’s popular Kindle Paperwhite.

The Kobo Clara Colour has a colour display

The Kobo Clara Colour’s standout feature is its colour display. The 6-inch E Ink Kaleido 3 display is full-colour, making it ideal for flipping through comics and reading books with illustrations.

The colour display also makes it easier to view and organise highlighted passages at a glance as you can highlight words in various colours.

The Kindle Paperwhite has a slightly larger 6.8-inch 16-level greyscale display.

Both the Paperwhite and the Clara Colour support a sharp 300ppi output when viewed in black and white, with the Kobo dropping to 150ppi for colour.

Both e-readers support adjustable warm light, with the Paperwhite allowing you to set a schedule for light changes and the Clara Colour automatically reducing blue light throughout the day with its ComfortLight Pro feature.

Kobo Clara Colour

The Kindle Paperwhite has a longer battery life

If you’re looking for an e-reader that will last a long time between charges, the Kindle Paperwhite is the stronger option. This is likely at least in part due to the fact there’s no colour display to drain the battery faster.

The Kindle Paperwhite offers up to 10 weeks of battery life based on 30 minutes of reading a day with wireless connections turned off and the light setting at 13. The Kobo Clara Colour can deliver up to 42 days of battery life based on 30 minutes of reading a day with wireless connections switched off and the front light set to 30% brightness.

If we assume the brightness settings used in these tests are similar, the Kindle Paperwhite offers a 67% longer battery life or 28 additional days of reading.

The Kobo Clara Colour weighs less in your bag

Both the Kobo Clara Colour and the Kindle Paperwhite are designed to be slim and lightweight, offering a more travel-friendly alternative to stuffing three paperbacks in your carry-on when you go on holiday.

The Clara Colour is the smaller and more lightweight of the two e-readers at 174g and 112 x 160 x 9.2mm. However, the Kindle Paperwhite is the slimmer of the two at 205g and 125 x 174 x 8.1mm.

Both devices are rated IPX8, making them splashproof enough to withstand some poolside reading.

Kindle Paperwhite

The Kindle app has a larger library of books

If a wide variety of books and audiobooks is your priority, you can’t beat the Kindle’s library of more than six million titles (as of March 2018). Amazon hasn’t shared any official numbers since 2018, but it’s likely this number has increased over the last six years.

Kindle users can also visit Audible to purchase audiobooks, while the company’s Kindle Unlimited subscription allows users to access a wide array of e-books, magazines and audiobooks for a monthly fee.

The Kobo app, meanwhile, currently offers more than five million titles to choose from, along with a large collection of audiobooks.

You might like…

The post Kobo Clara Colour vs Kindle Paperwhite: Which e-reader should you get? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Samsung Galaxy A35 vs Samsung Galaxy A55: Which is better?

Jessica Gorringe — Mon, 29 Apr 2024 14:24:55 +0000

Launched simultaneously in March 2024, the Galaxy A35 and Galaxy A55 are Samsung’s newest A series smartphones which are offered as mid-range options.

Although we haven’t tested the Samsung Galaxy A55 yet, we have reviewed the Galaxy A35. We’ve put our review of the A35 against the specs of the A55 and noted the key similarities and differences between the two.

Read on to see how the Galaxy A35 compares to the Galaxy A55 and determine which handset is better for you.

The Galaxy A55 has enhanced Nightography

Unlike the A35, the A55 has enhanced Nightography which Samsung promises takes clearer and more vibrant images in low lighting conditions. This is worth noting as we found that the A35’s ability to take images in low lighting lacking, with our reviewer noting that “even shots with plenty of artificial lighting lack a certain clarity, with a certain softness to them.”

Even so, both the A35 and A55 are equipped with optical image stabilisation (OIS) and video digital image stabilisation (VDIS) which keeps videos smooth even when filming on the move. We found that footage captured with the A35 was “reasonably crisp and steady, courtesy of OIS.”

Finally, both handsets include three cameras on the rear and a front-facing camera, although the resolution of some lenses differs between the phones.

Samsung Galaxy A35

While both have a 50MP main and 5MP macro lens, the A55’s ultra-wide lens is 12MP whereas the A35’s is just 8MP. Our reviewer noted the A35’s 8MP lens “represents a big drop off in quality” with shots appearing “flatter and dimmer than the main sensor, with inferior exposure and detail.”

Both promise years of security upgrades

If you don’t want to worry about upgrading your smartphone for a while, then both the A35 and A55 are great choices. Samsung promises that users will benefit from up to four generations of Android OS and One UI upgrades and a decent five years of security updates too.

In addition, both the A35 and A55 are the first smartphones in Samsung’s A Series to offer access to Samsung Knox Vault. Samsung Knox Vault offers extensive protection against hardware and software attacks and helps protect critical data on a device, including passwords and PINs.

Both handsets are also secured by Samsung Knox, Galaxy’s multi-layer security platform designed to safeguard critical information and protect against malware.

Samsung Galaxy A35

Both promise a two-day battery life

Both the A35 and A55 pack a massive 5000 mAh battery which Samsung claims allows for two-day battery life.

Although we haven’t tested the A55 yet, we were impressed with the A35’s battery life. Our reviewer found on a 16-hour day of lighter usage they were left with 56% of battery left “suggesting genuine two-day potential.” We also found that after 30 minutes of light gaming, the A35 lost just 4% of battery which triumphs over its competitors too.

Despite the promise of a long-lasting battery, both handsets don’t offer as fast charging as other similarly priced handsets, with the A35 taking 85 minutes to charge from 1-100% in our benchmark tests.

The Galaxy A35 is cheaper

The Galaxy A35 is currently the cheaper handset of the two, starting at £339 / €449 for the 8GB memory and 128GB of storage handset. In comparison the A55 is slightly more expensive, starting at £439 / €529 for the model with 8GB memory and 128GB of storage.

You might like…

The post Samsung Galaxy A35 vs Samsung Galaxy A55: Which is better? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iCloud vs Google Drive: Which is better?

Adam Speight — Fri, 26 Apr 2024 11:31:18 +0000

It’s been several years since cloud storage became a large part of our everyday lives, whether that’s at work or needing extra space to back up your devices. But, between iCloud and Google Drive, which should you choose?

Let’s not mess around, it’s likely you may have already been swayed into using Apple’s iCloud if you’re a regular Apple device user while those using Android may be more keen on Google Drive. But, cloud storage goes beyond singular platform use and both of these have their ups and downs for PC and mobile usage. Let’s dive in.

Google Drive is cheaper

Google Drive does a great job of enticing users right off the bat, with 15GB offered for absolutely free. By comparison, Apple’s iCloud only gives you 5GB. As you move up, you’ll find you can get 100GB for £1.59/$1.99 per month, 2TB for £7.99/$9.99 per month and 2TB (with AI Premium) for £18.99 per month with Google Drive.

The Samsung Galaxy S23 is now cheaper than most mid-range phones

Giff Gaff is currently offering Samsung’s 2023 flagship device for just £439, an excellent price for a phone with some cracking features.

Giff Gaff
£439

View Deal

Apple iCloud offers 50GB for £0.99/$0.99 per month, 200GB for £2.99/$2.99 per month, 2TB for £8.99/$9.99 per month, 6TB for £26.99/$29.99 per month and 12TB for £54.99/$59.99 per month.

Both offer different extra features

Both of these cloud solutions give you access to storing your documents, photos and other files so you can access them from anywhere with an internet connection. But, they differ in some of the added benefits they bring.

iCloud homepage

iCloud has extra features that focus on privacy, like iCloud Private Relay, iCloud Keychain, Hide My Email and HomeKit Secure Video.

By comparison, as you move up to higher tiers, Google Drive adds features like 10% off the Google Store, Nest Aware, Fitbit Premium and access to Google Gemini Advanced.

Google Drive offers broad compatibility, but iCloud is best for Apple users

iCloud is designed to work best with Apple devices, so it would certainly not be a good choice for someone without one of those in their lives. But, it does mean it offers strong background syncing across your iPhone, Mac, iPad and more if you do go down that route. You are able to access iCloud through a web browser but it’s far from a comfortable experience.

Google Drive homepage

For Google Drive, it is wonderfully easy to use whether you’re a Mac, Windows, iOS, Android or ChromeOS user. That’s mainly down to the convenience of using Google Drive in a web browser and the native mobile apps available. For Mac and Windows, you can also integrate Drive into those with a desktop app, and this offers local syncing. However, for Apple users, the iCloud integration is superior on a Mac.

Collaboration is easiest with Google Drive

Apple’s iCloud is largely focused on being a storage solution, made for users to access, download and move files. Google Drive, of course, does this too, but its Docs, Sheets, Slides and other apps are deeply integrated into its service.

These apps allow users to easily work with others by sharing access to these documents, making collaboration fluid. If you want a way to share your files with multiple people and work together on projects then Google Drive is the way to go.

You might like…

The post iCloud vs Google Drive: Which is better? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

OnePlus Pad Go vs OnePlus Pad: What’s the difference?

Lewis Painter — Fri, 26 Apr 2024 09:50:00 +0000

OnePlus has announced that the budget-friendly OnePlus Pad Go is set to launch in the UK and Europe, but how does it compare to the regular OnePlus Pad?

While there are a lot of similarities between the two, especially when it comes to overall design and look, there are key differences that might sway your buying decision one way or the other.

We’ve spent a lot of time with the OnePlus Pad, and we’ve gone hands-on with the OnePlus Pad Go, so we’ve got a good idea of what’s on offer from both. Without further ado, here are the key differences between the OnePlus Pad Go and OnePlus Pad.

The OnePlus Pad Go has a smaller screen

The OnePlus Pad Go has a smaller screen than the OnePlus Pad, and while that may sound like a negative at first glance, it does make the OnePlus Pad Go a little more bag-friendly – though admittedly there isn’t much in it, with the Pad Go measuring in at 11.3 inches while the regular Pad comes in at 11.6 inches.

However, in most other metrics, the OnePlus Pad has the better screen of the two. While both utilise IPS LCD tech, the OnePlus Pad is faster, higher res and offers better format compatibility with a 144Hz refresh rate, 2000 x 2800 resolution and support for HDR10+ content.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The OnePlus Pad Go, on the other hand, caps out at 90Hz, and has a slightly lower 1720 x 2408 resolution. Its bezels are also slightly thicker than the OnePlus Pad, but not to a noticeable degree.

The OnePlus Pad is more powerful

Being the more premium of the two tablets, it shouldn’t come as much surprise that the OnePlus Pad has more power under the hood. That comes in the form of the MediaTek Dimenity 8000 coupled with 12GB of RAM.

The OnePlus Pad Go opts for the less powerful MediaTek Helio G99 and 8GB of RAM as standard. While it’s not quite as powerful as its bigger brother, at £299, that’s a pretty tempting combination of specs compared to other similarly priced cheap tablets, and we’ve found in early testing that general performance is pretty smooth, though there is the occasional bit of lag.

The OnePlus Pad has a larger battery

Despite the similar dimensions between the two tablets, the OnePlus Pad has a larger battery – and by quite a bit too. The OnePlus Pad Go boasts a solid 8000mAh battery that’s pretty much in line with the similarly priced competition, while the OnePlus Pad takes it up a notch to 9510mAh.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

But while this suggests that the OnePlus Pad will offer better battery life, the less power-hungry chipset from the OnePlus Pad Go could mean it lasts a little longer between charges. It will take a while to charge up though, supporting just 33W charging compared to the 67W charging from the regular Pad.

The OnePlus Pad Go is cheaper

Finally, as we’ve alluded to throughout this comparison, the OnePlus Pad Go is the cheaper of the two tablets with an RRP of just £299, putting it up against the likes of the Amazon Fire Max 11.

The OnePlus Pad, on the other hand, has an RRP of £449, making it £150 more expensive than the Pad Go.

What confuses this somewhat is the fact that OnePlus itself is selling the regular OnePlus Pad at a discounted price, down to £379 at the time of writing, which considerably muddies the water between the two. If you can get so much more for just £80 more, why opt for the Go? That remains to be seen.

You might like…

The post OnePlus Pad Go vs OnePlus Pad: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Huawei Pura 70 Pro vs Pura 70 Ultra: What’s the difference?

Hannah Davies — Thu, 25 Apr 2024 14:34:03 +0000

Huawei recently announced four new smartphones, the Pura 70, Pura 70 Pro, Pura 70 Pro+, and Pura 70 Ultra.

The four handsets are currently exclusive to China, but that doesn’t mean they won’t launch overseas in the future. We certainly hope they will as we’re keen to get our hands on the Ultra’s large retractable camera.

This particular camera can only be found on the top-end model, but that doesn’t mean the Pura 70, 70 Pro, and 70 Pro+ aren’t set up to be fantastic smartphones in and of themselves.

We’ve gathered all of the biggest differences between the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra and Huawei Pura 70 Pro into this guide based on what we heard at the China launch.

The Huawei Pura 70 Ultra has a faux leather design

Visually, the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra stands out next to the Pura 70 Pro thanks to its faux leather material and unique embossed diamond pattern. The Pura 70 Pro features a more subtle glass back.

The two phones also come in two different sets of colours, with the Pura 70 Ultra available in black, white, green, and brown, and the Pura 70 Pro available in black, white, and purple finishes.

Otherwise, the two phones share the same dimensions, similar weights, matching aluminium frames, and the same IP68 dust and waterproofing.

Final Fantasy 16 now 57% off

Final Fantasy 16, the latest installment of the iconic action RPG franchise, is now available for just £29.99 on PS5

Amazon
Was £69.99
Now £29.99

View Deal

The Huawei Pura 70 Ultra features a retractable camera

One of the standout features of the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra is its retractable 50-megapixel (f/1.6 – f/4.0) camera.

The moving camera appears to make space for the large 1-inch sensor without creating an excessively bulky camera module. It has also been tested for a total of 300,000 retractions.

The Pura 70 Ultra also takes advantage of a second 50-megapixel telephoto lens with 3.5x optical zoom, and a 40-megapixel ultra-wide angle camera. Turn the phone over and you’ll find a 13-megapixel punch-hole camera at the top of the display for selfies and video calls.

The Pura 70 Pro also includes three cameras led by a 50-megapixel (f/1.4 – f/4.0) non-retractable lens and followed by a 48-megapixel telephoto lens with 3.5x optical zoom, and a 12.5-inch ultra-wide angle camera. The phone features the same 13-megapixel selfie camera as the Ultra model.

Huawei Pura 70 Ultra

The Huawei Pura 70 Ultra packs a bigger battery

Moving on to the battery, the Huawei Pura 70 Ultra takes advantage of a large 5200 mAh battery, along with support for 100W wired charging and 80W wireless charging.

The Pura 70 Pro is fitted with a smaller 5050 mAh battery but takes advantage of the same fast 100W wired charging and 80W wireless charging speeds.

The Huawei Pura 70 Pro is much cheaper

As you might expect, the retractable camera tech comes at a higher price. If you wanted to get your hands on the Pura 70 Ultra in China you’d need to spend at least CNY 9999, which works out at around £1104.

The Pura 70 Pro, meanwhile, starts at CNY 7999. This equals about £883, making the Pro more than £200 cheaper if our estimates are correct.

Of course, there’s no saying exactly how much these phones will cost if they enter the UK market but this might give us an idea of the price difference between the two models.

You might like…

The post Huawei Pura 70 Pro vs Pura 70 Ultra: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Snapdragon X Plus vs Apple M3: Worth the wait?

Adam Speight — Wed, 24 Apr 2024 13:00:00 +0000

The new Snapdragon X Plus has been announced. It’s another new chip from Qualcomm aimed at taking on the Apple M-series and rejuvenating Windows laptops. Here’s how it compares with the Apple M3.

Qualcomm’s venture into laptop chips has been a long time coming but it will all begin over the next few months. Now, though, we know it isn’t all about the Snapdragon X Elite. The company has revealed a new chip that sits just below its flagship, the X Plus. The new chips may see Windows laptops finally catch up to Macs when it comes to their potent combination of performance and efficiency but the jury’s still out. Let’s see what the key differences are.

Qualcomm should win for multi-threaded CPU and NPU performance

We’ve tested the new Apple M3 in our full MacBook Air M3 review and we’re mightily impressed. By comparison, with laptops sporting the new Qualcomm chips yet to be released, we have to reserve judgement on their capabilities. But, on paper, Qualcomm is touting boosted capabilities with the X Plus compared with the M3.

Image Credit (Qualcomm)

The Snapdragon X Plus is said to offer 10% faster multi-threaded CPU performance compared with the Apple M3. So, in theory, X Plus laptops should provide the performance and efficiency of multitasking and other multi-threaded workloads compared with M3 devices. It’s worth noting the X Plus can be equipped with more memory than the M3, up to 64GB versus 24GB for a Mac.

Further, the X Plus is set to offer a whopping 45 TOPS of AI-focused NPU power. The Apple M3 only comes in at 18 TOPS. However, it all comes down to how it’s used.

Apple M3 offers higher CPU speed and a 3nm process

Qualcomm may claim it has the edge on multi-threaded performance but the Apple M3 wins on some key fundamentals. The Snapdragon X Plus offers up to 3.4GHz processing speeds across its 10 CPU cores, while the Apple M3 can reach up to 4.05GHz. The M3 is also built upon a smaller 3nm process than the 4nm X Plus, which typically means boosted efficiency.

Apple MacBook Air M3 – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Snapdragon X Plus should offer more choice

Given Qualcomm isn’t in the business of making its own laptops, the Snapdragon X Plus is set to debut across different Windows manufacturers. We’re expected to see the new Snapdragon laptop chips across Microsoft Surface models while other popular manufacturers like Asus, Acer, Lenovo and HP may well be involved but that’s unconfirmed. Comparatively, you can only get the M3 on devices made by Apple.

Battery life remains an unknown

Admittedly, it isn’t an easy task for Qualcomm to tout the battery life capabilities of the Snapdragon X Plus as manufacturers will be able to pair it with differing battery sizes and chassis with varying efficiency capabilities. However, with a huge benefit of moving to Arm being the additional battery life that a more efficient chip can bring, it remains a key point of curiosity.

Image Credit (Qualcomm)

Qualcomm has said that the chip “can go longer on a single charge with up to multi-day battery life” but that will need to be tested when we get our hands on one of these devices.

We know the MacBook Air M3 can offer up to 18 hours of battery life from our review testing, while Qualcomm has been rather coy relating to its new chips. The only indicative comparison we have is through Qualcomm comparing the X Elite with an Intel Core 7 155H chip. Qualcomm says it offers 43% longer battery life for local video playback, 58% longer for web browsing and 40% longer for Office 365 apps.

Asus Zenbook 14 OLED – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

In our testing of the Asus Zenbook 14 OLED that includes the aforementioned Intel chip, we found that it managed up to 13 hours of battery life. So, there’s potential that Snapdragon X Elite laptops could line up fairly nicely with the Apple M3 in terms of battery life, but we don’t yet know if the X Plus differentiates in that regard from its flagship stablemate. And, given we’ve yet to test any new Snapdragon devices and they’ll differ greatly between different machines, take all this with a pinch of salt.

You might like…

The post Snapdragon X Plus vs Apple M3: Worth the wait? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Snapdragon X Plus vs Snapdragon X Elite: What's the difference?

Ryan Jones — Wed, 24 Apr 2024 13:00:00 +0000

Qualcomm is gearing up to take on Apple, AMD and Intel in the laptop space this year, with the launch of the new Snapdragon X Elite and Snapdragon X Plus chips.

Both of these new laptop chips are based on Arm architecture, as the company hopes to replicate the success of Apple Silicon.

But what are the differences between the Snapdragon X Plus and Snapdragon X Elite? We’ve created this comparison guide to highlight the key specs.

Snapdragon X Elite has more processing power

We haven’t had a chance to test either of these laptop processors just yet, but by judging the specs sheet, it looks like the Snapdragon X Elite will offer more processing power.

The Snapdragon X Elite features 12 cores up to a frequency speed of 3.8Ghz, whereas the Snapdragon X Plus packs in 10 cores up to 3.4GHz.

This means that the Elite not only has two extra cores to aid with multi-tasking, but can also reach a higher clock speed, which will have a big impact on overall performance.

Qualcomm has also announced that both chips will support up to 64GB RAM, although this will be dependent on the configuration options for each laptop.

Snapdragon X Elite has a stronger GPU performance

The two Snapdragon processors feature an Adreno GPU, which will be important for graphics-intensive workloads such as gaming and content creation.

However, the specs of the Adreno GPU do differ between the two Snapdragon processors. For the Snapdragon X Plus, the GPU performance is capable of up to 3.8 TFLOPs. As for the Snapdragon X Elite, it has three different flavours depending on which laptop you go for, with two limited to 3.8 TFLOPs, and the third capable of up to 4.6 TFLOPs.

This means the Snapdragon X Elite has a higher performance ceiling when it comes to graphics performance. It’s important to note that these are just integrated graphics though, and so are unlikely to be able to compete with discrete options from Nvidia and AMD. Expect it to be more of a rival to the Apple M3 chip rather than components designed for gaming machines.

Credit: Qualcomm

Snapdragon X Plus shares the same AI performance

Laptop makers are investing a lot into AI this year, so it’s no surprise to see that Qualcomm is making sure its new Snapdragon chips are also up to snuff in this area. Both chips feature a Qualcomm Hexagon NPU to maximise AI performance.

Surprisingly, the Snapdragon X Plus seemingly matches the Snapdragon X Elite for AI performance, with both offering up to 45 TOPS (Trillions Operations per Second). Qualcomm claims this is the world’s fastest NPU for laptops.

What does this all mean though? A high AI performance will speed up processes that utilise artificial intelligence. Qualcomm confirms that its chips will support Windows Studio Effects, which can help to blur your background and block out unwanted sounds during a video call. Plenty of more AI-powered apps are expected to arrive in the near future too, putting Qualcomm in a very strong position.

Both processors support Wi-Fi 7

Wi-Fi 7 is the latest wireless technology, offering peak rates up to 40 Gbps when using the 6GHz band. It also supports new features such as Multi-Link Operation, which allows users to use multiple bands to connect to a single device in order to maximise performance and efficiency.

Wi-Fi 7 devices are still thin on the ground, but Qualcomm has confirmed that its new chips will support the new wireless technology. Of course, you will need a Wi-Fi 7 router in order to reap these benefits, which still costs a lot of money.

Fortunately, there will be backwards compatibility for Wi-Fi 6E and Wi-Fi 6 too, so your laptop will still be able to make use of older wireless setups before you eventually make the upgrade.

You might like…

The post Snapdragon X Plus vs Snapdragon X Elite: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

OnePlus Pad Go vs Apple iPad: Which should you buy?

Hannah Davies — Tue, 23 Apr 2024 14:00:00 +0000

OnePlus recently unveiled its first mid-range tablet designed for entertainment – the OnePlus Pad Go.

The affordable tablet packs some impressive specs, including a 2.4K display, Dolby Atmos audio and a large battery. The question is how does the new mid-ranger compare to Apple’s classic iPad now that the latter is in its 10th generation?

The OnePlus Pad Go has a bigger screen

If you’re looking for a spacious screen, the OnePlus Pad Go’s display is your winner.

The 11.35-inch screen has a comparable resolution to the 10th Gen iPad but is slightly bigger and features a faster 90Hz refresh rate than the 60Hz refresh rate on the iPad. This means you can expect a smoother viewing experience whether you’re streaming a movie or browsing the web.

One area in which the iPad does come out on top is brightness. Apple claims the iPad stands at 500 nits of brightness, whereas the OnePlus Pad Go falls short of this at 400 nits.

OnePlus Pad Go

The Apple iPad packs larger cameras

The Apple iPad (10th Gen) comes with two 12-megapixel cameras – one on the rear for snapping photos and scanning documents and a second on the front of the tablet for taking selfies and joining calls.

The OnePlus Pad Go also features a front and a rear camera, but both of these are 8-megapixel sensors.

The iPad also brings Apple-exclusive features, including FaceTime to chat with friends and Centre Stage to ensure you remain in the frame during calls.

The OnePlus Pad Go has a longer battery life

The OnePlus Pad Go is fitted with a large 8000 mAh battery for up to 40 hours of music playback. OnePlus claims the tablet will also get you through a full day of work and play on a single charge.

On top of this, the tablet offers a 514-hour standby time and supports fast 33W SuperVOOC charging.

Apple isn’t as open about its battery sizes, but the iPad (10th Gen) is reportedly by a 7606 mAh battery. Apple says this should get you through 10 hours of web serving and video streaming, while the 20W charger in the box isn’t as fast as the OnePlus Pad Go’s fast charger.

Apple iPad

The cellular configuration of the iPad supports 5G

Both the Apple iPad (10th Gen) and the OnePlus Pad Go are available in Wi-Fi and cellular configurations. This makes it much easier to use your tablet on the go without worrying about finding a public Wi-Fi network or connecting to the hotspot on your phone.

However, only the iPad supports 5G, the latest and fastest cellular technology. The OnePlus Pad Go sticks with an outdated 4G connection. OnePlus has likely made this decision to keep costs down, but if you’re used to browsing on 5G you might find the OnePlus Pad Go to be too slow.

The OnePlus Pad Go is significantly cheaper

Storage and RAM also affect price, though the OnePlus Pad Go is cheaper across the board.

The iPad (10th Gen) starts at £499 for 64GB of storage or £679 for 256GB without adding cellular data to your plan. The OnePlus Pad Go, meanwhile, starts at £299/€329 for up to 256GB storage.

You might like…

The post OnePlus Pad Go vs Apple iPad: Which should you buy? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Razer Kishi Ultra vs Razer Kishi V2 Pro: What's new?

Adam Speight — Tue, 23 Apr 2024 11:29:45 +0000

Whether it’s more traditional mobile gaming or the relatively new avenue of on-the-go game streaming, mobile controllers are attracting an evergrowing interest. Razer’s latest, the Kishi Ultra, takes aim at that market with a PC twist too. But, how does it compare with the mobile-focused Kishi V2 Pro?

Razer remains the brand for devices that toe the line between high performance and lifestyle luxury. Its more gaming-focused options take the luxury aspect a tad less seriously but they can still offer high-end capabilities. The new Razer Kishi Ultra is the company’s attempt to make a serious controller for mobile (and PC) gaming all in one package.

The proposition is an intriguing one, giving players one controller to get used to across multiple platforms if they’re avid mobile and PC players. We’ve compared it with its previous top-of-the-range mobile controller, the Kishi V2 Pro. Let’s dive in.

Better features, better value

Right off the bat, it’s intriguing to see that the new Razer Kishi Ultra doesn’t cost that much more than the Kishi V2 Pro that it’s surpassing, coming in at £150/$150 versus £130/$130.

This Galaxy S23 Plus deal takes £450 off the launch price

Affordable mobile network Giff Gaff is currently offering the Samsung Galaxy S23 Plus for a mere £599, around a £450 reduction over the RRP the device was launched at last year.

Giffgaff
‘Like new’ refurbished
£599

View Deal

So, what are you getting? First off, the Kishi Ultra features Razer’s latest haptic technology. The Kishi V2 Pro does tout HyperSense Haptics but it’s only the new controller that offers up the brand’s latest and greatest Razer Sensa HD Haptics, which the company touts are “high-fidelity haptics that are stronger, more detailed, and more nuanced than traditional console vibrations”.

Razer Kishi Ultra – Image Credit (Razer)

The buttons themselves are also what Razer calls its Mecha-Tactile Action Buttons, offering boosted responsiveness while maintaining comfort. On top of that, the Kishi Ultra also offers thumbstick sensitivity adjustment through its Razer Nexus app. Both those are lacking on the Kishi V2 Pro.

Kishi Ultra works with tablets and PCs

Razer’s Kishi range has been around for a few years now and it’s been all about mobile gaming thus far, with gaming outside of that left to its more fully-fledged controller options like the Wolverine series. However, the Kishi Ultra is offering a hybrid option. Alongside working with the iPhone 15 series, Samsung Galaxy S23 series, Google Pixel 6/7/8, the Razer Edge and some other Android devices, there are two new interesting possibilities.

Razer Kishi V2 Pro – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

First, this larger controller can accommodate an iPad Mini (6th Gen) or other 8-inch Android tablets (running Android 12 or higher), making for a larger screen on-the-go mobile gaming experience. Then, if you like mobile gaming and would like to use the same controller for your PC gaming too, the Kishi Ultra can be connected through a USB-C cable to offer a wired option. All that means this could be your “everything” controller if you’re an avid PC and mobile gamer.

The Kishi V2 Pro is smaller and lighter

The Kishi Ultra is a serious bit of gaming kit and, expectedly, that means it brings more substantial dimensions than the Kishi V2 Pro. The new handheld comes in at 266g while measuring 110.8 x 244.8 x 64.3mm (when collapsed). The Kishi V2 Pro is much trimmer at 138g and 92.2 x 180.7 x 33.9mm. So, while the Kishi Ultra is far from a hefty option, the V2 Pro is the one to go for if you’re pushed for space in your bag and just need a device with a sole mobile gaming focus.

You might like…

The post Razer Kishi Ultra vs Razer Kishi V2 Pro: What's new? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Lenovo Yoga vs Lenovo ThinkPad: What's the difference?

Adam Speight — Mon, 22 Apr 2024 11:53:06 +0000

Lenovo has several sub-brands. Some of these are drastically different from others, while some feature some crossover. Lenovo Yoga and Lenovo ThinkPad represent the pinnacle of the brand’s premium devices. But, the latter offers a business-focused slant. Let’s break down what this means.

Not only does Lenovo have plenty of sub-brands but they’ve evolved and changed over the years. Yoga was once synonymous with thin-and-light 360-hinge laptops while ThinkPad was the plain and simple business machine. But, now, Yoga has branched out and some ThinkPads offer quite the dose of style. Here are the key points in ThinkPad vs Yoga.

Price

The Lenovo Yoga and Lenovo ThinkPad ranges span a huge range of prices so there is no “cheaper” or “more expensive” set of products in simple terms. The Yoga range can comfortably exceed a couple of thousand pounds, dollars or euros with the likes of its Yoga Pro and Yoga Book devices. The ThinkPad has models across its X, T and P-series variants that can all reach just as high of a price, along with its foldable X1 Fold laptop.

Asus Vivobook S 15 OLED Slashed by £300, Now Just £599

Save £300 on the Asus Vivobook S 15 OLED on Currys. Now only £599, experience excellent value with this incredible deal.

Currys
Save £300
£599

View Deal

The current cheapest ThinkPad on the UK Lenovo website starts at £637 for the ThinkPad E16, whereas the cheapest Yoga comes in at £649. The highest starting ThinkPad price is £4,389 for the X1 Fold, with the equivalent Yoga being the latest Yoga Book 9i at £2,011.50.

Taking a broad view at these ranges, ThinkPad models do often command an extra premium for the business-friendly features they offer, so those with standard consumer needs will typically find slightly more value in the Yoga. On the other hand, Yoga devices sometimes bring an added price for flashier features compared with the typically more functional ThinkPad.

Design and Screen

With such a broad range, prices and specifications can often line up quite a bit across Lenovo Yoga and Lenovo ThinkPad models, so it’s the design where the differences are most plain to see. The Lenovo Yoga typically offers all-aluminium finishes on its devices while the ThinkPad comes with that matte black look more often than not — and that signature red trackpoint in the middle of the keyboard too. The ThinkPad range focuses more on durability and reliability while Yoga brings the extra slice of luxury.

Lenovo Yoga Book 9i – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

For a long time, “Yoga” meant you’d be getting a Lenovo laptop that was of the 2-in-1 variety, offering a 360-hinge. This even extended into a crossover between these two ranges with a ThinkPad Yoga, which added a 360-hinge to the more business-focused series. However, in recent times, there have been plenty of Yoga models that no longer offer the 2-in-1 design, with the sub-range broadening its remit to broadly represent a stylish yet high-end series of laptops.

Again, with such a large amount of choice across these ranges, there are few hard and fast differences across the series. But, Yoga models do typically err on the side of being thinner options than their ThinkPad equivalents that typically focus on function over form. But, both ranges offer plenty of lightweight picks.

Lenovo ThinkPad X1 Fold – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Both the ThinkPad and Yoga ranges offer interesting display options, from standard IPS LED to glossy and matte options. You’ll even find some OLED models, however, only the Yoga Pro series offers up Mini LED display picks. As such, if immense brightness and high-end local dimming are your thing, then Yoga represents the best option.

Specs and Performance

Both the Lenovo Yoga and Lenovo ThinkPad ranges offer machines that have a productivity focus, a creative focus or a serious production focus. Previously, the ThinkPad would’ve been the go-to for graphically intensive work when choosing between the two, however, the introduction of the Yoga Pro series has added that dimension to the more stylish sub-range too.

Lenovo ThinkPad X13s – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Despite offering a wide choice of specifications that makes it hard to differentiate these series in that department, the ThinkPad does bring its business-focused offerings. As such, security and encryption are more of a priority. Along with more traditional chip options across the Yoga and ThinkPad series, such as standard AMD Ryzen and Intel Core picks, ThinkPad offers Intel vPro and AMD Ryzen Pro. These are aimed at businesses, with boosted encryption facilities.

Verdict

The Lenovo Yoga and Lenovo ThinkPad have become harder to separate in terms of raw specifications in recent years, with the Yoga becoming more performant while the ThinkPad has gotten more stylish and versatile.

However, the crux of the decision remains the same, ThinkPad will likely be the go-to for most business-focused users with enhanced security features as well as a typically more reliable and robust design. On the other hand, those considering a Yoga likely want something with that extra dose of luxury.

You might like…

The post Lenovo Yoga vs Lenovo ThinkPad: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Kobo Libra Colour vs Kobo Clara Colour: Which one should you buy?

Hannah Davies — Mon, 22 Apr 2024 08:20:00 +0000

Rakuten Kobo’s first-ever colour e-readers – the Kobo Libra Colour and the Kobo Clara Colour – have arrived on the scene.

Both e-readers take advantage of faster 2Ghz processors, colourful E Ink Kaleido 3 displays and IPX8 water resistance, making them a great choice for reading the latest bestsellers and BookTok picks next to the pool.

However, there are also a handful of differences to note. Keep reading to learn more about how these vibrant Kobo e-readers compare.

The Kobo Libra Colour has a bigger screen

When it comes to their respective displays, the most obvious difference lies in the size. The Kobo Libra Colour features a larger 7-inch E Ink Kaleido 3 display with a 1264 x 1680 resolution, while the Kobo Clara Colour has a smaller 6-inch E Ink Kaleido 3 display with a 1448 x 1072 resolution.

Despite these differences, both e-readers boast a sharp 300ppi output when displaying content in black and white, along with a 150ppi colour output for bringing illustrations and book covers to life.

Both e-readers also support ComfortLight Pro for reducing blue light throughout the day and a dark mode for more comfortable reading in low-light environments.

Kobo Libra Colour

The Kobo Libra Colour is compatible with the Kobo Stylus

If you like the idea of scribbling in the margins of your favourite books, annotating texts for class, or jotting down ideas in a digital notebook, the Kobo Libra Colour is the model for you.

The e-reader is compatible with the Kobo Stylus 2, making highlighting texts and planning your day feel more natural.

The Kobo Stylus 2 is sold separately, meaning you’ll want to factor in an additional £69.99 to cover the cost of the pen. This will take your total up to £269.98 – almost twice that of the £139.99 Kobo Clara Colour.

The Kobo Clara Colour has a longer battery life

Despite its smaller 1500 mAh battery, the Kobo Clara Colour actually boasts the longest battery life of the two e-readers, allowing it to last for up to 42 days on a single charge.

This is based on 30 minutes of reading per day with the front light set to 30% brightness and Wi-Fi and Bluetooth switched off.

The Kobo Libra Colour has a much larger 2050 mAh battery for provides up to 40 days of battery life with the same settings.

Kobo Clara Colour

The Kobo Libra Colour includes more storage

The Kobo Libra Colour has a higher storage capacity, meaning you can download more books and save all of your notes to the e-reader.

The Libra Colour comes with 32GB of storage which equates to about 24,000 books. The Kobo Clara Colour features half that capacity at 16GB, allowing you to save around 12,000 books.

Regardless of their differences, 12,000 is still a huge library of books to carry around on one device.

Meanwhile, notes written on the Libra Colour can be backed up to the Kobo Cloud and easily accessed on other devices using Dropbox and Google Drive. The Clara Colour includes no integrated cloud storage.

You might like…

The post Kobo Libra Colour vs Kobo Clara Colour: Which one should you buy? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Nothing Ear (a) vs Nothing Ear: What’s the difference?

Hannah Davies — Thu, 18 Apr 2024 10:45:00 +0000

Nothing has announced the two latest additions to its audio line-up with two new pairs of true wireless earbuds, the Nothing Ear and the Nothing Ear (a).

Both earbuds boast unique designs, similar features and support for noise cancelling. However, there are also a good number of differences to note.

We’ve highlighted all the biggest differences between the Nothing Ear and the Nothing Ear (a) when it comes to design, sound, battery life and more.

The Nothing Ear (a) comes in a vibrant new colour

The Nothing Ear (a) is the first Nothing audio product to be available in a third colour that isn’t black or white.

The yellow model features the same black tail as the black version of the earbud, but the top section and the ear tip are a playful yellow. This allows the yellow earbuds to stand out among Nothing’s line-up.

Like the other two Nothing Ear (a) colourways, the Nothing Ear comes in two classic finishes – black and white.

Nothing Ear (a)

The Nothing Ear has a ceramic diaphragm

Nothing tested dozens of driver diaphragm materials before settling on a ceramic diaphragm, which it found provided the best frequency response and overall sound clarity.

The Nothing Ear (a) is fitted with a PMI and TPU diaphragm, which are both cheaper to produce and easier to work with when designing a pair of earbuds.

The Nothing Ear supports Advanced Equaliser

The Nothing Ear supports the Advanced Equaliser feature found in the Nothing X app.

Advanced EQ allows you to tune music to your tastes, create separate profiles for different genres, and share your EQ settings with friends and followers by generating a unique QR code.

There’s also the Personal Sound Profile feature, which uses the Ear Tip Fit Test designed to help you identify the correct ear tip size for your ears by playing a sound. The Personal Sound Profile takes the results of this test a step further by adjusting the equaliser settings to fit the frequency spectrum of your listening.

While the Ear Tip Fit Test is supported on the Nothing Ear (a), neither the Advanced EQ nor the Personal Sound Profile features are available on the (a) earbuds.

Nothing Ear

The Nothing Ear (a) has a longer battery life

The Nothing Ear (a) has the upper hand when it comes to battery life. The earbuds offer 9.5 hours of playback with ANC off or 5.5 hours switched on. That’s 42.5 hours (ANC off) or 24.5 hours (ANC on) including the charging case.

The Nothing Ear, on the other hand, support 8.5 hours of playback with ANC off or 5.2 hours switched on, or 40.5 hours (ANC off) or 24 hours (ANC on) including the case. That puts the Nothing Ear (a) at a slight advantage in this arena.

Both earbuds support fast charging with 10 minutes plugged in offering around 10 hours of listening. However, only the Nothing Ear offer the convenience of 2.5W wireless charging.

You might like…

The post Nothing Ear (a) vs Nothing Ear: What’s the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Nothing Ear vs Nothing Ear (2): What's the difference?

Ryan Jones — Thu, 18 Apr 2024 10:45:00 +0000

The Nothing Ear headphones were unveiled this week and, despite the confusing name, serve as the successor to the Nothing Ear (2).

This means the Nothing Ear are essentially the Nothing Ear (3) in all but name, with numerous upgrades making for a more tantalising package.

But what are the key differences between the new Nothing Ear and the older Nothing Ear (2)? We’ve created this guide to highlight all of the biggest changes, so keep on reading to find out.

Longer battery life

The new Nothing Ear has seen a boost to the battery life, with Nothing claiming it can last up to 5.2 hours with ANC activated, whereas the Nothing Ear (2) can only last 4 hours with the same settings.

If you’re happy to disable ANC, then you can stretch the battery up to 8.5 hours, while the Nothing Ear (2) is restricted to just 6.3 hours.

The bundled case will also charge the headphones on the go, providing an extra 32 hours worth of battery. This totals up to a remarkable 40.5 hours of battery before you’ll need to plug the case back into the mains to charge. For comparison, the Nothing Ear (2) has a combined battery life, with the charging case included, of 36 hours.

Enhanced audio

In Nothing’s own words, it has “evolved our technology to take your music to new realms” when designing the new Nothing Ear. The company claims that highers will now go higher, and lowers will sink deeper.

When digging into the specs, it’s clear that Nothing has actually reduced the size of the headphones’ drivers, with Nothing Ear (2) sporting 11.6mm custom drivers, while the newer Nothing Ear features 11m drivers instead. However, Nothing says it is using ceramic to develop the drivers this time, which the company says packs more richness for the most authentic sound when compared to the graphene and polyurethane drivers of the Nothing Ear (2).

Nothing also says that it has taken the dual chamber of the Nothing Ear (2) and added two extra vents, which should apparently improve airflow and reduce distortion.

We were impressed with audio quality when reviewing the Nothing Ear, with our reviewer saying: “Overall, the Ear present a balanced and coherent sound in a confident manner, unifying the frequency range well and making up for in rapidity what they lack in outright wallop.”

Improved noise cancellation

Noise cancellation is quickly becoming one of the most sought after headphone features, allowing you to block out the outside world and focus on your music. The Nothing Ear (2) featured ANC (active noise cancellation) technology, but in our review we said the performance was “nothing special” at blocking out external noise.

Nothing has made sure to improve upon the ANC for the new Nothing Ear, making the technology 1.8x stronger by increasing the maximum volume of noise it can block out from 40dB to 45dB. It’s good to see the noise cancellation being improved upon, but there is a big caveat.

During our testing of the Nothing Ear we found that activating ANC would actually impact the audio quality of music. Our reviewer wrote: “With ANC on, suddenly that low-frequency substance is apparent and the almost hectic momentum of the Ear sound is tempered somewhat.”

New Clear Voice Technology

Nothing’s Clear Voice Technology 2.0 was very handy when taking calls with the Nothing Ear (2) headphones, as it helps to reduce unwanted backward noise for the caller so they can hear your voice more clearly. When we reviewed the Nothing Ear (2) our reviewer said this technology was “very well implemented, and call quality is good at either end of a conversation.”

And yet despite us being pleased with the call quality, Nothing has made sure to upgrade to the new Clear Voice Technology 3.0 for the Nothing Ear. Nothing says it has trained the AI’s algorithm to be more effective at suppressing everyday sounds, while it has also implemented a new ‘talk mic’ design which should result in less obstruction when speaking on a call. Extra holes have even been added to the headphone’s stem to give wind a better pathway and prevent it from causing disturbance to your calls.

With all of these tweaks combined, Nothing believes that it has reduced call interference by 60% for the new Nothing Ear headphones compared to the Nothing Ear (2).

You might like…

The post Nothing Ear vs Nothing Ear (2): What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Nothing Ear vs AirPods Pro: What's the difference?

Lewis Painter — Thu, 18 Apr 2024 10:45:00 +0000

Nothing has just revealed the rebranded Nothing Ear, a follow-up to the popular Ear (2) – but how do Nothing’s semi-transparent buds compare to Apple’s top-end AirPods Pro?

While the Nothing Ear and second-gen AirPods Pro share several key features, including ANC, pinch controls, and wireless charging, there are significant differences between them that will likely sway your purchase decision.

With that in mind, here are some of the key differences between the Nothing Ear and the second-gen AirPods Pro.

Nothing Ear support Hi-Res audio

With Apple Music Lossless widely available as part of the standard Apple Music subscription, many had hoped that the AirPods Pro 2 would support wireless Hi-Res audio playback to take advantage of it – but that’s sadly not the case, utilising the same AAC codec as previous AirPods. Don’t get us wrong, they still sound superb, but you won’t be able to fully enjoy the playback of high-bitrate songs.

For that, you’ll need the Nothing Ear. The buds support LHDC 5.0 and LDAC Bluetooth codecs for high-resolution wireless streaming. More specifically, the buds can reach up to 1Mbps 24 bit/192kHz with LHDC 5.0 and up to 990kbps and up to 24 bit/96kHz with LDAC, making good use of Apple Music Lossless, Tidal and other lossless streaming platforms.

The catch is that the device you’re connected to must also support LHDC 5.0 or LDAC Bluetooth codecs. There is sporadic support on the Android side of things, including Nothing’s own Phone (2) and Phone (2a), but you won’t be able to take advantage if you’ve got an iPhone.

AirPods Pro offer smarter noise cancellation

Both the AirPods Pro and Nothing Ear offer noise cancellation tech that helps to dim the outside world and let you enjoy your tunes, but there are big differences between the two.

Let’s start with the Nothing Ear. The company has improved the noise cancellation tech compared to the older Ear 2 (yes, the naming convention is confusing!) by 13%, able to cancel sound at up to 45dB. It also has adaptive ANC modes, comprised of low, medium and high, to correspond to different environments, and the buds will change between these automatically for the best ANC performance available.

The AirPods Pro, on the other hand, offer some of the best noise cancellation tech from in-ear buds that this writer has used. But it’s not just how good the AirPods Pro are at quietening the world around you, but the tech that goes into them.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

For one, the AirPods Pro monitors external sound in real-time to detect any particularly loud frequencies and will dim them accordingly – that’s in addition to the regular ANC that tends to focus on low-end frequencies, by the way.

This isn’t just exclusive to the ANC mode either, also available in the transparency mode, allowing you to hear the environment around you without the deafening tones of cars rushing by, roadworks and the like.

They also offer an adaptive mode that essentially blends ANC and transparency modes, switching between the two dynamically if your environment reaches above the 85dB mark, and they can also ramp up environmental sound if they detect that you’re speaking. It’s an impressive feature that means you rarely need to manually switch between ANC and transparency mode.

AirPods Pro offer smart spatial playback

Apple’s smart spatial audio playback is arguably one of the key reasons to invest in AirPods Pro over similar earbuds if you’ve got an iPhone.

That starts with virtual surround sound that simulates a virtual surround sound environment, creating the illusion that sound is coming from all around you with directional audio – but plenty of high-end headphones do that.

The AirPods Pro take it to the next level with head tracking that uses the buds’ built-in gyroscope and accelerometer to track the movement of your head and adjust audio positioning accordingly. That means that, if you turn your head, the direction of the audio will shift to match.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

That works particularly well with the Dynamic Audio Positioning tech, which adjusts the position of audio sources based on what you’re listening to. If you’re watching a movie on Apple TV with a pair of AirPods Pro connected, voices will appear to come from the direction of your TV, while environmental sounds, like the sound of a helicopter, will come from above.

Combined, the AirPods Pro offer an impressively immersive spatial audio experience, though as with most Apple products, the audio tech is only available on supported iPhones, iPads, Macs and other Apple accessories.

On the flip side, the Nothing Ear doesn’t officially offer any kind of spatial audio conversion tech, though several Android manufacturers, including OnePlus and Samsung, offer phone-powered spatial audio when using headphones. It’s not as good as Apple’s offering, but it’s a solid middle ground.

Nothing Ear offer more audio features

The AirPods Pro are pretty smart, with adaptive transparency modes, advanced noise cancellation and spatial audio support, but the Nothing Ear take the win when it comes to the sheer number of features.

Most are available via the Nothing X companion app across iOS and Android, and enable features like a Low Lag Mode that reduces latency to less than 120ms to reduce lag when playing mobile games, as well as customisable pinch controls, Bass Enhancement mode, an advanced EQ and even a personal sound profile to tailor playback to your hearing.

Nothing Ear are cheaper

The AirPods Pro may have the upper hand when it comes to more advanced TWS earbud features, but they’re also double the price of the Nothing Ear, coming in at a not-insignificant £229/$249.

The Nothing Ear, on the other hand, cost £129/$149 – still very much a premium set of earbuds, but £100/$100 less than Apple’s option.

Apple’s second-gen AirPods Pro are readily available to buy now, while the Nothing Ear buds are up for pre-order right now and will be released on 22 April 2024.

You might like…

The post Nothing Ear vs AirPods Pro: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Insta360 X4 vs Insta360 X3: Does the new action cam reign supreme?

Thomas Deehan — Tue, 16 Apr 2024 13:00:00 +0000

Insta360’s latest 360-degree action camera is here but how does it stack up against its already excellent predecessor? Let’s take a look.

Insta360 changed the game when it brought the Insta360 X3 to market in late 2022. Not only did the action camera represent a massive improvement over the One X2, but it also managed to leapfrog similar offerings from GoPro and DJI in several key areas. With that in mind, Insta360 was always going to have a tough job on its hands with an eventual follow-up.

Now that the Insta360 X4 is here however, we know exactly how the company has decided to focus its attention where upgrades are concerned, and there’s a fair bit that potential adopters should be aware of. With that in mind, here’s our key breakdown of the Insta360 X4 versus the Insta360 X3.

The jump to 8K is here

The big flagship upgrade of the X4 is that it has the ability to shoot 8K footage at 30fps. That’s a huge leap over the 5.7K cap on the X3, and it’ll no doubt mean that the X4 will be the go-to for professional content creators who need the highest level of detail when capturing footage.

This has also led to a bump for the resolution modes that sit below 8K, as the X4 can now shoot 60fps in 5.7K and a whopping 100fps in 4K. I think that these are the upgrades that will matter to most vloggers as 8K is still far away from being the accepted standard, but it does mean that the X4 will be future-proof for quite some time to come.

Photo resolution remains the same at 72MP so you can expect the X4 to also be handy in a pinch if you want to capture the shot of an expansive vista to then be shared on social media.

A welcome battery boost

An upgrade that’s always welcome news to any vlogger – the Insta360 X4 features a much beefier battery than its predecessor. This time making the leap from 1800mAh to 2290mAh, the X4 is now capable of filming for up to 135 minutes at 5.7K 30fps. Compared to the quoted run time of 81 minutes for the X3, that’s a huge improvement that could make the difference between capturing the shot you’re after and needing to retire early to top up the battery.

The longer run time will also come in handy for modes like TimeShift and Loop Recording which require an uninterrupted flow in order to be used to their greatest effect.

Removable lens guards are back

Interchangeable lens guards have long been a point of contention on the action camera market. Despite the fact that action cams are designed to take a beating, removable lens caps aren’t always the norm, and if your lens does get damaged then it can ruin the filming experience on your device.

Until now, no cameras in Insta360’s X series have had interchangeable lens guards but that changes with the X4 as you can easily swap yours out for a new one if you need to. This is a huge win from a consumer standpoint as it means your action camera won’t be made redundant solely as a result of any damage to the lens.

Price

This is one area that could be make or break for the Insta360 X4. Unfortunately the camera has kept up the recent action camera trend of bringing a price increase into the equation with an RRP of £499.99/€559.99 at launch.

Not only is that quite a hefty uptick on the X3’s £459.99/€539.99 launch price, but that older camera can now be picked up for £408.99/€479.99 at the time of publishing.

Early verdict

While there’s certainly a lot to like about the Insta360 X4, and it’s definitely shaping up to be the go-to flagship device in this area, it doesn’t represent quite the same monumental shift in design and feature set that the Insta360 X3 did.

There’s also the issue of the X3 now being available for a much cheaper price than the X4 which might make it the better buy for casual vloggers given that the X4’s upgrades seem more suited to professional filmmakers.

You might like…

The post Insta360 X4 vs Insta360 X3: Does the new action cam reign supreme? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Motorola Edge 50 Pro vs OnePlus 12: Which phone wins?

Adam Speight — Tue, 16 Apr 2024 11:29:30 +0000

Motorola has just announced a swathe of new premium phones, with a swanky new design and boosted camera features taking centre stage. We’re comparing them with the competition.

If you’re looking at a phone in the spaces below a grand, there’s a fierce set of phones available. The new Motorola Edge 50 Pro enters that space and it has a tough rival to contend with in the form of the OnePlus 12. However, there’s quite a lot to differentiate these two premium offerings. We’ve reviewed the OnePlus and gone hands-on with the new Motorola, so let us walk you through the key differences.

The Edge 50 Pro is cheaper

Budget is often the deciding factor for most and there’s quite a disparity in price between these two phones and, to be frank, the OnePlus 12 lines up more directly with the new Motorola Edge 50 Ultra. However, it’s worth putting it up against the lower Pro model to see if you feel like you could make some key compromises to get a hefty saving.

Get the S23 Ultra on the cheap

Despite still being a fantastic phone in 2024, the S23 Ultra has taken a huge tumble in price, letting you nab a ‘like new’ refurbished model for almost half of what the phone cost at launch.

Giffgaff
Was £1249 at launch
Now just £669 ‘like new’

View Deal

The hefty saving is around £250, with the Motorola starting at £599 while the OnePlus 12 starts at £849. As you’ll see, this affords a few more luxuries with the OnePlus 12, but the Edge 50 Pro has a lot to offer.

Better display and more power for the OnePlus 12

The extra cost means the OnePlus 12 is able to provide a luxury 1440 x 3168 resolution AMOLED display, measuring in at 6.82 inches. By comparison, the Motorola Edge 50 Pro offers a lower 1220 x 2712 OLED panel. Though, Motorola has the edge on refresh rate at 144Hz compared with 120Hz on the OnePlus 12.

OnePlus 12 – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

However, the OnePlus continues coming out on top with the chipset, offering the flagship Snapdragon 8 Gen 3, compared with the 7 Gen 3 in the Motorola. The former offers higher clock counts and you also get 12GB RAM with the OnePlus, while the Edge 50 Pro simply comes with 8GB RAM. The Motorola specs remain strong for a mid-ranger though, even it is eclipsed by its higher-priced rival.

OnePlus wins on battery size but not charging

The Motorola Edge 50 Pro comes with rapid 125W fast wired charging and a 4500mAh battery. By comparison, the OnePlus 12 is at a, still fast, 100W charging and a significantly larger 5400mAh battery.

These phones are equal in the wireless charging department though. Both offer 50W top-up speeds if you’re cable-averse.

The Motorola is slimmer and lighter

One area in which Motorola benefits from not offering such power-related hefty is in the design. If you like a trimmer device then that could swing you the way of the Edge 50 Pro. It weighs just 186g and is 8.19mm. Those are impressively thin and light compared to the 220g and 9.2mm thickness of the OnePlus 12.

Motorola Edge 50 Pro – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

OnePlus offers more powerful cameras, but Motorola has AI

Photography fans will likely want to opt for the OnePlus 12, with a 50MP wide angle, 64MP telephoto and 48MP ultra-wide sitting around the back of this phone.

Comparatively, the Motorola comes with a 50MP wide, 13MP ultra-wide and 10MP telephoto. The proof will be in the pudding once we’ve fully reviewed the Edge 50 Pro but, in our review of the OnePlus 12, we called its camera, a “much more versatile shooter” than its predecessor.

OnePlus 12 – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The Motorola does have the lead on the megapixel front with the selfie camera though, hitting 50MP versus 32MP on the OnePlus.

OnePlus may win for raw power on the photography front but the 12 neglected to take advantage of AI capabilities that its more powerful chip could afford it.

The Edge 50 Pro obliges though, touting AI-powered Photo Enhancement Engine, Adaptive Stabilisation, Auto Focus Tracking and Style Sync.

You might like…

The post Motorola Edge 50 Pro vs OnePlus 12: Which phone wins? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Motorola Edge 50 Pro vs Motorola Edge 40 Pro: What’s new?

Hannah Davies — Tue, 16 Apr 2024 11:00:00 +0000

Motorola recently revealed its Edge 50 family consisting of the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra, Motorola Edge 50 Pro, and Motorola Edge 50 Fusion.

We’ve put the middle model – the Motorola Edge 50 Pro – head-to-head with last year’s Motorola Edge 40 Pro in this versus guide. Scroll down to discover how these two Motorola smartphones compare and what’s new on the Edge 50 Pro.

The Motorola 50 Pro comes in three new colours

The Motorola Edge 50 Pro shares a similar design with the Motorola Edge 40 Pro, with its curved edges and square camera module. However, the two phones come with different finishes.

The Edge 40 Pro comes in two matte plastic colours, Interstellar Black and Lunar Blue. The Edge 50 Pro, meanwhile, is available in three colours, Luxe Lavender Vegan Leather, Black Beauty Vegan Leather and Moonlight Pearl Marble.

The Edge 50 Pro is also 13g more lightweight compared to the Edge 40 Pro.

The Motorola 50 Pro features a newer chipset

The Motorola Edge 50 Pro also takes advantage of an updated chipset in the form of the Qualcomm Snapdragon 7 Gen 3. The Motorola Edge 40 Pro, on the other hand, is powered by the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2.

Both chipsets feature 8-cores but the Snapdragon 7 Gen 3 is newer, having launched in 2023.

You’ll have to wait for our full review to see how the performance compares in our benchmarking tests.

It’s also worth noting that the Motorola 50 Pro packs more storage with up to 512GB available. The Edge 40 Pro comes with up to 256GB of storage.

The Motorola 40 Pro packs in more megapixels

If the camera is your priority, you might be surprised to hear that the Motorola Edge 40 Pro squeezes more megapixels into several of its sensors.

While both smartphones are fitted with 50-megapixel main cameras, the Motorola Edge 50 Prom is flanked with a 13-megapixel ultra-wide camera with a 120-degree FOV and a 10-megapixel telephoto lens with 3x optical zoom. Flip the phone over and you’ll find a large 50-megapixel front camera.

The Edge 40 Pro, meanwhile, pairs its 50-megapixel main sensor with a second 50-megapixel ultra-wide sensor with a 114-degree FOV and a 12-megapixel portrait lens with 2x telephoto support. There’s also a 60-megapixel selfie camera on the front of the phone.

The Motorola 50 Pro supports 50W wireless charging

Finally, there’s the charging speed to consider.

While both the Motorola Edge 50 Pro and the Motorola Edge 40 Pro support 125W TurboPower charging, only the Edge 50 Pro also includes 50W wireless charging. That’s a substantial step up from the 15W wireless charging speeds on the Edge 40 Pro.

Though, again, you’ll need to wait for our full review to find out how the battery performs in real-world use.

You might like…

The post Motorola Edge 50 Pro vs Motorola Edge 40 Pro: What’s new? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Motorola Edge 50 Ultra vs Motorola Edge 50 Pro: What's the difference?

Lewis Painter — Tue, 16 Apr 2024 11:00:00 +0000

Motorola has announced the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra and the Motorola Edge 50 Pro, but what’s the difference between the two stylish smartphones?

While the two may sport the same premium design and vibrant colour options that Motorola is well known for, there are a few key differences between the two that could sway your vote between the £599 Edge 50 Pro and the top-end £849 Edge 50 Ultra.

While we haven’t yet fully reviewed the new smartphones, we have gone hands-on, giving us some idea of what’s on offer. With that said, here are some of the most important differences between the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra and Motorola Edge 50 Pro.

The Motorola Edge 50 Ultra is more powerful

When it comes to pure processing power, the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra stands out. It uses Qualcomm’s new Snapdragon 8s Gen 3 chipset, which was announced in March – in fact, it’s one of the first smartphones to use the new chipset.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

It’s not quite on the same level as the flagship Snapdragon 8 Gen 3, which is still the more powerful of the two chipsets, but according to Qualcomm, it’s somewhere between the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 and Gen 3 in terms of power.

The Motorola Edge 50 Pro, on the other hand, features the mid-range Snapdragon 7 Gen 3. It’s still a capable chipset for general use and gaming, but it can’t quite match the output of the Ultra’s 8s Gen 3.

The Motorola Edge 50 Ultra has a higher-res display

While manufacturers tend to use the display to differentiate between different models in a phone collection, that’s not the case with the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra and Edge 50 Pro – in most respects, anyway.

You see, regardless of the model you opt for, you’ll find the same 6.7-inch pOLED screen with a rapid 144Hz refresh rate usually exclusive to gaming phones, and they both offer the same boosted 360Hz touch sample rate to further enhance the gaming experience on offer. They also support formats like HDR10+ to round off the premium offering.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

In fact, one of the few differences between them seems to be resolution, with the top-end Ultra model sporting a ‘Super HD’ resolution of 2712 x 1220, compared to the Pro’s Full HD+ resolution. Motorola claims that this is 13% higher than the previous generation, though whether this is that notable in real-world use is yet to be seen.

The Motorola Edge 50 Ultra has a more capable camera system

One of the main areas where the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra and Edge 50 Pro differ is in the camera department.

The Motorola Edge 50 Ultra sports a main 50MP snapper with a wide 1/1.3-inch sensor, combined with an f/1.6 aperture, omnidirectional PDAF and OIS. That’s blacked up by a 50MP ultrawide with a 122-degree FOV with an f/2.0 aperture and a 64MP 3x telephoto lens with 100x digital zoom capabilities. There’s also a 50MP selfie camera for equally high-quality selfies, and the Ultra also uses GenAI to boost general photo and video performance too.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The Motorola Edge 50 Pro, on the other hand, sports a 50MP main camera with a slightly smaller 1/1.55-inch sensor and a wider f/1.4 aperture, along with PDAF and OIS, coupled with a 10MP 3x telephoto lens and a 13MP 120-degree ultrawide. It does at least match the Ultra’s 50MP selfie camera, however.

Both have super-fast 125W charging capabilities

While the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra has the upper hand in many aspects, the Motorola Edge 50 Pro matches the Ultra’s super-fast 125W fast charging technology, which is among the fastest on the market.

The firm claims that the 125W super charging tech can deliver “power for the day” in just 4 minutes. That’s not a full charge, to be clear, but given that the 100W OnePlus 12 can get a full charge in 26 minutes, it certainly looks promising for both smartphones.

Of course, the Ultra can’t be outdone by the Pro, which is why it also includes 50W wireless charging capabilities to separate itself. You’ll need a special Motorola-branded wireless charger to take advantage of the super-fast speeds, but at least it’s an option.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Both phones feature Moto AI

First teased in 2023, both the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra and 50 Pro sport Motorola’s new Moto AI. While it’s not quite on the same level as Samsung’s Galaxy AI, it does enable some fun new features for the phones.

Both will get access to Style Sync, which allows users to upload photos of their outfits to generate matching wallpapers. It also includes the usual GenAI wallpaper capabilities we’ve seen from Google, Asus, and Samsung in the past few months.

The Edge 50 Ultra also takes advantage of Moto AI in the camera department. The GenAI tech allows for features like adaptive stabilisation, auto-focus tracking, action shot functionality, and improved long exposure capture to further improve the top-end camera experience on offer.

The firm also claims that Moto AI will soon be able to provide enhanced search functionality that, in addition to searching for apps, contacts and settings, will be able to “access even more information off their device with the help of web search and generative AI” though exactly when this functionality will be rolled out is TBC.

You might like…

The post Motorola Edge 50 Ultra vs Motorola Edge 50 Pro: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Motorola Edge 50 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra: Which is best?

Ryan Jones — Tue, 16 Apr 2024 11:00:00 +0000

The Motorola Edge 50 Ultra is a new flagship smartphone from Motorola, as the famous smartphone brand looks to take on the likes of Apple, Samsung and more.

For this comparison guide, we’ll be focusing on how the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra compares to the Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra, and how they differ in terms of features and specs.

So without further ado, here’s everything you need to know about the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra and Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra.

Motorola Edge 50 Ultra has a wooden finish

The most peculiar aspect about the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra is that it’s available with a wooden finish – yes, you read that right, it’s made out of wood. If you’re not a big fan of the Nordic Wood design, then Motorola is also offering the phone in vegan leather, with Forest Grey and Peach Fuzz colours available.

Samsung has opted for a more classic design, with the Galaxy S24 Ultra clad with glass on both the front and rear. It also has a sturdy titanium frame holding it all together.

Samsung is offering a great variety of colours too, including Titanium Grey, Titanium Black, Titanium Violet, Titanium Yellow, Titanium Blue, Titanium Green and Titanium Orange. This means you get far more options than you do with the Motorola, at least in terms of colours.

Moto Edge 50 Ultra – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra is more powerful

The Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra is one of the most powerful Android smartphones you can buy, packing the cutting-edge Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 processor. Not only is this chip perfect for zipping through web browsers and apps, but is even powerful enough for high-end mobile gaming and content creation.

The Motorola Edge 50 Ultra isn’t quite as powerful, featuring the second-grade Snapdragon 8s Gen 3. While this chip uses the same architecture as its more powerful sibling, it sports lower frequency speeds, and so can’t reach the same performance peaks.

The one thing in Motorola’s favour is that the Edge 50 Ultra features 16GB of RAM, whereas the Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra only packs 12GB. You may notice a difference when having multiple browser tabs and apps open simultaneously, although we reckon the more powerful processor inside the Galaxy will have a greater impact on overall performance.

Motorola has 125W TurboPower charging

One of the biggest trends in the smartphone world in recent years has been the increased speeds of fast charging. The Motorola Edge 50 Ultra fits this bill, with astonishing 125W TurboPower charging. Motorola claims you only need to charge the phone for four minutes in order to get a day’s worth of power, despite having a large 4500mAh cell.

Samsung has so far been reluctant to push fast charging speeds, and so the Galaxy S24 Ultra is restricted to a 45W wired charge which is noticeably slower. According to our testing, it takes 26 minutes of charging for the battery to climb to 50%, and 71 minutes for a full charge.

Remarkably, Motorola’s wireless charging is actually faster than the wired charging of the Galaxy S24 Ultra. The Motorola Edge 50 Ultra flaunts 50W wireless charging, making it slightly faster than the 45W wired charging of the Samsung. The Galaxy S24 Ultra has slow wireless charging too, coming in at just 15W.

Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Samsung has better camera specs

Both the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra and Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra feature a triple-camera setup, with 50MP ultrawide sensors, and telephoto lenses capable of 3x optical zooms.

The main sensor will grab most of the attention for this comparison guide though. The Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra has an impressive 200MP main sensor, whereas the Motorola is limited to a 50MP main sensor.

Of course, the megapixel count of a camera isn’t the only key factor for its performance. Motorola has also highlighted its use of AI to enhance the quality of snaps, especially when capturing motion. That said, Samsung is also leveraging AI for its camera with the latest Galaxy phones.

It’s difficult to determine which camera performance will be best without testing both phones beforehand, but since we’ve already reviewed the Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra, we reckon it’s going to be a tough phone to beat when it comes to camera performance.

It also looks like Samsung may boast an advantage when it comes to the selfie camera performance thanks to its 50MP front-facing sensor. For comparison, the Motorola Edge 50 Ultra is limited to a 12MP selfie camera.

You might like…

The post Motorola Edge 50 Ultra vs Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra: Which is best? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

DALI IO-12 vs Focal Bathys: Which should you get?

Kob Monney — Fri, 12 Apr 2024 15:53:09 +0000

For some, a pair of headphones is something to get you through the day and commute. Perhaps you’ll spend £100, or maybe as much as £300. The following headphones from Dali and Focal have different ideas.

These are headphones positioned towards the premium and luxury end of the headphone market, and they’re not really intended to get you through the day (but you could use them that way, of course); but almost as a fashion statement, a piece of luxury headwear to go with your Louboutin or Burberry bags.

They exist in a different realm of the market, and if that sounds like something you’re interested in, which of the Dali IO-12 and Focal Bathys should you get?

Price

Neither pair of headphones are what you’d call affordable. The Focal Bathys first launched in 2022 and haven’t come down in price by much since. £699 / $799 / €799 is what they’re currently going for.

The Dali IO-12 are even more expensive at £999 / $1299 / €999. However you look at them, you’ll have to fork out a sizeable chunk of change to afford both.

Design

Of the two, the Bathys are smaller (at least they look more compact), and slightly lighter by about 20g. Neither pair trouble the likes of Bose and Sony in terms of weight, but you do feel the weight of the Dali more than the Focal, especially with its square-shaped earcups.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The clamping force is an area we found looser on the Dali than the Focal. Does this make them more comfortable? If a tighter clamping force is an issue then it may be, but we often found that the size of the IO-12 had more of an effect in terms of comfort than clamping force. Both are comfortable but the Dali feels the heavier of the two.

The Focal primarily uses buttons for operation, while the Dali also uses physical controls but positions them around and on the earcup itself. The Dali feels responsive and reliable, while the Focal’s buttons don’t feel quite as nice to use, especially for the asking price, and the playback button didn’t always work.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The general build quality of both headphones is of a high quality, and the aesthetics are quite lovely in both instances and very different from each other. Vegans may not appreciate the use of real leather with the Focal though. We do like the dark chocolate finish of the Dali, but the Focal’s Dune finish is also very appealing too.

Features

If you’re expecting a barreload of features from both headphones then expect to be disappointed. The Dali IO-12 doesn’t even have a control app.

Bluetooth support is practically the same as both headphones can stream in aptX Adaptive Bluetooth, and with both headphones the wireless performance is assured one with only minor breaks in the signal even in busy areas.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Both headphone also supports active noise cancellation, and the Focal is the better performer of the two in our opinion. It suppresses more noise than the Dali does, and while neither is necessarily the most impressive ANC pair for the price, the Focal would be our option if you wanted better noise-cancellation, and it offers the ability to tweak how much sound gets let in. With the Dali, ANC is either on or off.

Battery life is claimed to be 30 hours with the Focal and 35 hours with the Dali. In our tests we found they could both last for a long time, the Dali to about 30 hours, while the Focal seems to last for longer. How long we haven’t yet figured out as after an eight hour drain they were still at 100%.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

On both headphones you can adjust the EQ, though the Bathys gives more room to play around by having a custom EQ option in its app. With the Dali you can only swap between its normal mode and a Bass Boost mode (which we don’t think is as good). The Focal & Naim app also has Mimi Sound Personalisation, which adapts the headphones sound to match your hearing ability. Neither pair offers the amount of customisation that you might expect even from less expensive heapdhones, but there’s more room to adjust and customise with the Bathys than there is on the Dali.

Sound Quality

Both headphones sound very good, we will not dispute that, but unless you’ve got deep enough pockets for both, you’ll need to choose between them. Our pick would be the Focal Bathys.

The Dali IO-12 are the warmer-sounding headphone of the two, and they reproduce vocals with a great sense of smoothness and detail. The soundstage has a little more depth to it than the Focal seems able to deliver, which helps us position and localise instruments and singers’ voices a bit better.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The Focal, however, is clearer and more detailed with its crisper tone, and this is especially evident with how it handles the midrange. We like how both headphones deal with this area of the frequency range, but we find the Focal presents more insight than the richer-sounding Dalis do.

With regards to bass, the Dali is richer in its performance while the Focal is punchier. Both convey low frequencies with plenty of energy, but we end up preferring the Focal’s tighter and clearer performance. And with the highs, the Focal’s crispness brings out detail a little more than the Dali, which is no slouch either, but again the Focal edges it with more clarity.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Both can used through a wired connection (USB-C is best), with the Bathys featuring a USB DAC to place the headphones in. In either case, they both sound excellent, though the Focal Bathys would get our nod overall; the Dali IO-12 is a terrifically musical listen too.

Verdict

In Focal’s favour is a better noise-cancelling experience, a clear, detailed and inisghtful audio performance and a greater degree of customisation (if you want it). They’re arguaby a little more comfortable to wear, though that might depend more on personal preference.

The Dali’s a great listen too, and their approach to sound is warm, musical one which they succeed with aplomb. Their ANC could be better, especially for how much they cost, but they’re a very impressive pair of headphones in other areas. We don’t think you could go wrong with either pair, but the Focals have a wider appeal. And they’re considerably less expensive too.

You might like…

The post DALI IO-12 vs Focal Bathys: Which should you get? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

PlayStation Pulse Elite vs PlayStation Pulse 3D: Which should you pick?

Jessica Gorringe — Fri, 12 Apr 2024 14:51:49 +0000

Sony has recently launched its latest PlayStation headset offering, the Pulse Elite. Boasting features such as lossless audio and a retractable microphone, the Pulse Elite is a more premium offering to the PlayStation Pulse 3D.

Is it worth spending more for the premium Pulse Elite or is the Pulse 3D perfectly capable for your gaming and communicating needs?

We’ve reviewed both the Pulse Elite and Pulse 3D and compared the two so you can decide which is better for you.

Design

Both the Pulse Elite and Pulse 3D sport a similar black and white design which mirrors the PlayStation console.

While the Pulse 3D has internal dual microphones, the Pulse Elite instead has arms which extend towards your face. The left arm also has a retractable microphone boom offering better pick-up and performance than the Pulse 3D’s internal microphones.

The earcups on the Pulse Elite were reported by our reviewer as being “large and pillow-soft” while the earcups of the Pulse 3D “hug against your head with only the smallest amount of pressure.” Even so, our reviewer did note that the Pulse 3D proved somewhat irritable after five hours of gaming.

Both the Pulse Elite and Pulse 3D feature a soft and flexible comfort band beneath the head strap to automatically adjust the fit, with our reviewer hailing the Pulse 3D as “supremely comfortable to wear for extended play sessions.”

Features

The Pulse Elite cleverly features PlayStation Link, a wireless technology built into the new PlayStation Portal handset for quick and automatic connection without the need for Bluetooth. This is missing from the Pulse 3D, which means it can’t be wirelessly paired to the Portal.

Even so, both headsets come equipped with a dongle to insert into PS4 and PS5 consoles and both are compatible with a PC too.

While both headsets use USB-C charging, the Pulse Elite goes one step further and has an included wall-hanging charging accessory, which lets you sit the headset onto the point for wireless charging.

Audio

Our reviewers have praised both headsets for their immersive audio quality, as both are implemented with PlayStation’s 3D Audio. Our reviewer hailed wearing the Pulse Elite as “akin to an IMAX experience” thanks to the wide spatially aware soundscape and an intense but never overwhelming bass.

Although the Pulse 3D is a more budget option, our reviewer said they “quickly abandoned more expensive, experienced devices” in favour of the Pulse 3D. Even so, the Pulse 3D’s overall audio quality does suffer in busier scenarios.

Our reviewer also suggested that the Pulse Elite isn’t a good all-in-one headset for gaming and general music listening, as it has a tendency to make music performance sound tinny, distorted and lacks detail.

Microphone

The Pulse Elite features Sony’s AI reduction technology which limits background noise and offers great clarity and pick-up. As mentioned above, although the Pulse Elite isn’t the best option for music listening, it does successfully double up as a productivity tool making it ideal for Zoom meetings.

As the Pulse 3D’s microphone is built into the headset, it naturally isn’t as high calibre as the Pulse Elite. Even so, our reviewer still said the Pulse 3D is more than capable when gaming with friends and taking part in Zoom meetings.

Pricing and availability

The PlayStation Pulse Elite is the more premium offering from Sony and currently retails at £129.99/$149.99/€149,99. As the budget option of the two, the Pulse 3D headset currently starts at £89.99/$99.99/€99.99.

You might like…

The post PlayStation Pulse Elite vs PlayStation Pulse 3D: Which should you pick? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Microsoft Surface Pro vs Surface Laptop: Which is right for you?

Ryan Jones — Thu, 11 Apr 2024 16:28:23 +0000

Microsoft makes a great number of laptops, coming in all shapes and sizes. Two of the post popular ranges include the Surface Pro and Surface Laptop, but which is right for you?

In this comparison guide, we’ll be highlighting the key differences between the Surface Pro and Surface Laptop ranges rather than focusing on individual models.

This should help you understand what to expect from each product range, and help determine which is the best option for your needs. So without further ado, here are the key differences between the Microsoft Surface Pro and Surface laptop series.

Price

There isn’t a big difference in price between the two Microsoft Surface ranges. They’re both targeting a similar market: those who need a speedy productivity machine for day-to-day workloads.

The Microsoft Surface Pro 9 has a starting price of £1099, shipping with an Intel Core i5 processor, 8GB of RAM and a 256GB SSD. It’s worth noting that you don’t get the Type Cover at this price, which is required to turn the tablet into a laptop.

The 13-inch Microsoft Surface Laptop 5 is slightly more affordable, with the base model coming in at £999 with an Intel Core i5 processor, 8GB of RAM and a 256GB SSD. That said, those who fancy the larger 15-inch model will need to spend at least £1299.

Design

The key difference between these Surface devices can be found with the design. The Surface Pro is actually a tablet, as it doesn’t come with a keyboard attached, and instead relies on its touchscreen for navigation.

However, unlike most tablets, the Surface Pro runs on Windows 11 and is powered by an Intel Core processor. If you attach the Type Cover, which is a separately available accessory, then you can use it like any other standard clamshell laptop.

Microsoft has played around with the design over the years, shrinking the bezel and weight of the Surface Pro X model for instance, but the core hybrid design has remained the same since its inception.

The Microsoft Surface Laptop range is a lot more straightforward, as it sports a clamshell design like a classic laptop. The downside to this is that you can’t use the device like a tablet, as it’s physically connected to a full-size keyboard. Microsoft hasn’t made many changes to the design over the years, although the available colours have varied.

Screen

There are minor differences when it comes to the screen of both Surface ranges. The Surface Pro is only available in a 13-inch size, but flaunts a 120Hz refresh rate, 2880×1920 resolution and 1200:1 contrast. Rumours indicate the upcoming Surface Pro 10 could feature an OLED screen, but that hasn’t been confirmed just yet.

The 13-inch Surface Laptop only has a 60Hz refresh rate, while the resolution is a little lower at 2256×1504. Contrast is marginally better, but not by much with a figure of 1300:1. All in all, there isn’t much of a difference, but the higher refresh rate on the Surface Pro should translate to smoother scrolling.

That said, it is possible to upgrade to a larger 15-inch screen when purchasing a Surface Laptop. The pixel density remains the same as the 13-inch model, as does the refresh rate and contrast, but it’s at least a handy option for those who prefer big screens.

Performance

Microsoft offers the same configuration options for both the Surface Pro and Surface Laptop. You can configure both ranges with up to 32GB of RAM, and up to 1TB of storage.

We reviewed both the Surface Pro 9 and Surface Laptop 5, with our review units both packing an Intel Core i7-1255U processor. We conducted benchmarks on the two devices, which established that they have an almost identical performance – no surprise considering they’re using the same chip.

With this in mind, you won’t need to worry about the performance when choosing the Surface Pro and Surface Laptop ranges. However, this is an exception, as the Surface Pro is also available with a Qualcomm processor. This is unique to the Surface Pro range, and allowed Microsoft to create a slimmer design while also making 5G connectivity possible, although this chip isn’t quite as powerful as the Intel variant.

Battery life

The Surface Pro suffers a little in the battery department. As all of the components are stuffed behind the screen rather than underneath the keyboard, Microsoft has been forced to compromise on the battery capacity.

In our benchmark tests, the Surface Pro 9 lasted just short of 10 hours when undertaking day-to-day workloads. This should still see you through the working day, but it’s not quite as long as the battery of the Surface Laptop.

According to our benchmark tests, the Surface Laptop 5 is able to last just shy of 13 hours for productivity workloads. That’s a 3-hour improvement over its Surface Pro sibling, despite having the exact same processor.

Verdict

The important aspect to consider regarding the Surface Laptop and Surface Pro is that they have very different designs. The Surface Laptop is a classic clamshell laptop, while the Surface Pro is a tablet that can be turned into a makeshift laptop when combined with Microsoft’s Type Cover.

Otherwise, there aren’t many other major differences. The Surface Pro range now has a speedier 120Hz refresh rate and is rumoured to be getting an OLED screen in the future, while the Surface Laptop range has a longer battery life and a physical full-size keyboard which feels nicer to type on. But both machines offer the same configuration options, so there’s little need to factor the performance into your decision

So in the end it really just comes down to one thing: would you prefer a standard laptop design, or a tablet with the ability to double up as a laptop? Those who answer the former should go with the Surface Pro, while the rest should pick the Surface Laptop instead.

You might like…

The post Microsoft Surface Pro vs Surface Laptop: Which is right for you? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

DJI Avata 2 vs DJI Avata: What’s new?

Hannah Davies — Thu, 11 Apr 2024 13:00:00 +0000

DJI recently announced its newest FPV drone and successor to the DJI Avata, the DJI Avata 2.

The Avata 2 arrives nearly two years after the beginner-friendly FPV drone first landed on shelves in August 2022 and is designed to be paired with DJI’s new DJI Goggles 3 and DJI RC Motion 3. The drone brings an upgraded sensor and increased flight time to the series, among other updates.

Keep reading to discover all the biggest differences between the DJI Avata and the DJI Avata 2.

The DJI Avata 2 delivers better image quality

DJI has fitted the Avata 2 with a larger image sensor than its predecessor, giving the drone the edge when it comes to image quality.

The Avata 2 packs a 1/1.3-inch CMOS sensor that enables a wider dynamic range and improved performance in low-light conditions. The sensor is paired with an ultra-wide-angle lens with a 155-degree viewing angle for immersive aerial photography.

The camera is capable of capturing HDR video at up to 4K/60fps, or slow-motion content at 2.7K/100fps. The Avata 2 also includes a 10-bit D-Log M Color Mode for colour grading.

The original DJI Avata is equipped with a larger 1/1.7-inch CMOS sensor with the same 155-degree viewing angle. The drone also supports the same 4K/60fps resolution, or 2.7K/120fps slow-motion video when paired with the DJI Googles 2 or FPV Goggles V2.

The DJI Avata 2 can fly for longer

The DJI Avata 2 has a longer flight time than its predecessor, allowing it to remain airborne for up to 23 minutes. The DJI Avata has a shorter flight time of 18 minutes, meaning the Avata 2 has the edge by about five minutes.

The Avata 2 also supports PD fast charging, meaning you shouldn’t need to wait long between charges to take flight once again.

The drone is also compatible with DJI’s new Two-Way Charging Hub, which makes it possible to transfer the remaining power from multiple batteries to the battery with the highest charge level at that moment.

The DJI Avata 2 has an increased transmission range

The DJI Avata 2 supports up to 13km of maximum transmission distance, along with a transmission latency as low as 24ms. This is with 1080/100fps image quality and a maximum transmission bitrate of 60Mbps.

The original Avata is capable of transmitting video up to 10km with the lowest possible latency being 28ms for 810p/120fps video with the FPV Goggles V2. The latency increases to 30ms for 1080p/100fps video with the Goggles 2. The maximum video transmission bitrate is 50Mbps.

The DJI Avata 2 has updated safety measures

The DJI Avata 2’s integrated propeller guard is lighter and more agile than than on its predecessor. This makes the drone more adept at navigating tight spaces.

Like the DJI Avata, the Avata 2 also has a Turtle Mode, which automatically flips the drone back into its takeoff position if it lands on its back.

You might like…

The post DJI Avata 2 vs DJI Avata: What’s new? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Oppo Reno 11F vs Oppo Reno 11: What's the difference?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 10 Apr 2024 15:35:03 +0000

Oppo has recently launched its newest smartphone offering, the Reno 11F, in the UK.

Although we haven’t managed to try out the Oppo Reno 11 yet, we have reviewed the Oppo Reno 11F. With this in mind, we’ve put our full review of the Reno 11F against the specs of the Reno 11.

Read on to learn more about the two Oppo smartphones and how they compare to each other.

The Oppo Reno 11 is not currently available in the UK

Launched across Asia towards the end of 2023, the Oppo Reno 11 is not currently available in the UK. The Oppo Reno 11F launched across Asia and the Middle East earlier this year and is now available to pre-order in the UK.

The Reno 11F has an RRP of £349 but customers can claim £90 off now until 26th April if they pre-order the handset.

The Oppo Reno 11F has a flat display

The Oppo Reno 11F has a large 6.7-inch flat display whereas the Oppo Reno 11’s 6.7-inch screen has a 3D curve. Our reviewer, Luke Baker, stated he prefers a flat display as it “reduces unwanted reflections and the colour-shifting you tend to see towards the edges of curved displays.”

As we haven’t tried the Reno 11 we can’t confirm whether that’s the case with this handset, however Oppo claims that their use of the 3D curve “brings the perfect balance between in-palm comfort and visual delight.” Even so, whether you prefer a flat or curved screen is down to your personal preference.

Otherwise, the Reno 11F and Reno 11 have fairly similar displays, with AMOLED and HDR10+ compatibility alongside a 120HZ refresh rate.

Oppo Reno 11F – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Both run on MediaTek Dimensity 7050

Both the Oppo Reno 11F and Reno 11 are powered by the mid-range MediaTek Dimensity 7050 processor, which is the same chip found in last year’s Oppo Reno 10.

Although the Reno 11F was able to handle day-to-day tasks without issue, Luke noticed “the occasional animation stutter when multitasking heavily, but it never fully froze, and it was easy to live with.”

The Reno 11F received a Geekbench 6 single core score of 900 and a multi core score of 2364, which meant it trailed behind similarly priced Android handsets such as Honor Magic 6 Lite.

As the Reno 11 runs on the same chip we’d expect similar results as the Reno 11F, although the former can be configured with up to 12GB of RAM, whereas the 11f is restricted to 8GB.

Oppo Reno 11F – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The Oppo Reno 11 has a telephoto lens

Each handset has a different set of cameras at its rear. While the Reno 11F has a 64MP main lens (without OIS support) accompanied by an 8MP ultrawide and 2MP macro lens, the Reno 11 has a 50MP main (which supports OIS) 8MP wide and 32MP telephoto lenses.

Luke found that although the Reno 11F’s main lens is capable and “takes some great shots, especially in daylight, with plenty of detail and vibrant colours,” it’s let down by the other two rear lenses, with Luke even recommending avoiding the 2MP macro altogether “as it’s just too low-resolution to be of use.”

With this in mind, it’s worth noting that the Reno 11 doesn’t even feature a macro lens and has a 32MP telephoto lens in its place, which allows for a 2x optical zoom to snap faraway subjects.. The Reno 11’s main lens also supports OIS for more stable photography, which was missing from the Reno 11F.

Both handsets also have a 32MP front camera, with Luke noting that the Reno 11F’s front camera captures plenty of detail and has “comprehensive beautification filters” on by default. Again, as we haven’t tested the camera of the Reno 11 it’s hard to know how it compares to the Reno 11F. However, the inclusion of OIS and a telephoto lens is noteworthy nonetheless.

You might like…

The post Oppo Reno 11F vs Oppo Reno 11: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Steam Deck OLED vs Asus ROG Ally: What's the difference?

Ryan Jones — Wed, 10 Apr 2024 13:56:00 +0000

Handheld gaming PCs are the hottest trend in the gaming world, allowing you to play most of your PC games on the go so you’re not confined to your desktop.

The Steam Deck OLED and the Asus ROG Ally are two of the most popular options right now, yet differ in a number of areas. We’ve reviewed both systems extensively, and so are best placed to compare the two devices.

So if you’re stuck between the two, keep reading this comparison guide to find out which handheld gaming PC is the best option for your needs.

Price

The Steam Deck OLED has a starting price of £479, which bags you 512GB of storage space. You also have the option of the £569 model, which upgrades the storage to 1TB and sees the addition of an anti-glare etched glass. The performance remains the same despite which model you opt for.

The Asus ROG Ally is a little more complex. A model with the AMD Ryzen Z1 Extreme is currently available to buy for £599/$599, making it slightly more expensive than the Steam Deck OLED. Asus also launched an entry-level model of the ROG Ally with a less powerful Z1 chip, but that’s now almost impossible to find in stock – it looks like Asus may have already phased it out.

Design and Screen

The Steam Deck OLED and Asus ROG Ally are very similar in terms of their core design. Both have a screen sandwiched by controller pads that feature the same button layout as an Xbox controller. These controller pads are not detachable like they are on the Lenovo Legion Go and Nintendo Switch.

The Steam Deck OLED has two trackpads on the front, helping you to control a mouse cursor when navigating menus. The ROG Ally lacks this feature, which is no issue for action games, but we found it to be problematic for titles such as Football Manager. Both devices offer shoulder buttons, as well as rear pads that allow you to assign macros.

We found the two devices to be reasonably lightweight, with the Steam Deck OLED coming in at 640 grams, and the ROG Ally at 608 grams. Both have a plastic chassis to keep the weight down.

The ROG Ally is the better looking handheld of the two, with a white design and lots of subtle etchings to give it a little more personality. The vents on the rear are even shaped like the Asus ROG logo, while RGB lighting encircles the two joysticks. The Steam Deck OLED lacks personality in comparison, with a bulky black plastic design.

The Steam Deck OLED flaunts a slightly larger screen at 7.4 inches, compared to the Ally’s 7-inch panel. But the more impressive feature is the HDR OLED screen on the Steam Deck, which boosts the contrast and sees an impressive peak brightness of 1000 nits. The ROG Ally screen looks muted and dull by comparison, with a maximum brightness of just 500 nits.

The Asus ROG Ally’s screen does perform better in other metrics. It has a higher resolution of 1080p compared to the Steam Deck’s 800p panel, and also has a faster refresh rate at 120Hz compared to 90Hz. As a result, the ROG Ally screen looks sharper and smoother, but just nowhere near as vibrant as its competitor.

In terms of ports, both portables feature a USB-C connection, headphone jack and microSD card reader. The ROG Ally does one better with its proprietary ROG XG Mobile Interface which allows you to hook up one of Asus’ mobile GPUs to boost performance. That said, I doubt many ROG Ally owners will make use of this niche feature.

Specs and performance

Let’s cut to the chase, which portable offers the most power? The Asus ROG Ally wins this contest, thanks to the AMD Ryzen Z1 Extreme chip, featuring a Zen 4 processor, and RDNA 3 integrated graphics. For comparison, the Steam Deck OLED has an AMD chip with a Zen 2 processor and RDNA 2 integrated graphics.

Our benchmark results show the extent of the performance gap, with the Asus ROG Ally offering a 10fps boost for Horizon Zero Dawn and a 13fps advantage for Cyberpunk 2077. That may not sound like a big difference, but it ensures a smoother performance for modern games while also ensuring the most demanding titles are still playable.

Both devices come with 16GB LPDDR5 RAM and 512GB SSD storage, although the Steam Deck OLED allows you to pay more for a 1TB configuration if you’re craving more install space.

However, Asus has had to make compromises to achieve such a high performance for a portable. With its TDP (Thermal Design Power) ranging between 9 to 30 watts, its processor is incredibly power hungry. For comparison, the TDP of the Steam Deck OLED chip comes in at just 4 to 15 watts.

Our battery drain test shows that this makes a big impact on stamina. When running Horizon Zero Dawn, with the Asus ROG Ally set to Performance mode, we could only get the portable running for up to 90 minutes. Switching the device to turbo mode saw the stamina drop even further to 60 minutes.

As for the Steam Deck OLED, we were able to keep it running for two hours with the performance settings up to the max, and up to three hours when reducing the brightness and reducing the performance to a steady 30fps. This shows that the Steam Deck OLED is the clear winner when it comes to battery life, while the ROG Ally reigns supreme for performance power.

Software

It’s important to highlight the software differences for these two gaming handheld systems, as it makes a big difference to the overall experience.

The Asus ROG Ally is based on Windows 11, which is a pain to navigate on a 7-inch touchscreen without a keyboard and mouse. Asus has at least pre-installed its own software to make it easier to jump into your games, but the process of installing games on the device in the first place can be quite irksome. However, this does at least have the advantage of being able to access any PC storefront, or cloud service such as Game Pass and GeForce Now.

The Steam Deck OLED instead uses its own Linux-based SteamOS software, which is extremely slick. It’s incredibly easy to install your collection of Steam games, with all of the titles popping up on the homescreen as they do on a console. The only limitation here is if you want to explore beyond the Steam ecosystem. It’s possible to install games from third-party storefronts using the Linux desktop, but it’s tricky to navigate so may be off-putting for those unfamiliar with the operating system.

If you’re content with sticking to Steam games, then the Steam Deck OLED is the no-brainer choice. But those who’d spend more time with Game Pass and the Epic Games Store may be better off sticking with the Asus ROG Ally.

Verdict

The Steam Deck OLED and Asus ROG Ally are arguably the very best value handheld PC systems on the market, so you should be happy with either purchase.

We think the Steam Deck OLED is the better option for most people, as it has a fantastically vibrant OLED screen, superior battery life and a more affordable price point.

That said, you may well be tempted by the Asus ROG Ally instead if you’re craving a higher performance ceiling. And while Windows is a pain to navigate on a handheld system, it does at least provide easier access to third-party services such as the Epic Games Store and Xbox Game Pass.

You might like…

The post Steam Deck OLED vs Asus ROG Ally: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

PS5 Slim vs PS5: Should you upgrade to the new PlayStation?

Ryan Jones — Tue, 09 Apr 2024 11:10:00 +0000

The PS5 Slim launched back in 2023, acting as a direct replacement to the original PS5 console, with the mid-cycle refresh seeking various tweaks to the design.

With Sony now phasing out the original PS5, the new Slim model will become the default option, available both with and without a disk drive. However, owners of the original may be considering upgrading to the Slim model, so it’s important to know the key differences between the two.

Having reviewed both iterations of the PS5 console, we’ve decided to create this comparison guide to explain exactly how they differ and whether it’s worth upgrading.

Price

The new PS5 Slim is available for £480/$500 with a disk drive, while the digital edition is priced at £390/$450. These are roughly the same prices that the original PS5 was available for before the introduction of the mid-cycle refresh.

Sony is now phasing out the original PS5 console, so it’s becoming increasingly difficult to find a new unit online. When you can find the original, it doesn’t seem to be much cheaper than the Slim, although that may change during sale events as retailers attempt to clear stock of the outdated console.

Design

As its nickname indicates, the PS5 Slim is slimmer than the original, with Sony reducing the overall volume of the console by 30%. It’s now noticeably less chunky, making it easier to fit under your TV. By slimming down the plastic casing, Sony has also succeeded in making the PS5 Slim 24% lighter compared to its predecessor.

As well as the slim down making the PS5 Slim more practical, but it’s also a lot nicer on the eye. The PS5 Slim now looks curvier, while a stylish groove runs across its casing. You still get the glowing blue light when the console is turned on too.

Sony has now made the disk drive detachable too, so if you purchase the digital edition, you’ll still be able to buy the accessory and connect it to the console. With the original PS5, there was no way to attach the disk drive to the Digital Edition, so this is a welcome upgrade.

The ports have also been shifted around, so you now get two USB-C connections at the front rather than one USB-C and one USB-A. Sony has also shifted the placement of the eject button, which we’re relieved about since accidentally hitting the power button instead was a common occurrence.

Otherwise, everything is pretty much the same. The PS5 Slim still allows you to swap in new faceplates and install a secondary M.2 SSD to increase the storage space, while it comes bundled with the exact same DualSense controller.

Specs and performance

Sony has increased the storage capacity of the PS5 Slim compared to the original, now giving you 1TB of space compared to 825GB. This is a very welcome upgrade, although it’s not really enough to justify an upgrade, especially when you can already expand the capacity with an M.2 SSD.

In terms of performance, the specs are identical. It’s the same AMD processor running the show, so there’s no uplift in processing speeds or graphics power. This means games should run the exact same as they do on the original PS5, with support for a 4K resolution and ray tracing.

Many were worried that the PS5 Slim would be more prone to overheating or whipping up loud fan noise, but that doesn’t seem to be the case. During our testing, we didn’t notice much of a difference between the PS5 Slim and original.

The PS5 Slim supports the exact same library of games as its predecessor, as well as the same accessories such as the PlayStation VR 2 and PlayStation Portal. Strangely, Sony hasn’t added its new wireless technology, PlayStation Link, to the PS5 Slim so you’ll still need to plug in an adapter for new headphones such as the PlayStation Pulse Elite and PlayStation Pulse Explore.

Verdict

There really isn’t much separating the PS5 Slim from the original PS5. The reduction in size and weight is welcome, not just because it looks better but because it’s easier to fit in your cabinet. The detachable disk drive provides more flexibility, while the increased storage allows you to squeeze on more games.

However, there’s no performance increase here or additional features, so it’s difficult to justify an upgrade unless you really, really like the new design. But if you’re yet to purchase a PS5, then the new Slim model is a no-brainer, as it has all of the same features as the original, but with a few improvements at no extra cost. Check out our Best Games Console guide for more options.

You might like…

The post PS5 Slim vs PS5: Should you upgrade to the new PlayStation? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

DJI RS 4 vs DJI RS 4 Pro: What's the difference?

Hannah Davies — Tue, 09 Apr 2024 13:00:00 +0000

DJI recently announced two new gimbal stabilisers, the DJI RS 4 and the DJI RS 4 Pro. Read on to learn how they compare.

Both the RS 4 and the RS 4 Pro are designed to be paired with your camera, allowing you to produce smooth and stable video. However, there are a handful of distinctions you should consider before ordering a gimbal of your own.

Here are the biggest differences between the DJI RS 4 and the DJI RS 4 Pro.

The DJI RS 4 Pro can support heavier cameras

The DJI RS 4 and the DJI RS 4 Pro share similar looks and could easily be mistaken for one another with the same camera mounted atop them. However, there are some key design differences to note.

For one, the RS 4 Pro is capable of carrying more weight. The RS 4 Pro also takes advantage of a stronger carbon fibre axis arm compared to aluminium alloy arm on the RS 4 and has been tested with a payload of 4.5kg (10lbs). This makes it stronger than the RS 4, a gimbal that can carry 3kg (6.6lbs).

This additional strength is vital for the Pro as the gimbal is aimed at video production studios and professional solo video creators who may shoot with heavier cinema-grade cameras and lenses. DJI recommends creators pair the gimbal with the Red Komodo, Blackmagic Pocket Cinema Camera 6K Pro or Sony FX6, for example.

The RS 4 is also marketed toward content creators, but its more affordable price point makes it a more accessible option for those shooting with lighter cameras, such as the Canon R5 or the Nikon Z6 II or Z7 II. The RS 4 is also slightly more lightweight at 1.4kg to the RS 4 Pro’s 1.6kg, making it more convenient to carry when shooting on location.

The DJI RS 4 has a longer battery life

When it comes to battery life, the DJI RS 4 comes out on top, though not by far.

The cheaper model has a slightly longer battery life than its more pricey sibling with 29.5 hours available from one charge when using DJI’s BG70 high-capacity battery grip.

The DJI RS 4 Pro falls slightly shorter on battery life at 29 hours with the BG70 grip. This is likely due to the additional power required to run the more advanced system, making it a small sacrifice if you hope to make use of those extra features.

The DJI RS 4 Pro features AMF

The DJI RS 4 Pro also includes DJI’s Automated Manual Focus (AMF) Human-Machine Collaborative Focusing feature.

This feature gives users the convenience of autofocus but allows them to maintain the ability to switch to manual focus if their focus point changes or they wish to manually intervene during a scene. This transition takes just milliseconds, allowing footage to remain smooth.

On the topic of focussing, the RS 4 Pro also supports DJI’s LiDAR focussing system when used alongside the DJI Focus Pro LiDAR. The accessory enables automated focusing on subjects up to 20m away, with a total of 76,800 ranging points for better human subject edge detection accuracy and to reduce focus hunting.

When combined with ActiveTrack Pro, LiDAR focussing allows the AF to lock onto a moving subject and retain that focus – even if the subject briefly leaves the frame.

The DJI RS 4 is more affordable

Another difference between the DJI RS 4 and the DJI RS 4 Pro is the price.

The RS 4 is priced at $549/£469/€549, while you’ll have to pay $869/£749/€869 to get your hands on the RS 4 Pro. This makes the RS 4 the cheaper model by $320/£280/€320 and thus a more affordable option for content creators who don’t require the higher payload or more advanced features reserved for the RS 4 Pro.

You might like…

The post DJI RS 4 vs DJI RS 4 Pro: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

DJI RS 4 vs DJI RS 3: What’s new?

Hannah Davies — Tue, 09 Apr 2024 13:00:00 +0000

DJI has unveiled its latest range of camera gimbals, consisting of the DJI RS 4 and the DJI RS 4 Pro.

designed for solo content creators looking to capture smooth, stable video with their mirrorless cameras. The question is, how does the RS 4 compare to 2022’s DJI RS 3?

Keep reading to discover all of the standout differences between the DJI RS 3 and the new DJI RS 4.

The DJI RS 4 has more room for accessories

The tilt axis on the DJI RS 4 has been extended by 8.5mm compared to the previous generation. This means there’s now more balancing space, as well as more room for camera accessories, such as microphones and ND filters.

DJI has added a Teflon coating to all three axes for smoother movements when mounting heavier payloads. The RS 4 has the same 3kg payload capacity as the RS 3, allowing it to support a wide variety of mirrorless cameras and lenses.

The DJI RS 4 can shoot vertical video natively

The DJI RS 4 takes advantage of a few updates when it comes to setting up shots.

First, there’s 2nd gen native vertical shooting. The gimbal’s horizontal plate natively supports switching between horizontal and vertical shooting without requiring any additional accessories. The DJI RS 3 required the Vertical Camera Mount to shoot portraits and content fit for social media.

There’s also a new joystick mode switch for quick switching between joystick modes for zoom or gimbal control.

The DJI RS 4 features a new stabilisation algorithm

The DJI RS 4 features DJI’s 4th gen stabilisation algorithm – an upgraded version of the 3rd gen algorithm found on the DJI RS 3.

The benefits of this include updated gimbal control algorithms, stabilisation capabilities balanced for different shooting scenarios, and an elevated experience when shooting handheld while walking or running.

The 4th gen algorithm has also been optimised for shooting vertically for better stabilisation of running, low-angle, and other vertical shots.

The DJI RS 4 includes an RSA port

Finally, DJI has included an RSA port on the DJI RS 4. This is a feature that was previously reserved for the DJI RS 3 Pro.

This allows the RS 4 to be used alongside accessories like the DJI Ronin Tethered Control Handle, as well as third-party control handles and remote-control ring handles that weren’t compatible with the DJI RS 3.

You might like…

The post DJI RS 4 vs DJI RS 3: What’s new? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

HP Omen vs HP Victus: What's the difference?

Adam Speight — Tue, 09 Apr 2024 11:41:22 +0000

The HP Omen range has been the flagship gaming offering at the brand for many years now but, in more recent times, its lower-end graphically-powerful laptops got a rebrand. HP Victus was introduced. But, what are the key differences? Let’s dive in.

When looking for a new gaming laptop, you have an ungodly amount of options from many different brands. Some manufacturers like Acer and Asus have a stunning amount of options within their lineups.

Thankfully, HP does keep things a bit simpler, or offers fewer choices, depending on your perspective. You have the HP Omen and the HP Victus lines, each with a few models available. We’ve rounded up the most important things to consider when choosing between these two gaming ranges.

Price

When deciding between the HP Omen and HP Victus ranges, the key factor will likely be price. If you only have the budget for the cheaper HP Victus range, then it’s an easy decision to make. For this guide, we’re focusing on gaming laptops but these ranges do extend across a few desktop options too.

Save 27% on Logitech’s top-rated MX Mechanical Keyboard

Nab the customisable Logitech MX Mechanical Wireless Keyboard in Grey for just £123.47 on Amazon.

Amazon
Was £169.99
Now £123.47

View Deal

If you head on over to the HP store right now, the cheapest you’ll find an HP Omen laptop for is £999/$1,099 and that’s featuring previous-generation components. At the top end, it’ll cost you upwards of £3,699/$2,599.

By comparison, the cheapest HP Victus option is down at £649/$649, also featuring older generation technology. The most expensive Victus pick features the previous generation of Intel tech and comes in at a lowly £950/$1,449.

Design and Screen

The HP Omen and HP Victus differ greatly in their approaches to aesthetics, with the former going for a stealthier design and the latter having visuals more typically associated with gaming-focused laptops. The difference is highlighted by the materials used in both lineups, with Omen largely using aluminium but Victus using plastic. Refreshingly, both include post-consumer recycled materials.

HP Omen Transcend 14 – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

A focus on looks and portability extends to the size and weight of these ranges, with the lightest HP Omen, the Transcend 14, measuring 18mm thick and just 1.6kg while the lightest Victus, the 15-inch model, comes in at 23mm and 2.2kg. These measurements massively fluctuate as you venture into larger Omen devices like the non-Transcend 15 and 17-inch devices, while the larger 16-inch Victus measures larger too.

The quality of the display is restricted on the more value-focused HP Victus range too, with only Full HD IPS screens available across the devices. Refresh rate isn’t as limited though, with a solid 144Hz panel available across Victus.

HP Victus 16 (2023) – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

But, Omen ramps things up a lot more. The range has dabbled in luxury display technology like Mini LED and, more recently with the new Omen Transcend 14, OLED panels. You’ll also find higher resolutions, with many offering Quad HD. The result is a more detailed and lush visual experience than you can expect on Victus, but it’ll cost you more.

When it comes to the keyboard, a key aspect of gaming laptops, our testing has shown recent devices from the Omen range typically coming out on top against Victus. Our review of the HP Victus 16 (2023) touted its keyboard as just “okay” while the HP Omen Transcend 14 offered a low-profile option that our reviewer grew to love.

Specs and Performance

HP may have a tamer set of devices than the plethora offered by some other brands but the options are still extremely broad, so direct comparisons between the many specifications of the HP Omen and HP Victus ranges are tough. However, looking at the options and limits of the specs available can help you make your decision.

HP Victus 16 (2023) – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The HP Victus range currently doesn’t feature the latest and greatest CPUs from Intel or AMD, meaning you’ll have to opt for the Omen lineup to get access to those. On Victus, you can get a current-generation graphics chip, in the form of an Nvidia GeForce RTX 4050, but that’s as high as it goes. So, if you want immense gaming power, you’ll have to look to Omen which can be specced up to an RTX 4090.

HP Omen Transcend 14 – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

In our testing of the HP Victus 16 (2023), which featured an AMD Ryzen 5 7640HS and RTX 4050, we were impressed by its solid gaming capabilities, making the most of its value components. For the HP Transcend Omen 14, the model we tested included an Intel Core Ultra 7 chip and RTX 4060. The results were strong, defying its thin and light design to achieve QHD Ultra visuals at 60fps at the peak of its power.

Battery Life

Like with performance, battery life will differ hugely depending on the rest of the specifications included on the HP Victus or HP Omen model you are considering. Whether it is HP Omen or HP Victus, you can expect the larger models which have a more specific focus on gaming to offer battery life shy of 6-9 hours in general tasking and down towards 0-2 hours of battery life when pushed hard with gaming. Though you should mainly game when plugged into power for maximum performance anyway.

Verdict

The question here isn’t if the HP Omen range is better than the HP Victus lineup as the answer is undoubtedly yes in terms of performance, design and features. Instead, it comes down to a question of value and your needs.

The HP Omen device has options that will suit those looking for luxury design and visuals and/or cutting-edge performance. For the HP Victus, it’s all about providing strong Full HD gaming at a reasonable price. As such, your budget and needs for those more lavish or more powerful features will determine whether Victus or Omen is right for you.

You might like…

The post HP Omen vs HP Victus: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Microsoft Surface Pro vs Surface Go: What's the difference?

Ryan Jones — Mon, 08 Apr 2024 15:55:46 +0000

Microsoft’s Surface series is one of the most popular laptop ranges available, and is made up of devices in a variety of forms.

The Surface Pro series is arguably the most synonymous with the Microsoft brand, with a hybrid design allowing you to use it as both a tablet and laptop once you pair it with the Type Cover keyboard.

However, laptop buyers may be confused by the existence of the Surface Go, which seemingly shares the same design as the Surface Pro. So what’s the difference between the two, and which is the best option for you?

In this comparison guide, we’ll be comparing the two Surface ranges as a whole, rather than focusing on individual models. So if you want to know whether you should buy a Surface Pro or Surface Go, keep on reading for the full breakdown.

Price

The first thing to note is that the two Surface ranges occupy different price points. The Surface Go is pitched as Microsoft’s entry-level tablet. The Surface Go 3 launched back in 2023 with a starting price of $799.

Meanwhile, the Surface Pro is designed to be a more premium alternative, and therefore has a higher price. The Surface Pro 9 shipped with a base price of $999, which means there’s a $200 price difference between the two.

Controversially, both devices do not come bundled with the Type Cover by default, which is required to use the tablet as a laptop. The Surface Go Type Cover costs $129.99, while the Surface Pro Type Cover is even more expensive at $129.99.

Design and screen

The Microsoft Surface Pro and Surface Go share the same design concept, taking the form of a tablet that can attach to a magnetic keyboard. Both have a built-in kickstand that allows it to easily be propped up on a desk.

However, while the two devices look almost identical at first glance, there are few significant differences. Firstly, the Surface Pro is bigger, featuring a 13-inch touchscreen, whereas the Surface Go range is restricted to a 10.5-inch panel.

The Surface Pro also has a superior screen resolution (2880 X 1920) compared to the Surface Go (1920 x 1280), resulting in sharper picture quality. Current models of the Surface Pro use an LCD screen, just like the Surface Go, although rumours indicate that Microsoft could be upgrading to an OLED screen for the upcoming Surface Pro 10.

The Surface Go features a magnesium casing, with the weight coming in at 544g. The Surface Pro series is made up of aluminium instead, making it significantly heavier at 879g – although we found it to still be comfortably light enough to carry around easily.

Performance

The performance is the most important difference between these two tablets. The Surface Go offers an entry-level performance that’s only really suitable for basic tasks such as web browsing, sending emails and streaming video. Even having too many browser apps open simultaneously can see the Surface Go grind to a halt.

The Surface Pro range packs more powerful processors, generally in the Intel Core i5 and i7 ranges (although Qualcomm options are available too) which can handle any productivity workload, as well as more complex tasks. If you need a device fast enough to work on, you’ll most likely want the Surface Pro instead of its Go sibling.

The benchmark graph above highlights the significant performance between the Surface Go 3 and Surface Pro 9. In fact, the performance gap is so big that purchasing an older variant of the Pro series (such as the Surface Pro 7) will still get you far better performance than what the latest Surface Go 3 offers.

Battery life

The battery life will differ for each model in the Surface Pro and Surface Go ranges, so don’t expect the results to be consistent throughout each series.

That said, the Surface Pro has consistently outperformed its cheaper sibling in our battery tests. For the latest models, the Surface Pro 9 lasted close to 10 hours in our productivity benchmark test, while the Surface Go 3 could only last around 7 hours and 30 minutes on a single charge.

This is because Microsoft has fitted the Surface Go range with a smaller battery cell compared to the Surface Pro. This allows the Surface Go to be smaller and more portable, but could prove frustrating for those who like to work on the go.

Verdict

The Microsoft Surface Go and Surface Pro devices may look like similar devices, but they target very different audiences.

The Surface Go is best viewed as a lifestyle tablet, with just enough power for basic web browsing and video streaming. It’s not an ideal option for working, as the performance and battery life hold it back significantly, although the smaller design does make it more portable.

The Surface Pro range is far more ideal for work thanks to the more powerful performance and longer battery life. Even for lifestyle purposes, these upgrades may justify the price difference between the two ranges. And if the Surface Pro 10 rumours are to be believed, it could soon be upgraded with an OLED panel to make it even more enticing.

You might like…

The post Microsoft Surface Pro vs Surface Go: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Apple M3 vs Apple M2: The Apple processors compared

Hannah Davies — Fri, 05 Apr 2024 16:30:00 +0000

It’s been a good number of months since Apple first announced the Apple M3 and the processor has only expanded to more devices since.

The question is, how does the Apple M3 compare to the Apple M2 chip that came before it? Keep reading to discover all the big differences between the Apple M3 and the Apple M2 to help you decide whether it’s worth upgrading.

Specs

The Apple M3 features the exact same core configurations as the Apple M2, including 8 CPU cores and 10 GPU cores as well as up to 24GB of unified memory. This doesn’t mean you won’t experience a performance boost, however.

The increase in speed all comes down to Apple’s move to 3nm processor architecture, which is smaller than the 5nm process used in the M2 series. The smaller process node means that Apple can fit more transistors, boosting the overall performance.

The Apple M3 boasts a whopping 25 billion transistors compared to the 20 billion in the Apple M2. That’s a 5 billion transistor increase in the new chipset, allowing for faster processing.

The Apple M3 also uses the new Dynamic Caching technology in its GPU, allowing local memory to be allocated in real-time. According to Apple, Dynamic Caching “dramatically increases the average utilisation of the GPU, which significantly increases performance for the most demanding pro apps and games”.

Other additions include hardware-accelerated ray-tracking which brings improved lighting effects with boosted shadows and reflections to the Mac series, as well as hardware-accelerated mesh-shading to enhance the capability and efficiency of geometry on the Mac.

Performance

When it announced the M3, Apple claimed that the CPU and GPU were both faster than those on the M1 to an even greater degree than the M2 proved.

According to the company, the M3’s CPU is up to 25% faster than the M1’s whereas the M2’s CPU is 18% faster than the M1’s, while the M3’s GPU is up to 65% faster than the M1’s whereas the M2’s CPU is 35% faster than the M1’s.

Of course, we ran our own tests on the Apple M3 and M2 as soon as we got our hands on the M3-powered 13-inch MacBook Air. We compared the benchmarking results with those of the M2-powered 13-inch MacBook Air and discovered performance boosts across the board, as can be seen in the graph below.

Apple also claims that AI performance is faster on the M3. However, we don’t have any benchmarks to back this claim up.

Devices

As of our last update to this guide, the Apple M3 chipset powers the 14-inch MacBook Pro (2023), 15- and 13-inch MacBook Air (2024), and iMac (2023).

Apple also sells M3 Pro and M3 Max variations which can be configured in the 16- and 14-inch MacBook Pro models (2023).

The Apple M2, meanwhile, could be found in the 13-inch MacBook Pro (2022), 15-inch MacBook Air (2023), 13-inch MacBook Air (2022), 12.9- and 11-inch iPad Pro (2022) and Mac Mini (2023). It also powers Apple’s new Vision Pro mixed-reality headset.

M2 Pro, M2 Max and M2 Ultra variations are also available across Apple’s product line, including the 14- and 16-inch MacBook Pro (2023), Mac Mini (2023), Mac Studio (2023) and Mac Pro (2023) where available.

You might like…

The post Apple M3 vs Apple M2: The Apple processors compared appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Meta Quest 3 vs Meta Quest Pro: Which should you buy?

Lewis Painter — Fri, 05 Apr 2024 12:15:17 +0000

The Meta Quest 3 is one of the most popular standalone VR headsets around, but how does it compare to the premium Meta Quest Pro?

While you might assume that the ‘pro’ VR headset will offer an all-round more premium experience with better performance, more advanced features and more, that’s only half the truth. It’s complicated by the fact that the cheaper Quest 3 not only has a better processor, but the same high-end mixed reality capabilities.

The question is, then, do you really need to buy the Meta Quest Pro? We’ve spent plenty of time in the virtual world using both the Meta Quest 3 and Meta Quest Pro, and here’s how the two compare.

Pricing and availability

Although the Meta Quest 3 is comfortably more expensive than its predecessor, at £489/$499 with 128GB of storage, it’s still half the price of the top-end Meta Quest Pro, which comes in at a cool £999/$999.

In fact, it started at an even more premium £1,499/$1,499 before Meta dropped the price months later, possibly due to the lack of interest in such a high-cost headset.

Both headsets are available to buy now from various retailers in the UK and US, as well as Meta itself.

Design and controllers

Design is one area where the Meta Quest 3 and Meta Quest Pro differ quite drastically. The Meta Quest 3 is a continuation of the design of the Quest 2, which is to say that it’s shaped a bit like a pair of skiing goggles and fits onto your head with stretchy fabric straps – in its default form anyway.

The Meta Quest Pro, on the other hand, sports a rigid plastic headband with a crank mechanism to get the fit just right. The battery pack also lives in the back of the headset to help balance weight, an important factor considering the Quest Pro weighs in at a not-insignificant 772g– 257g more than the 515g Quest 3.

However, the biggest difference between them is that the Quest Pro doesn’t directly cover your face like most VR headsets do. Instead, the slimline HMD sits just in front of your eyes, with no kind of fascia to block the real world from your peripheral vision. This is done to facilitate more comfortable mixed reality experiences, and while it does come with side-blockers in the box for VR sessions, a full fascia – as you get with the Quest 3 – comes as an optional accessory.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Elsewhere, both headsets sport pancake optics that allow for a very slim HMD, especially noticeable from the jump from the Quest 2 to the Quest 3. They also sport USB-C and 3.5mm ports for headphones if the integrated open-air speakers don’t satisfy your needs.

The Meta Quest Pro’s controllers are notable not only because of their compact and ergonomic shape but also because of the tech within. Unlike the equally compact Quest 3 controllers, the Pro controllers sport a smattering of cameras to offer inside-out tracking independent of the headset.

This allows the Quest Pro controllers to continue delivering true 1:1 tracking even when out of sight of the headset, removing blind spots like reaching behind your head to grab a weapon in a VR game and marginally improving performance in fast-paced titles like Beat Saber. They’re also rechargeable, unlike the regular Quest 3 controllers, which require AA batteries to operate.

Features and performance

With the Meta Quest Pro costing practically double what you can pick the Quest 3 up for, it might surprise you to find out that the Quest 3 is actually the more powerful of the two with the Snapdragon XR2 Gen 2 chipset.

The Quest Pro, on the other hand, sports the slightly older Snapdragon XR2+ chipset, and it comes with a boosted 256GB storage as standard.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

That means that the Quest 3 offers serious performance gains that give it the edge when running virtual titles. The pancake optics and enhanced resolution of the Quest Pro do help it compete somewhat, but it can’t render the same high-quality textures and new particle effects that the Quest 3 can.

Instead, the Meta Quest Pro justifies its price with high-end eye- and face-tracking seen by the likes of the $3,500 Apple Vision Pro. This allows you to better express yourself in social VR with non-visual cues, ideal for virtual business meetings and the like that Meta envisions with the Pro headset.

Face tracking on the Quest Pro

It certainly makes for a more natural experience, but to truly benefit, those you interact with also need the Quest Pro. Otherwise, they’re seeing your expressive face while you’re met with the same old blank gaze.

Both headsets also feature improved hand-tracking capabilities, and with a plethora of games and apps supporting the tech, it’s way more useful than the Pico 4 which only allows hand-tracking in the Home UI.

Elsewhere, both the Meta Quest 3 and Meta Quest Pro offer colour passthrough and mixed reality capabilities. The same MR apps work across both headsets, along with the same vast library of VR and MR titles – over 500 at the time of writing.

This is arguably the main reason to opt for a Meta headset in general, with competing standalone headsets like the Pico 4 and HTC Vive XR Elite lacking killer VR titles like Beat Saber.

Battery life and charging

When it comes to battery life, the cheaper Meta Quest 3 has the upper hand – though this mainly comes down to the face- and eye-tracking of the Meta Quest Pro using up a fair portion of the headset’s charge, as it’s rated to last between 90 and 120 minutes on a charge with the features active.

It can be extended to match the Quest 3’s 3-hour battery life by disabling the tech, but that effectively means you’re disabling one of the few USPs of the top-end headset. Kind of defeats the purpose, right?

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The Quest Pro does have one redeeming feature though; simple charging. The top-end headset comes with a charging dock that you can place both the controllers and headset onto for easy wireless charging. It’s a much more convenient option than the regular USB-C charging used by the Quest 3 and the replaceable AA batteries required by the accompanying controllers.

You can, however, buy third-party Quest 3 accessories that mimic the functionality, helping bridge the gap without forking out for the top-end headset.

Final Verdict

While some dedicated VR fans will no doubt be tempted by the face- and eye-tracking of the Quest Pro, the headset’s price – and the fact that the Meta Quest 3 is half the price while offering better performance – means that the Quest Pro will remain a niche in Meta’s VR collection.

For most people, the Quest 3 is the better option. This is further supported by the fact that third-party accessories can match elements of the Quest Pro’s design, from the rigid headband to wireless charging, all at a cheaper cost.

You might like…

The post Meta Quest 3 vs Meta Quest Pro: Which should you buy? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Apple Music vs Spotify: What's the difference?

Hannah Davies — Thu, 04 Apr 2024 14:14:25 +0000

Apple Music and Spotify are two of the biggest music streaming platforms, but if you’re looking to subscribe to one of them, what’s the difference between the two?

Spotify has been around for longer than Apple Music, but both have grown to offer a huge library of music albums, podcasts, and other assorted audio bits. So what’s the difference between the two?

Read for more about the differences between Apple Music and Spotify with regards to the price, interface, audio quality, features and more…

Pricing

An individual Spotify Premium subscription is $10.99 / £10.99 / €10.99 a month. For students that $5.99 / £5.99 / €5.99 a month. Spotify Duo (for two people) is $14.99 / £14.99 / €16.49 a month, while Family plans (up to six users) is $16.99 / £17.99 / €17.99 a month.

The streaming service does tend to offer trial promotions for a month or three to those who haven’t tried Premium before.

Spotify has a free version of its service, which has the same library but features ads and doesn’t allow for the option to download music. Free users also cannot choose and play songs in any order and don’t have access to the highest bit-rate quality either.

Apple Music charges $10.99 / £10.99 / €10.99 a month for its individual membership, or $5.99 / £5.99 / €5.99 a month for students. The platform also offers a $16.99 / £16.99 / €16.99 a month Family plan for up to six people and an all-in-one subscription to multiple Apple services starts at $16.95 / £16.95 / €16.95 a month with Apple One. There’s no free version of Apple Music.

Apple Music

Apple Music gives you access to over 100 million songs and 30,000 playlists, ad-free. Listen online or off, across all your devices, and hear sound all around in Spatial Audio with dynamic head tracking. You can now try 1 month for free!

Apple
Get 1 month free
£10.99 p/m

Apple also runs promotions for its service, offering a 1-month free trial to new users, or a six-month free subscription when you buy certain Apple devices.

To summarise, Spotify’s price increase means that it and Apple Music are at the same price for both individual and student plans. Apple Music is slightly cheaper for families and comes with a lengthy free trial if you’re an Apple user.

User interface

Spotify makes use of a black background with white text to contrast against it. As far as we can tell, there isn’t a ‘light’ theme that reverses those colours.

The iOS and Android apps for Spotify can be a bit tricky to navigate at times, but feature sections like ‘Your Library’ which is where you can access saved songs, albums and playlists. ‘Search’ you see the latest charts, releases and Spotify-curated playlists, and ‘Home’ shows a mix of curated content based on your listening preferences, new releases, recently played content.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Apple Music has a brighter user interface, though the transparency effects and album artwork are presented very similarly to Spotify’s when a track is playing.

The main sections in the app include ‘Listen Now’ for recently played music and recommendations, ‘Browse’, ‘Library’, ‘Search’ and a separate ‘Radio’ button.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Music and podcast catalogue

Spotify features music, podcasts and has recently expanded to offer audiobooks. You can access a catalogue of over 100 million songs along with these podcasts and audiobooks with a free account or Spotify Premium.

However, only Premium members can play songs in any order, download music, listen ad-free and stream at up to 320kbit/s through the desktop, mobile and tablet apps. Free users are limited to a lower quality 160kbit/s.

Spotify doesn’t offer much in the way of exclusive music outside of its Spotify Sessions recordings. However, the service has a growing list of exclusive podcasts.

credit: Spotify

Apple Music offers its own Apple Music Sessions Content and has played host to exclusive content from the likes of Taylor Swift, Drake, Pharrell Williams and more in the past.

More generally speaking, subscribers can access over 100 millions songs and 30,000 playlists on Apple Music, along with live radio and curated playlists. However, there are no podcasts or audiobooks, with these instead found in the Apple Podcasts and Apple Books apps, respectively.

One of Apple Music’s biggest strengths is its audio quality. The streaming service supports lossless resolutions of 24-bit/48kHz or Hi-Res lossless at 24-bit/192kHz for CD-quality streaming, although none of Apple’s wireless headphones can play lossless audio, while the HomePod speakers can, but only up to 24-bit/48kHz. That’s a bit of an own goal by Apple.

Apple Music also supports Spatial Audio, a feature that uses dynamic head-tracking to create a more immersive listening experience with the help of Dolby Atmos.

Spotify confirmed ages ago that lossless audio would be coming to the service in its HiFi / Supremium tier. However, this has yet to launch as of spring 2024.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Features

Both Spotify and Apple Music offer an extensive range of curated playlists, content and recommendations to help you to discover and listen to new music.

Spotify also offers features like the Enhance button that adds suggested tracks to your playlists, as well as a Blend feature to generate a playlist with both your and a friend’s music tastes.

Apple Music has live radio stations, while both apps support voice commands with the help of Siri.

However, by far the most talked about Spotify feature is Wrapped – the app’s end-of-year breakdown of your listening habits from the past year. Apple Music offers a similar experience with its annual Replay feature, which includes similar stats and a personalised playlist to help lessen the FOMO when Wrapped drops each December.

Devices

Both Spotify and Apple Music are compatible with a range of devices.

Each service is compatible with iOS, Android, Mac and Windows, along with a web player that lets you access your music on a browser wherever you are. Spotify Connect enables an even wider breadth of support on wireless speakers and music systems, though you can connect to devices with AirPlay 2 on Apple Music, but the same can be said of Spotify too.

The two streaming services are also available to play on supported TVs (although Apple Music is not as extensive), cars, game consoles (including the PS5 and Xbox Series X) and smartwatches, as well as natively on Sonos speakers. Given the breadth of compatibility that Spotify offers, it gets the win here.

Verdict

Overall, Spotify and Apple Music offer similar services. They’re priced similarly, and have roughly the same-sized catalogue.

The main advantage of Apple Music is its audio quality, with lossless resolutions and Spatial Audio supported on the platform, and live radio. The app also comes with a lengthy free trial when you pick up certain new Apple devices.

Spotify, has the allure of Spotify Wrapped, with Apple’s Replay not quite getting the same hype when December rolls around. It’s also more widely available than Apple Music is when you factor in Spotify Connect support.

If it’s access to higher quality audio you want, then Apple Music is the better option. Of course, Spotify offers a free plan too, so if you’re looking to save some cash in 2024, Spotify Free would be your best bet.

You might like…

The post Apple Music vs Spotify: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Steam Deck OLED vs Steam Deck LCD: What's the difference?

Ryan Jones — Thu, 04 Apr 2024 13:35:00 +0000

The Steam Deck is one of the most popular handheld gaming PCs on the market, allowing you to play the vast majority of your Steam games on the go.

Valve has now launched a new Steam Deck OLED variation, which isn’t technically a successor to the original Steam Deck, but viewed instead as a high-end alternative.

Many assume that the OLED screen is the only differentiator between the portables, but this is not the case. We’ve tested both the Steam Deck and Steam Deck OLED, and so have highlighted all of the key differences in this comparison guide.

Price

The newer Steam Deck OLED is available in the 512GB and 1TB models for £479/$549 and £569/$649 respectively. They will become the default models at those storage sizes.

The 256GB LCD version has dropped to £349/$399 and will remain on sale. The 64GB and 512GB LCD models have been phased out, although you may find them discounted in third-party stores.

Screen

As the name suggests, the Steam Deck OLED has a display based upon the OLED technology, rather than the LCD in the original. The OLED panel allows the screen to display true blacks, rather than the dark dreys you’ll find with an LCD. This also boosts the contrast, resulting in a more vivid picture.

In the picture below, you can see that the OLED screen (bottom) produces a cleaner image and more accurate colours, both for the yellow background and the detail on the character. It makes a big difference to the quality of the display.

Steam Deck (top) and Steam Deck OLED (bottom) – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

What’s more, the Steam Deck OLED supports HDR, with a peak brightness up to 1000 nits. The original Steam Deck is restricted to a 400-nit brightness instead. A brighter screen can not only result in a more vibrant picture, but also makes the screen easier to view in harsh sunlight.

Valve has also increased the screen size from 7 inches to 7.4 inches for the Steam Deck OLED. That isn’t enough of an upgrade to make a significant difference to your experience, but it does at least shave away the chunky bezel. The 1TB model of the Steam Deck OLED also adds glare-resistant glass to the equation.

The final upgrade for the screen involves a boost to the refresh rate, jumping from 60Hz to 90Hz. This can help make motion appear more fluid, but only for games where the performance is high enough to generate enough frames. Valve hasn’t improved the screen resolution though, which remains at 1280 x 800.

Design

At first glance, the Steam Deck and Steam Deck OLED appear identical, but Valve has actually added some minor improvements. The new Steam Deck OLED is actually 29 grams lighter than its predecessor. That doesn’t sound like much, but we could tell the devices apart from weight alone with our eyes shut.

Steam Deck OLED – Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Valve has also tweaked the controls, with the analogue stick now sporting more friction to prevent your fingers sliding off. The triggers now also have improved feedback for more satisfying actuation. We also noticed that the haptic feedback on the trackpads has been strengthened, making them more enjoyable to use.

Aside from a new orange-painted power button, the rest of the design remains the same. The Steam Deck OLED uses the same USB-C power port, while all of the same buttons make a return.

Specs and performance

The Steam Deck OLED has been treated to a processor upgrade in the form of a 6nm AMD APU compared to the 7nm variation of the original Steam Deck.

However, don’t expect that to affect the performance, as our benchmark tests showed there to be a negligible difference. Instead, the improved chip has been designed to maximise battery life, but more on that later. On the upside, there’s a larger fan inside the handheld this time, which we found to keep it cooler than the original.

The new AMD chip does at least enable Valve to upgrade wireless support from Wi-Fi 5 to Wi-Fi 6E. Valve says this could be 3x faster for downloading content and could unlock more stable online play with lower latency and increased bandwidth. There’s a larger fan inside the handheld this time, which means it’ll run a little cooler.

The OLED model also comes in a new 1TB storage capacity. Previously, the largest available Steam Deck was 512GB, which greatly restricted the number of games you could install without having to invest in a MicroSD card.

Battery

One of the biggest upgrades for the Steam Deck can be found with the battery life, as Valve has not only increased the size of the cell but also slapped a more efficient processor inside.

While the 40Whr battery on the original Steam Deck proposed 2-8 hours of run-time depending on the activity, the 50Whr Steam Deck OLED promises 3-12 hours in total.

This held up in our testing too. When dimming the brightness and limiting the frame rate to 30fps, the Steam Deck OLED was able to last over three hours when running Horizon Zero Dawn. In the same test with the older Steam Deck, the portable could only last up to two hours.

We also found that playing less intensive games, such as Stardew Valley and Football Manager, saw the battery life last much longer.

Verdict

We were very impressed with both the Steam Deck and Steam Deck OLED, both excelling as affordable handheld systems that can play almost any PC game.

The Steam Deck OLED is clearly the superior device of the two, not only rocking an OLED screen, but also seeing more storage, longer battery life and a lighter design. However, these upgrades are arguably reflected in the price, as it costs £130/$150 more than the LCD model.

If you can stretch your budget, we recommend you opt for the Steam Deck OLED model. But if you can’t justify that much money on a gaming system, then the LCD model remains a great purchase .

You might like…

The post Steam Deck OLED vs Steam Deck LCD: What's the difference? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

iPhone 15 Pro vs iPhone 13 Pro: Should you upgrade?

Hannah Davies — Thu, 04 Apr 2024 12:30:00 +0000

It’s been more than six months since Apple unveiled its latest flagship iPhone, the iPhone 15 Pro.

Here’s how the iPhone 15 Pro compares to 2022’s iPhone 13 Pro now that we’ve gotten the chance to spend more time with the newest model and share our thoughts in our review.

Design

When it comes to their designs, the two phones share similar looks. However, you can expect the iPhone 15 Pro to feel a bit lighter and more comfortable in the hand thanks to its brushed titanium chassis and new contoured edges.

Both phones feature matte glass rears and come in a range of eye-catching colours, including Natural Titanium, Blue Titanium, White Titanium and Black Titanium on the iPhone 15 Pro, and Alpine Green, Silver, Gold, Graphite and Sierra Blue on the iPhone 13 Pro.

Both iPhones are also water and dust-resistant up to IP68.

Finally, there’s the Ring/Silent switch which has been swapped out for a customisable Action button on the iPhone 15 Pro.

Display

The Apple iPhone 15 Pro and the iPhone 13 Pro share the same 6.1-inch Super Retina XDR OLED displays with 120Hz ProMotion refresh rates for smooth scrolling.

Both smartphones also deliver the same 1000 nits of max brightness. However, the iPhone 15 Pro pushes that figure to 1600 nits with HDR or 2000 nits outdoors. The iPhone 13 Pro, meanwhile, is capable of delivering 1200 nits of peak brightness with HDR.

Other advanced features available on the iPhone 15 Pro include an always-on display and the Dynamic Island, a notch alternative that was introduced alongside the iPhone 14 Pro in 2023.

Camera

One of the clearest differences between the two iPhones lies in the camera.

While both the iPhone 15 Pro and the iPhone 13 Pro take advantage of triple camera arrays consisting of wide angle main sensors and 12-megapixel ultra-wide and telephoto lenses, only the iPhone 15 Pro features a wide angle camera with an upped megapixel count of 48 megapixels. This makes it possible to capture “super-high-resolution” images with the latest iPhone.

The iPhone 15 Pro also takes advantage of Apple’s Photonic Engine, while both phones include 12-megapixel front cameras and support 4K video capture at up to 60fps.

That said, the iPhone 15 Pro is again one step ahead in terms of video with its newly added Action mode, Log video recording and support for the Academy Color Encoding System.

We found photos snapped with the iPhone 13 Pro to be stunning with a fantastic level of detail and a good amount of natural depth. The camera also does a wonderful job of levelling out dynamic range and colours in trickier situations while keeping everything looking realistic. The night mode does a great job of capturing detail and natural colours, though the zoom isn’t comparable to the periscope setup on some rival phones.

The iPhone 15 Pro, meanwhile, is capable of capturing vibrant, detailed shots in well-lit locations and offers some of the best natural bokeh in close-up images. The low-light performance remains fantastic in terms of colour accuracy and detail, while the telephoto performance is still ideal for portrait photography but falls short in reach. For this, you’re better off opting for the 5x zoom on the iPhone 15 Pro Max.

Performance

No doubt the biggest upgrade here is the performance of the iPhone 15 Pro.

The latest iPhone is significantly more powerful than its predecessors thanks to the introduction of the A17 Pro, the first in Apple’s Pro line of mobile chipsets. The smartphone also takes advantage of an increased 8GB of RAM. The chipset scored 2855 in our Geekbench 6 single-core test and 7149 in the multi-core test.

The iPhone 13 Pro is powered by the still impressive A15 Bionic chipset and 6GB of RAM, while both phones can be configured with up to 1TB of storage, giving you plenty of room to save all of your photos, messages, apps and downloads.

It’s difficult to directly compare the performance between the two phones as the iPhone 13 Pro was benchmarked using the older Geekbench 5. However, the smartphone did score a single-core result of 1734 and a multi-core result of 4388.

Both iPhones also include Apple’s Emergency SOS feature, while the iPhone 15 Pro offers two additional safety features – Emergency SOS via satellite and Crash Detection for cars.

Battery life

There isn’t much between the two iPhones when it comes to battery life. The bigger difference lies in the port used to charge up the phones.

The iPhone 15 Pro offers up to 23 hours of video playback compared to the 22 hours provided by the iPhone 13 Pro.

The iPhone 15 Pro now supports USB-C charging, opting for the more common port over Apple’s own Lightning port. Not only is this solution more convenient as it allows you to use the same cable to charge more devices, but USB-C also supports up to 20x faster data transfers.

Despite the update, the 20W fast charging speed remains the same, allowing users to reach 50% battery in 30 minutes. Both phones also support Apple MagSafe and Qi wireless charging, with the iPhone 15 Pro also extending its support to Qi2.

Verdict

While these two iPhones may appear the same on the surface, quite a bit has changed in two years. The iPhone 15 Pro has a more lightweight build, a brighter always-on screen, a larger 48-megapixel camera, USB-C support and, of course, a significantly faster chipset.

That said, the iPhone 13 Pro remains a solid phone with many similar features and support for Apple’s iOS interface. You’re also more likely to bag the iPhone 13 Pro at a lower price now that more than two years have passed since its launch.

You might like…

The post iPhone 15 Pro vs iPhone 13 Pro: Should you upgrade? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Meta Quest 3 vs Pico 4: Which VR headset should you buy?

Lewis Painter — Thu, 04 Apr 2024 11:33:10 +0000

The Meta Quest 3 is the VR titan’s latest standalone VR headset, but there’s increased competition in the VR space now than when it launched the Quest 2 in 2020. With that said, how does the Meta Quest 3 compare to the Pico 4?

While both headsets offer a broadly similar experience with slimline HMDs, fairly lightweight controllers and solid performance, there are key differences between the two that’ll influence which you should go for.

That’s where we at Trusted Reviews come in; we’re virtual reality experts, and having spent a lot of time in the virtual world of both the Meta Quest 3 and Pico 4, here’s how the two compare.

Pricing and availability

The Pico 4 is the cheaper of the two VR headsets, with a £379 RRP, though the 128GB model can be found for just £279 at the time of writing. The catch? It’s only available in the UK and Europe, with no official US availability.

The Meta Quest 3, on the other hand, is available in the UK, Europe and the US, and starts at £479/$499 with the same 128GB of storage.

Design and controllers

Design is somewhat subjective, but we feel that the Pico 4 is the better-looking of the two headsets. While both have similarly slim head-mounted displays thanks to the use of pancake lenses instead of older, larger fresnel-based lenses, the Pico 4 sports a stylish shape with an all-black fascia that makes it look more like the Apple Vision Pro than the Quest 3.

The Quest 3, while certainly not an ugly headset, doesn’t look quite as sleek with an all-grey plastic design and a small smattering of cameras placed centrally on the front of the headset, along with cameras around the edges for tracking. The Pico 4 also has cameras for passthrough and tracking, but with a black surround, it’s very hard to spot.

The Pico 4 also sports a rigid crank-style headband, with the battery placed at the back of the headset to help balance the weight – a similar system to the top-end Quest Pro. It really does help, as we felt the Pico 4 had a great sense of balance, while the Quest 3 felt a little front-heavy, especially during longer periods of play.

This does make the Pico 4 harder to transport in a rucksack, but it’s also much more stable and easier to fit than the awkward Y-shaped fabric band of the Quest 3. You can get a similar crank-style band for the Quest, but you’ll have to fork out an additional £69/$69 for the pleasure.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Stepping away from the headset, the Pico 4’s accompanying controllers look closer to those of the Quest 2, rather than the more recent Quest 3. In fact, they look near-identical, with the only real difference being that the Pico 4’s controllers are slightly longer and provide more room to grip.

Compared to the Quest 3’s controllers, however, the Pico 4’s controllers look rather dated. While the two share the same broad design, sporting the same combination of face buttons, grip buttons, triggers and analogue sticks, the Quest 3 ditches the tracking ring present on the Quest 2 and Pico 4.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

This makes the Quest 3 controllers much more compact and easier to use. It also means you no longer knock the tracking rings together when grabbing something with two hands in a VR title.

Aside from that, the experience is fairly consistent among the two, with both sharing the same requirement for AA batteries to perform. It’d be nice to get USB-C charging from both, but at the same time, it’ll avoid the issue of battery degradation so it is understandable.

Performance and features

When it comes to pure processing power, the Quest 3 has the upper hand with the use of the more powerful (and more recent) Snapdragon XR2 Gen 2, while the Pico 4 utilises the same Snapdragon XR2 chipset as the Quest 2.

The newer chipset offers impressive gains over the XR2 chipset, with Meta claiming a boost of 2.5x to GPU performance, 8x improved AI performance and 50% better power efficiency, and that’s clear from the impressive VR experience from the headset.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

We were thoroughly impressed not only by the higher resolution 2064 x 2208 per-eye pancake lenses, but also by the quality of the VR titles themselves, with higher-resolution textures and new particle effects that weren’t possible with the Quest 2’s XR2 chipset. We thought it was a day-and-night visual change and that translates to a great VR experience.

The Pico 4 also has pancake lenses and an impressive 2160 x 2160 per-eye resolution, but utilising the same chipset as the older Quest 2, it can’t quite deliver those same highly detailed textures or deliver quite as high frame rates; the Pico 4 caps out at 90Hz, while the Quest 3 boasts 120Hz support. That said, the experience is still pretty great with the same accurate inside-out tracking as the Quest 3, complete with the same stereo audio support.

Both headsets offer colour passthrough camera capabilities for mixed-reality applications, though Meta’s dual-camera offering is clearer than the Pico 4’s single-camera setup. The Quest 3 also has much more in the way of MR capabilities, with a suite of MR apps – that we’ll come to in a bit – and a dedicated depth sensor that helps it stand out even compared to the top-end Quest Pro, let alone the Pico 4.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

The Quest 3 also offers impressive hand-tracking capabilities, allowing you to ditch the controllers altogether in supported apps and games. The Pico 4 also offers hand-tracking capabilities, but it lacks developer support, meaning it’s relegated to navigating the headset’s UI for now.

App and game availability

While the Quest 3 and Pico 4 are fairly evenly matched in terms of hardware, Meta’s headset pulls away in one key area: game and app availability.

Meta’s VR headsets have been on the scene for quite some time now, with the first-gen Quest making its appearance back in 2019. This means that VR developers have five years to create content for the platform.

Meta has also funded plenty of top-end VR titles, like Resident Evil 4 VR and Asgard’s Wrath 2, which means they’re exclusive to the Quest platform. At the time of writing, over 500 titles are available to download on the Quest Store.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

Quest 3 also has a broad library of mixed reality titles despite only launching in October 2023, and Meta plans to release more MR capabilities – like virtual interactive widgets that sit in your real-world environment – in the future.

The Pico 4’s app library was much smaller at launch in 2022, with only 150 apps available to download on the storefront. Even then, big VR apps like Beat Saber and Among Us were – and still are – missing from the Pico Store.

The company has made an effort to bring big games to the store since launch, with titles like Red Matter 2, Blade & Sorcery Nomad and After The Fall now available on the Pico Store, but it’s still not quite as expansive as the Quest Store’s offering.

This doesn’t matter quite so much if you’ve got a gaming PC and want to play PC-powered VR titles, as both offer wireless connectivity with a local PC, but if you really want to use the headset’s standalone nature, the Quest 3 is the one to go for.

Battery life

When it comes to battery life, both VR headsets should perform on a fairly similar level, though the exact timings will depend a lot on what you’re doing on the headset; you’re more likely to drain the battery playing mixed reality titles on the Quest 3 than standard VR titles on the Pico 4, for example.

Image Credit (Trusted Reviews)

That said, both headsets come with a claimed 2-3 hour battery life which we found to be pretty much on the money in our review process, though the Quest 3 can fare a little better with its new Battery Saver mode activated. It essentially reduces performance with a slightly lower refresh rate and resolution to help the headset last as long as possible, though you won’t see dramatically longer use times with the mode on.

Both headsets charge via USB-C, though the Quest 3 regains its charge a little faster than the Pico 4 with 30W fast charge capabilities. In our experience, it’ll still take around two and a half hours to charge the former, though both headsets can be used while they’re charging as long as your charging cable is long enough.

You might like…

The post Meta Quest 3 vs Pico 4: Which VR headset should you buy? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Google Pixel 8 vs Google Pixel 6: Should you upgrade?

Jessica Gorringe — Wed, 03 Apr 2024 15:22:51 +0000

The Google Pixel 6 was the first smartphone to run on Google’s Tensor chip, but it’s now getting a little long in the tooth. The question is, is it worth upgrading to the newer Google Pixel 8?

The Pixel 8, which debuted in October 2023, certainly offers a refreshed experience compared to the older Pixel 6. It sports not only a third-gen Tensor G3 chipset but also software improvements, new AI photo editing features, and much more.

However, on the flip side, the Pixel 6 is much more affordable now than it once was. That could make it a much more tempting option if you’re not fussed about having the latest smartphone tech. We’ve spent a lot of time with both the Pixel 6 and Pixel 8, and here’s how they compare.

Pricing and availability

The Google Pixel 6 is currently not available to purchase directly through Google and is instead only available from third-party sites for as little as £179 at the time of writing.

The Pixel 8 is available, having only launched in October 2023, and currently starts at £699 / $699 / €799.

Design

It’s clear by simply looking at the Pixel 6 and Pixel 8 that the Pixel series hasn’t strayed from its traditional design, with both sporting a similar form factor.

Both have a protruding camera bar at the rear and a glossy finish, which, unlike the Pixel 8 Pro, means fingerprints tend to show up instantly. The two handsets also have an IP68 rating, which means they are water- and dust-resistant.

The Pixel 8 is slightly smaller at 6.2 inches compared to the Pixel 6’s 6.4 inches. It also boasts a higher refresh rate of up to 120Hz, whereas the Pixel 6 has just a 90Hz rate, which means you can expect smoother animations and scrolling on the Pixel 8.

Camera

Both handsets have a 50MP main camera and a 12MP ultrawide lens at the rear and boast photo-specific AI capabilities, thanks to their respective Tensor chips. It’s perhaps unsurprising, however, that as the newer model, the Pixel 8 boasts better AI capabilities.

While both include features such as the Magic Eraser tool, which easily removes distractions from images, the Pixel 8 includes more tools such as the Audio Magic Eraser, which removes unwanted background noise from videos and Best Take, which assists group shots by generating an image from everyone’s best shot.

Both smartphones are capable of taking images in most environments, from well-lit to low-light, with the Pixel 8 especially able to deliver “punchy” shots “with plenty of detail and impressively accurate colours.” In comparison, although we found that the Pixel 6 was capable, colours did tend to be either too vivid or slightly dull.

Performance

The Pixel 8 runs on the most recent Google Tensor chipset, the G3, whereas the Pixel 6 runs on the first Google Tensor chipset, G1. All three of Google’s Tensor have focused on AI over performance, with the newer G3 naturally boasting more AI capabilities. This includes the new Circle to Search tool, which allows you to search for anything you see on your phone screen, simply by drawing a circle around it.

Although the Pixel 8 has more AI-driven tools, both are packed with AI functions including voice-to-text translation and Google Translate capabilities.

Both offer responsive performance for everyday use, however the Pixel 8 naturally scored higher on our benchmark tests than the Pixel 6. We found the Pixel 6 received a Geekbench 5 single-core score of 1040 and a multi-core score of 2858, whereas the Pixel 8 received a Geekbench 6 single-core score of 1512 and a multi-core score of 4177.

Battery

Although the Pixel 6 has a slightly larger battery size, 4600mAh, compared to the Pixel 8’s 4575mAh, the two are fairly evenly matched when it comes to battery drain.

We found that an hour of Netflix streaming drained the Pixel 6 and Pixel 8 by 8%. We also found 30 minutes of light gaming saw a drain of just 7% on the Pixel 8 and 9% on the Pixel 6.

Google states that the Pixel 6 can support up to 30W wired and 21W wireless charging whereas the Pixel 8 supports 27W wired and 18W wireless charging. Although the faster charging support makes the Pixel 6 seem as though it should be faster, we found a full charge from 0-100% took 115 minutes, whereas it only took the Pixel 8 80 minutes.

You might like…

The post Google Pixel 8 vs Google Pixel 6: Should you upgrade? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

PS5 vs Xbox Series X: Which should you buy?

Ryan Jones — Wed, 03 Apr 2024 11:55:00 +0000

When it comes to 4K gaming consoles, there are two standout options: the PS5 and the Xbox Series X. Being the flagship consoles of the latest generation, they share a lot of similarities. But there are also some key differences that you should be aware of before committing yourself to a purchase.

We’ve reviewed both consoles, and have been continuously testing them since they first launched in 2020. This puts us in a good place to determine the best option for your specific needs, whether you’re looking for the most powerful hardware or the best game library.

We’ve also made sure to test the new PS5 Slim model that has become the default option since 2023, while we’re also keeping the rumoured mid-cycle refreshes in mind, with the PS5 Pro tipped for a 2024 release.

Keep reading to find out how the PS5 and Xbox Series X differ in terms of pricing, specifications, software, games and more, so you can decide if you prefer Sony or Microsoft.

Price

In 2023, Sony replaced the original PS5 with a new Slim model. This is priced at £480/€550/$499 for the model with a detachable disk drive, while the Digital Edition is available for just £390/€450/$449.

Meanwhile, the Xbox Series X is priced at £449/€499/$499, which has stayed the same since the 2020 launch. Xbox is yet to launch a revised version of the hardware, although a mid-cycle refresh is expected towards the end of 2024.

We’ve noticed that both the PS5 and Xbox Series X have been available to buy with discounts and bundles in recent years, especially during major sales such as Black Friday.

Design

Sony refreshed the original PS5 with a new PS5 Slim model, which is now the default option. It’s still using the same glossy white-and-black design, but it’s now 30% smaller and weighs just 3.2kg.

These tweaks have made the new PS5 significantly easier to fit underneath your TV, and looks better for it. Sony is offering up two different models, one with a disk drive and one without. Fortunately, with the Slim model, you’re now able to purchase the disk drive separately and attach it to the console yourself. This previously wasn’t possible with the original machines.

Sony also allows you to snap off the face plates, and add your own. There are now a variety of colours available, allowing you to add a bit more personalisation to the console.

Microsoft hasn’t altered the Xbox Series X since launch. It’s a big cuboid, which looks similar to a PC tower. It’s a little heavier than the PS5 Slim with a weight of 4.4kg. It’s arguable that the Series X is a little less aesthetically pleasing, more like a box speaker than a console. You can at least lay it vertically or horizontally without the need of a stand.

Both consoles offer a very similar port selection of HDMI, USB-C and Ethernet ports available.

Specs

Each of these consoles offers an incredible amount of power to ensure users will have a good few years of use in terms of performance power and technical capabilities.

For a more in-depth look at how the consoles compare, check out the specs breakdown below:

Xbox Series X	PS5
CPU	8x Cores @ 3.8 GHz (3.66 GHz w/ SMT) Custom Zen 2 CPU	8x Cores @ 3.8 GHz (3.66 GHz w/ SMT) Custom Zen 2 CPU
GPU	12 TFLOPS, 52 CUs @ 1.825 GHz Custom RDNA 2 GPU	10.28 TFLOPs, 36CUs @ 2.23GHz
Memory	16 GB GDDR6 w/ 320mb bus	16 GB GDDR6/ 256-bit
Memory Bandwidth	10 GB @ 560 GB/s, 6 GB @ 336 GB/s	448GB/s
Internal Storage	1 TB SSD	1 TB SSD
I/O throughput	2.4 GB/s (Raw), 4.8 GB/s (Compressed, with custom hardware decompression block)	5.5 GB/s (Raw), Typical 8-9 GB/s (Compressed)
Expandable Storage	1 TB Expansion Card (matches internal storage exactly)	NVMe SSD Slot
External Storage	USB 3.2 External HDD Support	USB HDD Support
Optical Drive	4K UHD Blu-ray Drive	4K UHD Blu-ray Drive
Performance Target	4K @ 60 FPS, Up to 120 FPS	4K @ 60 FPS, Up to 120 FPS

The consoles only really differ in terms of GPU and internal storage. However, Sony allows you to upgrade the storage via an M.2 SSD. You can find out which SSDs work with the PS5 in this guide, while we’ve also created a guide to show how to install an SSD inside a PS5. Microsoft instead supports official licensed memory cards, which are easier to install but can be pretty expensive.

In terms of the GPU, Microsoft wins by having more teraflops, but the difference is subtle enough that most players likely won’t notice, and it’s in no way a game-changer when comparing the two. Teraflops aren’t the best metric of performance, more of a metric for how potentially powerful the console could be.

Controllers

Sony has upped its game with the PS5 DualSense controller, which features haptic feedback. In our review, we noted this makes the controller feel very balanced and satisfying to use, the haptic upgrades and adaptive triggers help to transform supported games into more immersive experiences.

The company also revealed another addition to the DualSense family with the DualSense Edge Wireless controller. This controller will allow users to remap specific button inputs, replace stick modules with other designs, swap out stick caps and switch up the back buttons, making it one of the most customisable controllers on the market.

The Xbox Series X controller does not have as much impact as the Sony alternative, featuring the same design as the pad bundled with the Xbox One. While there is not the same level of haptic feedback or customisable features, it feels as comfortable and easy to use as the controller that came before it.

Features and upgrades

Each console has been on the market for upwards of two years, so it’s not too surprising that both Sony and Microsoft have upgraded the features over their lifetime.

Sony has updated the PS5 console a couple of times. Voice chats are now known as Parties, and can be accessed via the new three-pronged Game Base menu.

Players can also pin five select titles to the screen permanently, which will stay in place regardless of what games are played or downloaded. In a previous update, Sony altered the PS5 firmware to allow users to add another SSD to the previously dormant expansion slot, meaning that the console’s overall SSD storage has been increased.

Specific games have had their own upgrades; Horizon Zero Dawn can now be played at 60fps with graphics at their maximum setting, while some upgrades have improved the overall performance. The introduction of VRR (Variable Refresh Rate) also minimised issues such as visual artefacts and screen tearing.

Microsoft, meanwhile, launched the Xbox Series X with the Quick Resume feature that allows players to swap between active states of up to six different games at once. This offers players the means to jump into a game without waiting for the title to load, a feature the PS5 currently does not have.

In terms of upgrades, the Xbox Series X has improved its UI, upgrading it from 1080p to 4K resolution when connected to a 4K display, making scrolling the Home screen more visually satisfying.

Another upgrade that was bought in the Xbox Night Mode, which adjusts the brightness to keep the room dark and assist players sensitive to light. You can also toggle and adjust the light from your connected display, which is not ground-breaking, but a nice add-on in our experience.

Moreover, Microsoft plans on furthering its customisation options in the Xbox Home UI, with options for users to customise the layout with games, Pins and backgrounds.

Exclusive games

Arguably the biggest decider in picking a new console is the games selection that comes with it. While many games can be found on multiple platforms, some games are exclusives, meaning that if you want in on the action, you need to have the appropriate hardware.

The PS5 has a fair selection of exclusives, including God of War Ragnarök, Ratchet and Clank: Rift Apart, Returnal, Horizon Forbidden West and Marvel’s Spider-Man 2. The PS5 has been criticised for sharing many of its exclusives with the PS4, and therefore limiting the technological potential, but Sony has since started to launch PS5-only games.

In comparison, Micros’s current exclusive offering looks pretty slim, with Halo Infinite, Forza Horizon 5 and Starfield being some of the only high profile launches. Xbox has promised more exclusives such as Fable, Avowed and more. All of Xbox’s exclusives will be available though the Game Pass, a monthly subscription service, too.

Both consoles also offer backwards compatibility with previous generation consoles, so it’s worth checking both libraries to see which takes your fancy the most.

Verdict

All-in-all, both the PS5 and Xbox Series X are impressive and powerful consoles that have built upon the hardware that came before them to create new and improved gaming experiences.

While Sony beats out Microsoft with its incredible DualSense haptic feedback controllers, the Xbox Game Pass subscription makes the Series X a cost-effective option in the long run, as you won’t need to shell out $70/£60 for new exclusives like you do with the PS5.

If you’re more interested in cloud gaming and getting a nostalgia fix from older games, you are better off with the Xbox Series X, as Microsoft has been working hard to expand its Games Library. However, if you’re already invested with the PlayStation ecosystem, and are eager to play the next entries of Spider-Man, God of War, The Last of Us, Horizon and more, then the PS5 is your best bet.

While the consoles edge each other out in certain areas, we think that you will have a blast on either console thanks to the powerful specs. Decide on the games you’re most interested in and you can figure it out from there.

You might like…

The post PS5 vs Xbox Series X: Which should you buy? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Samsung Galaxy A15 vs Samsung Galaxy A25: Which budget Android smartphone is better?

Jessica Gorringe — Tue, 02 Apr 2024 14:56:51 +0000

The new Samsung Galaxy A15 and Galaxy A25 join the popular A series as super budget-friendly options that look to offer the core smartphone experience. The question is, what’s the difference?

Although we haven’t had a chance to try out the Galaxy A15 or Galaxy A25 just yet, here, we compare their specs to highlight their similarities and differences to help you decide which, if any, is best for your needs. Do you need the extra bells and whistles of the Galaxy A25, or can you get away with the super-affordable Galaxy A15?

Read on to learn more about the new Samsung Galaxy A series phones and determine which is best for you.

The Samsung Galaxy A25 runs on Exynos 1280

The Galaxy A15 and Galaxy A25 run on different processors, though neither are exactly high-end. The Galaxy A25 sports Samsung’s own Exynos 1280 octa-core processor alongside either 6GB or 8GB of memory and 128GB or 256 GB storage options, depending on the variant you opt for.

The Galaxy A15 instead runs on an unnamed MediaTek octa-core processor and is equipped with a slightly smaller 4GB memory and 128GB of storage.

Both promise fast and powerful performance with spacious memory allowance. As we haven’t yet tested either handset, we aren’t able to confirm how they perform, but it’s safe to assume that the Exynos 1380 will perform better than the competing MediaTek chipset, especially when paired with more RAM.

Both phones have a 6.5-inch AMOLED display

Both the Samsung Galaxy A15 and A25 feature a 6.5-inch FHD+ Super AMOLED display with Samsung not only promising vibrant clarity but also impressive outdoor use (even in direct sunlight) thanks to Samsung’s Vision Booster screen tech.

Even so, the A25 does take the lead slightly. While the Galaxy A15 has a max brightness of 800 nits, the A25 takes it up a notch to 1000nits. In addition, you can expect smoother scrolling and animations with the A25 as it features a faster refresh rate of 120Hz compared to the A15’s 90Hz, though both offer huge benefits compared to standard 60Hz panels.

The Samsung Galaxy A25 boasts OIS-enabled cameras

Although the Samsung Galaxy A15 and A25 both include a main 50MP lens, the A25 features Optical Image Stabilisation (OIS) which should allow it to shoot clear, bright and stable images and videos, especially compared to the Electronic Image Stabilisation (EIS) from the A15.

Elsewhere, both the A15 and A25 have a total of three cameras at the rear, including ultrawide and macro lenses. The A25 specs are slightly higher, with an 8MP ultrawide and 5MP macro compared to the 5MP ultrawide and 2MP macro lenses of the A15, but there isn’t that much in it.

As we haven’t reviewed either handset, we are yet to determine how each phone fares when taking images or shooting videos, but we’ll be sure to update this article once we do.

The Samsung Galaxy A15 is more affordable

The Galaxy A15 is the cheaper of the two budget smartphones, currently starting at £169 / $199 / €199 (without 5G) whereas the Galaxy A25 currently starts at £249 / $299.99 / €299.

The Galaxy A15 is also available with or without 5G support. If you opt for a model with 5G support, then prices start slightly higher at £199 / $199 / €229.

You might like…

The post Samsung Galaxy A15 vs Samsung Galaxy A25: Which budget Android smartphone is better? appeared first on Trusted Reviews.

Versus – Trusted Reviews

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs MacBook Air M3: Which should you buy?

The MacBook Air M3 is powered by Apple’s M3 chip

The Microsoft Surface Pro 11 is designed with AI in mind

The MacBook Air M3 includes a keyboard

The Microsoft Surface Pro 11 includes stylus support

The MacBook Air M3 has a longer battery life

You might like…

Cloud storage vs external hard drives: Which is better?

Sonos Roam 2 vs Sonos Move 2: Which speaker should you buy?

Panasonic Lumix S9 vs Fujifilm X100VI: How these cameras compare

Google Pixel 8a vs Samsung Galaxy S23 FE: Which phone wins?

iPad Pro (2024) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9: What’s the difference?

iPad Pro (2024) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra: Which is best?

Cloud storage vs external hard drives: Which is better?

Is it better to store data on a cloud or hard drive?

Do you need to back up your data?

You might like…

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs MacBook Air M3: Which should you buy?

Sonos Roam 2 vs Sonos Move 2: Which speaker should you buy?

Panasonic Lumix S9 vs Fujifilm X100VI: How these cameras compare

Google Pixel 8a vs Samsung Galaxy S23 FE: Which phone wins?

iPad Pro (2024) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9: What’s the difference?

iPad Pro (2024) vs Samsung Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra: Which is best?

ROG Ally X vs Steam Deck OLED: What’s the difference?

The Steam Deck OLED has better screen tech

The ROG Ally X has a larger battery

The ROG Ally X has a more capable processor

The ROG Ally X has more RAM

The Steam Deck OLED is cheaper

You might like…

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs MacBook Air M3: Which should you buy?

Cloud storage vs external hard drives: Which is better?

ROG Ally X vs MSI Claw: Which handheld should you go for?

Asus ROG Ally vs ROG Ally X: Battle of the handhelds

Microsoft Surface Laptop 7 vs Surface Laptop 5: Should you upgrade?

Chromebook vs Chromebook Plus: What to look out for

ROG Ally X vs MSI Claw: Which handheld should you go for?

Both have similar designs

The MSI Claw runs on Intel’s latest laptop processor

The ROG Ally X has a Corning Gorilla Glass DXC coating

The MSI has access to the Google Play Store

The ROG Ally X has a better battery life

You might like…

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs MacBook Air M3: Which should you buy?

Cloud storage vs external hard drives: Which is better?

ROG Ally X vs Steam Deck OLED: What’s the difference?

Asus ROG Ally vs ROG Ally X: Battle of the handhelds

Microsoft Surface Laptop 7 vs Surface Laptop 5: Should you upgrade?

Chromebook vs Chromebook Plus: What to look out for

Asus ROG Ally vs ROG Ally X: Battle of the handhelds

Improved battery life

Boosted RAM and longer M.2 slot

New placement for SD card reader

New all-black design

You might like…

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs MacBook Air M3: Which should you buy?

Cloud storage vs external hard drives: Which is better?

ROG Ally X vs Steam Deck OLED: What’s the difference?

ROG Ally X vs MSI Claw: Which handheld should you go for?

Microsoft Surface Laptop 7 vs Surface Laptop 5: Should you upgrade?

Chromebook vs Chromebook Plus: What to look out for

Microsoft Surface Laptop 7 vs Surface Laptop 5: Should you upgrade?

The Surface Laptop 7 is a Copilot Plus PC

The Surface Laptop 7 runs on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X series

The Surface Laptop 7 offers up to 22-hours battery life

Both have a touchscreen HDR display

The Surface Laptop 5 is cheaper

You might like…

Microsoft Surface Pro 11 vs MacBook Air M3: Which should you buy?

Cloud storage vs external hard drives: Which is better?

ROG Ally X vs Steam Deck OLED: What’s the difference?

ROG Ally X vs MSI Claw: Which handheld should you go for?

Asus ROG Ally vs ROG Ally X: Battle of the handhelds

Chromebook vs Chromebook Plus: What to look out for

Chromebook vs Chromebook Plus: What to look out for

Chromebook Plus has new Google AI features

Chromebook Plus models have faster processors and double the memory

Chromebook Plus laptops all have a 1080p camera

Chromebook Plus has Gemini built-in